Item 06 Suspension of Competitive Bidding, Contract Supplements and Budgetary Adjustments for the Martin Luther King Jr. (MLK) Library Renovation Project: (C15000840) (Two-Thirds Vote Required) [Published for 10-Day Review 1/23/2025] PART 3 — Sacramento City Council, February 4, 2025 (part 4 of 9)

B. Equivalent equipment manufactured by the other listed manufacturers may be used. Contractor shall ensure that all items submitted by these other manufacturers meet all requirements of the drawings and specifications and fits in the allocated space. When using other listed manufacturers, the Contractor shall assume responsibility for any and all modifications necessary (including, but not lim
ited to structural supports, electrical connections, piping and ductwork connections and arrangement, plumbing connections and rough-in, and regulatory agency approval, etc.) and coordinate such with other contractors.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS SECTION 23 0500-17
C. Any material, article or equipment of other unnamed manufacturers which will adequately perform the services and duties imposed by the design and is of a quality equal to or better than the material, article or equipment identified by the drawings and specifications may be used if approval is secured in writing from the Architect/Engineer not later than ten days prior to the bid opening.

D. This Contractor assumes all costs incurred as a result of using the offered material, article or equipment, on the Contractors part or on the part of other Contractors whose work is affected.

E. This Contractor may list voluntary add or deduct prices for alternate materials on the bid form.

These items will not be used in determining the low bidder.

F. All material substitutions requested later than ten (10) days prior to bid opening must be listed as voluntary changes on the bid form.

1.19 PROJECT COMMISSIONING
A. The Contractor shall work with the Commissioning Agent (CxA) as described in Section 23 0800 and provide all services as described in the Commissioning Plan.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 JOBSITE SAFETY
A. Neither the professional activities of the Architect/Engineer, nor the presence of the Architect/Engineer or the employees and subconsultants at a construction site, shall relieve the Contractor and other entit
y of their obligations, duties and responsibilities including, but not limited to, construction means, methods, sequence, techniques or procedures necessary for performing, superintending or coordinating all portions of the work of construction in accordance with the contract documents and any health or safety precautions required by any regulatory agencies. The Architect/Engineer and personnel have no authority to exercise any control over any construction contractor or other entity or their employees in connection with their work or any health or safety precautions. The Contractor is solely responsible for jobsite safety. The Architect/Engineer and the Architect/Engineer's consultants shall be indemnified and shall be made additional insureds under the Contractor's general liability insurance policy.

3.2 EXCAVATION, FILL, BACKFILL, COMPACTION
A. General:

1. Prior to the commencement of any excavation or digging, the Contractor shall verify all underground utilities with the regional utility locator. Provide prior notice to the locator before excavations. Contact information for most regional utility locaters can be found at the following website (https://call811.com/) or by calling 811.

2. The Contractor shall do all excavating, filling, backfilling and compacting associated with the work.

B. Excavation:

1. Make all excavations to accurate, solid, undisturbed earth, and to proper dimensions.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS SECTION 23 0500-18

2. Where excavations are made in error below foundations, concrete of same strength as specified for the foundations or thoroughly compacted sand-gravel fill, as determined by the Architect/Engineer, shall be placed in such excess excavations. Place thoroughly compacted, clean, stable fill in excess excavations under slabs on grade, at the Contractor's expense.

3. Trim bottom and sides of excavations to grades required for foundations.

4. Protect excavations against frost and freezing.

5. Take care in excavating not to damage surrounding structures, equipment, or buried pipe.

Do not undermine footing or foundation.

6. Perform all trenching in a manner to prevent cave-ins and risk to workers.

7. Where original surface is pavement or concrete, the surface shall be saw cut to provide clean edges and assist in the surface restoration.

8. Where satisfactory bearing soil for foundations is not found at the indicated levels, the Architect/Engineer or their representative shall be notified immediately, and no further work shall be done until further instructions are given by the Architect/Engineer or their representative.

C. Dewatering:

1. Contractor shall furnish, install, operate, and remove all dewatering pumps and pipes needed to keep trenches and pits free of water.

D. Underground Obstructions:

1. Known underground piping, foundations, and other obstructions in the vicinity of construction are shown on the drawings. Use great
care in making installations near
underground obstruction.

2. If objects not shown on the drawings are encountered, remove, relocate, or perform extra work as directed by the Architect/Engineer.

E. Fill and Backfilling:

1. Utilities Bedding: Lay underground utilities on minimum of 6"sand bedding or CA6 crushed stone. Compact bedding under utilities smooth, with no sharp edges protruding, to protect the utilities from puncture. Shape bedding to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of utilities and for joints and fittings.

2. Envelope Around Utilities to 6" Above Utilities: Place sand or CA6 crushed stoneor flowable fill to a height of 6" over utilities in 6" layers. After connection joints are made, any misalignment can be corrected by tamping backfill around the utilities.

3. Backfill From 6" Above Utilities to Earthen Grade: Place all backfill materials above the utilities in uniform layers not exceeding 6" deep.

4. Backfill From 6" Above Utilities to Below Slabs or Paved Area: Where the sand or CA6 crushed stone fill and backfill will ultimately be under a building, floor or paving, each layer of backfill materials shall be compacted to 95% of the maximum density determined by AASHTO Designation T 99 or ASTM Designation D 698. Moisture content of soil at tim e
of compaction shall not exceed plus or minus 2% of optimum moisture content determined by AASHTO T 99 or ASTM D 698 test.

5. Backfill Materials:
a. Sand, CA6: Each layer shall be placed, then carefully and uniformly tamped, to eliminate lateral or vertical displacement.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS SECTION 23 0500-19
b. Native Soil: Native soil materials may be used as backfill if approved by the Geotechnical Engineer. Native soils shall be free of rock or gravel larger than 3" in any dimension and shall be free of debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, high void content, and other deleterious materials. Each layer shall be placed, then carefully and uniformly tamped, to eliminate lateral or vertical displacement. c. Flowable Fill: Cementitious, self-leveling, self-compacting slurry as defined by the ACI with compressive strength of 50-100psi at 28 days; consisting of a mixture of fine aggregate or filler, water and cementitious materials. Filler material consist of sand, fly ash, spent foundry sand, quarry fines, baghouse dust. Cementitious materials consist of Portland cement, pozzolanic materials, and self-cementing materials.

Flowable fill may be placed in a pour instead of 6" layers noted above.

6. Water shall not be permitted to rise in unbackfilled trenches.

7. Dispose of excess excavated earth as directed.

8. Backfill all trenches and excavations immediately after installing utilities or removal of forms, unless other protection is provided.

9. Around piers and isolated foundations and structures, backfill and fill shall be placed and consolidated simultaneously on all sides to prevent wedge action and displacement. Fill and backfill materials shall be spread in 6 inch uniform horizontal layers with each layer compac
ted separately to required density.

F. Surface Restoration:

1. Where trenches are cut through existing graded, planted, or landscaped areas, the areas shall be restored to the original condition. Replace all planting removed or damaged to its original condition. A minimum of 6 inches of topsoil shall be applied where disturbed areas are to be seeded or sodded.

2. Concrete or asphalt type pavement, seal coat, rock, gravel or earth surfaces removed or damaged shall be replaced with comparable materials and restored to original condition.

3.3 ARCHITECT/ENGINEER OBSERVATION OF WORK
A. The Contractor shall provide seven (7) calendar days' notice to the Architect/Engineer prior to:

1. Placing fill over underground and underslab utilities.

2. Covering exterior walls, interior partitions and chases.

3. Installing hard or suspended ceilings and soffits.

B. The Architect/Engineer will have the opportunity to review the installation and provide a written report noting deficiencies requiring correction. The Contractor's schedule shall account for these reviews and show them as line items in the approved schedule.

C. Above-Ceiling Final Observation

1. All work above the ceilings must be complete prior to the Architect/Engineer's review. This includes, but is not limited to:
a. Pipe insulation is installed and fully sealed.
b. Pipe and duct wall penetrations are sealed.
c. Pipe identi
fication and valve tags are installed.
d. Main, branch and flexible ducts are installed.
e. Diffusers, registers and grilles are installed and connected to ductwork. f. Terminal air box reheat coil piping or wiring is complete. g. Terminal air box control wiring is complete and all control boxes are closed.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS SECTION 23 0500-20

2. In order to prevent the Above-Ceiling Final Observation from occurring too early, the Contractor shall review the status of the work and certify, in writing, that the work is ready for the Above-Ceiling Final Observation.

3. It is understood that if the Architect/Engineer finds the ceilings have been installed prior to this review and prior to 7 days elapsing, the Architect/Engineer may not recommend further payments to the contractor until such time as full access has been provided.

3.4 PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A. The following paragraphs supplement the requirements of Division 01.

B. Final Jobsite Observation:

1. In order to prevent the Final Jobsite Observation from occurring too early, the Contractor is required to review the completion status of the project and certify that the job is ready for the final jobsite observation.

2. Attached to the end of this section is a typical list of items that represent the degree of job completeness expected prior to requesting a review.

3. Upon Contractor certification that the project is complete and ready for a final observation, the Contractor shall sign the attached certification and return it to the Architect/Engineer so that the final observation can be scheduled.

4. It is understood that if the Architect/Engineer finds the job not ready for the final observation and that additi
onal trips and observations are required to bring the project to completion, the costs incurred by the Architect/Engineer's additional time and expenses will be deducted from the Contractor's contract retainage prior to final payment at the completion of the job.

C. Before final payment is authorized, this Contractor must submit the following:

1. Operation and maintenance manuals with copies of approved shop drawings.

2. Record documents including marked-up drawings and specifications.

3. A report documenting the instructions given to the Owner's representatives complete with the number of hours spent in the instruction. The report shall bear the signature of an authorized agent of This Contractor and shall be signed by the Owner's representatives.

4. Inspection by State Boiler Inspector.

5. Start-up reports on all equipment requiring a factory installation inspection or start-up.

6. Provide spare parts, maintenance, and extra materials in quantities specified in individual specification sections. Deliver to project site; receipt by Architect/Engineer required prior to final payment approval.

3.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. General:

1. Provide an electronic copy of the O&M manuals as described below for Architect/Engineer's review and approval. The electronic copy shall be corrected as required to address the Architect/Engineer's comments. Once corrected, electronic copies and paper copies shall be distributed as directed by the Architect/Engineer.

2. Approved O&M manual
s shall be completed and in the Owner's possession prior to Owner's acceptance and at least 10 days prior to instruction of operating personnel.

1. Distribution: Email the O&M manual as attachments to all parties designated by the Architect/Engineer.

2. Transmittals: Each submittal shall include an individual electronic letter of transmittal.

3. Format: Electronic submittals shall be in PDF format only. Scanned copies, in PDF format, of paper originals are acceptable. Submittals that are not legible will be rejected. Do not set any permission restrictions on files; protected, locked, or secured documents will be rejected.

4. File Names: Electronic submittal file names shall include the relevant specification section number followed by a description of the item submitted, as follows. Where possible, include the transmittal as the first page of the PDF instead of using multiple electronic files. a. O&M file name: O&M.div23.contractor.YYYYMMDD
b. Transmittal file name: O&Mtransmittal.div23.contractor.YYYYMMDD

5. File Size: Files shall be transmitted via a pre-approved method. Larger files may require an alternative transfer method, which shall also be pre-approved.

6. Provide the Owner with an approved copy of the O&M manual on compact discs (CD), digital video discs (DVD), or flash drives with a permanently affixed label, printed with the title "Operation and Maintenance Instructions", title of the project and subject matter of disc/flash drive when multiple disc/flash drives are required.

7. All text shall be searchable.

8. Bookmarks shall be used, dividing information first by specification section, then systems, major equipme
nt and finally individual items. All bookmark titles shall include the nomenclature used in the construction documents and shall be an active link to the first page of the section being referenced.

C. Operation and Maintenance Instructions shall include:

1. Title Page: Include title page with project title, Architect, Engineer, Contractor, all subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers, with addresses, telephone numbers, website addresses, email addresses and point of contacts. Website URLs and email addresses shall be active links in the electronic submittal.

2. Table of Contents: Include a table of contents describing specification section, systems, major equipment, and individual items.

3. Copies of all final approved shop drawings and submittals. Include Architect's/Engineer's shop drawing review comments. Insert the individual shop drawing directly after the Operation and Maintenance information for the item(s) in the review form.

4. Refer to Section 23 0900 for additional requirements for Temperature Control submittals.

5. Copy of final approved test and balance reports.

6. Copies of all factory inspections and/or equipment startup reports.

7. Copies of warranties.

8. Schematic electrical power/controls wiring diagrams of the equipment that have been updated for field conditions. Field wiring shall have label numbers to match drawings.

9. Dimensional drawings of equipment.

10. Capacities and util
ity consumption of equipment.

11. Detailed parts lists with lists of suppliers.

12. Operating procedures for each system.

13. Maintenance schedule and procedures. Include a chart listing maintenance requirements and frequency.

14. Repair procedures for major components.

15. List of lubricants in all equipment and recommended frequency of lubrication.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS SECTION 23 0500-22

16. Instruction books, cards, and manuals furnished with the equipment.

3.6 INSTRUCTING THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVES
A. Adequately instruct the Owner's designated representatives in the maintenance, care, and operation of all systems installed under this contract.

B. Provide verbal and written instructions to the Owner's representatives by FACTORY PERSONNEL in the care, maintenance, and operation of the equipment and systems.

C. Contractor shall make a DVD video recording of instructions to the Owner while explaining the system so additional personnel may view the instructions at a later date. The video recording shall be the property of the Owner.

D. The instructions shall include:

1. Explanation of all system flow diagrams.

2. Explanation of all air handling systems.

3. Temperature control system operation including calibration, adjustment and proper operating conditions of all sensors.

4. Maintenance of equipment.

5. Smoke control systems.

6. Stairwell pressurization systems.

7. Start-up procedures for all major equipment.

8. Explanation of seasonal system changes.

9. Description of emergency system operation.

E. Notify the Architect/Engineer of the time and place for the verbal instructions to be given to the Owner's representative so a representative can attend if desired.

F. Minimum hours of instruction for each item shall be:

1. Refrigeration System - 8 hours.

2. Air Handling System(s) - 8 hours.

3. Computer Room System(s) - 8 hours.

4. Heat Pump System - 4 hours.

5. Exhaust System(s) - 4 hours.

6. Temperature Controls - As defined in Section 23 0900.

G. The Contractor shall prepare a detailed, written training agenda and submit it to the Architect/Engineer a minimum of two weeks prior to the formal training for approval. The written agenda shall include specific training points within the items described above. For example: how to adjust setpoints, troubleshooting, proper start-up, proper shut-down, seasonal changes, draining, venting, changing filters, changing belts, etc. Failure to provide and follow an approved training agenda may result in additional training required at the expense of the Contractor.

H. Operating Instructions:

1. Contractor is responsible for all instructions to the Owner's representatives for the mechanical and control systems.

2. If the Contractor does not have staff that can adequately provide the required instructions the Contractor shall include in the bid an adequate amount to reimburse the Owner for the Architect/Engineer to perform these services.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS SECTION 23 0500-23

3.7 SYSTEM STARTING AND ADJUSTING
A. The mechanical systems shall be complete and operating. System startup, testing, adjusting, and balancing to obtain satisfactory system performance is the responsibility of the Contractor. This includes calibration and adjustments of all controls, noise level adjustments and final comfort adjustments as required.

B. Complete all manufacturer-recommended startup procedures and checklists to verify proper motor rotation, electrical power voltage is within equipment limitations, equipment controls maintain pressures and temperatures within acceptable ranges, all filters and protective guards are in-place, acceptable access is provided for maintenance and servicing, and equipment operation does not pose a danger to personnel or property.

C. Operate all HVAC systems continuously for at least one week prior to occupancy to bring construction materials to suitable moisture levels. Areas with mechanical cooling shall be maintained below 60% RH.

D. Contractor shall adjust the mechanical systems and controls at season changes during the one year warranty period, as required, to provide satisfactory operation and to prove performance of all systems in all seasons.

E. All operating conditions and control sequences shall be tested during the start-up period. Test all interlocks, safety shutdowns, controls, and alarms.

F. The Contractor, subcontractors, and equipment suppliers shall have skilled technicians to ensure that all systems perform properly. If the Architect/Engineer is requested to visit the job site for trouble shooting, assisting in start-up, obtaini
ng satisfactory equipment operation, resolving
installation and/or workmanship problems, equipment substitution issues or unsatisfactory system performance, including call backs during the warranty period, through no fault of the design; the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner on a time and materials basis for services rendered at the Architect/Engineer's standard hourly rates in effect when the services are requested. The Contractor shall pay the Owner for services required that are product, installation or workmanship related. Payment is due within 30 days after services are rendered.

3.8 RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. The following paragraphs supplement Division 01 requirements.

B. Maintain at the job site a separate and complete set of mechanical drawings and specifications with all changes made to the systems clearly and permanently marked in complete detail.

C. Mark drawings to indicate revisions to piping and ductwork, size and location, both exterior and interior; including locations of coils, dampers, other control devices, filters, and other units requiring periodic maintenance or repair; actual equipment locations, dimensioned from column lines; actual inverts and locations of underground piping; concealed equipment, dimensioned from column lines; mains and branches of piping systems, with valves and control devices located and numbered, concea
led unions located, and with items requiring maintenance located (e.g., traps, strainers, expansion compensators, tanks, etc.); Change Orders; concealed control system devices.

D. Refer to Section 23 0900 for additional requirements for Temperature Control documents.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS SECTION 23 0500-24
E. Before completion of the project, a set of reproducible mechanical drawings will be given to the Contractor for transfer of all as-built conditions from the paper set maintained at the job site. All marks on reproducibles shall be clear and permanent.

F. Mark specifications to show approved substitutions; Change Orders, and actual equipment and materials used.

G. Record changes daily and keep the marked drawings available for the Architect/Engineer's examination at any normal work time.

H. Upon completing the job, and before final payment is made, give the marked-up drawings to the Architect/Engineer.

3.9 PAINTING
A. This Contractor shall paint the following items:

1. All piping in mechanical room

2. Piping exposed in kitchen
B. Paint all equipment that is marred or damaged prior to the Owner's acceptance. Paint and color shall match original equipment paint and shall be obtained from the equipment supplier if available.

C. Equipment in finished areas that will be painted to match the room decor will be painted by others.

Should this Contractor install equipment in a finished area after the area has been painted, the Contractor shall have the equipment and all its supports, hangers, etc., painted to match the room decor.

D. Equipment cabinets, casings, covers, metal jackets, etc., in equipment rooms or concealed spaces, shall be furnished in standard or prime finish, free from scratche s, abrasions, chips, etc.

E. Equipment in occupied spaces, or if standard to the unit, shall have a baked primer with baked enamel finish coat free from scratches, abrasions, chips, etc. If color option is specified or is standard to the unit, this Contractor shall, before ordering, verify with the Architect/Engineer the color preference and furnish this color.

F. Paint all equipment in unfinished areas such as boiler room, mechanical spaces, storage room, etc., furnished by this Contractor. Equipment furnished with a factory coat of paint and enamel need not be painted, provided the factory applied finish is not marred or spattered. If so, equipment shall be refinished with the same paint as was factory applied.

G. Paint all outdoor uninsulated steel piping the color selected by Owner or Architect/Engineer.

H. Paint all outdoor exposed piping the color selected by Owner or Architect/Engineer.

I. After surfaces have been thoroughly cleaned and are free of oil, dirt, and other foreign matter; paint all pipes and equipment with the following:

1. Bare Metal Surfaces - Apply one coat of primer suitable for the metal being painted. Finish with two coats of Alkyd base enamel paint.

2. Insulated Surfaces - Paint insulati
on jackets with two coats of semi-gloss acrylic latex paint.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS SECTION 23 0500-25

3. Color of paint shall be as follows:
a. All piping in mechanical room:
1) Chilled Water: Blue pipe/black letters
2) Condenser Water: Green pipe/black letters
3) Heating Water: Orange pipe/black letters
4) Natural Gas: Yellow pipe/black letters
b. Piping exposed in kitchen:
1) All Piping: White

3.10 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Thoroughly clean all equipment and systems prior to the Owner's final acceptance of the project.

Clean all foreign paint, grease, oil, dirt, labels, stickers, and other foreign material from all equipment.

B. Clean all drain pans and areas where moisture is present. Immediately report any mold, biological growth, or water damage.

C. Remove all rust, scale, dirt, oils, stickers and thoroughly clean exterior of all exposed bare metal ductwork, piping, hangers, and accessories.

D. Remove all rubbish, debris, etc., accumulated during construction from the premises.

3.11 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Contractor shall coordinate the installation of all equipment, valves, dampers, operators, etc., with other trades to maintain clear access area for servicing.

B. All equipment shall be installed in such a way to maximize access to parts needing service or maintenance. Review the final field location, placement, and orientation of equipment with the Owner's designated representative prior to setting equipment.

C. Installation of equipment or devices without regard to coordination of access requirements and confirmation with the Owner's designate
d representative will result in removal and reinstallation of the equipment at the Contractor's expense.

D. Adhesives and Sealants: All sealers, adhesives, and sealants shall comply with the low emitting material limits of the following standards:

1. CDPH Standard Method V1.1-2010 - Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions VOC from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers Version 1.1.

2. South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule 1168: Adhesive and Sealant Applications. All adhesives and sealants wet-applied on site shall comply with the applicable chemical content requirements of SCAQMD Rule 1168.

3. South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule SCAQMD 1113: Wet Applied Paints and Coatings. All paints and coatings wet-applied on site must meet the applicable VOC limits of SCAQMD Rule 1113.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS SECTION 23 0500-26

3.12 MAINTAINING CLEAN DUCTWORK THROUGHOUT CONSTRUCTION A. Throughout the duration of construction, all ductwork shall be capped or sealed with sheet metal caps, polyethylene film, or other airtight protective to keep dust, dirt, and construction debris out of ducts. Similar means shall be used to seal air-side connections of HVAC equipment to include, but not limited to, air handling units, fans, terminal air boxes, fan coil units, cabinet heaters, blower coils, and the like.

B. When air terminal devices are installed, contractors shall seal all supply, return, and exhaust grilles with polyethylene film or other airtight protective to keep dust, dirt, and construction debris out of ducts.

C. Should HVAC equipment be started during construction, Contractor shall remove airtight protectives and shall install one-inch thick MERV 8 filter media over all return and exhaust grilles to prevent dust, dirt, and construction debris from entering ductwork. Filter media shall cover the entire grille face and shall be secured such that air cannot bypass filter media.

D. Should filter media become laden with dust and dirt, Contractor shall replace filter media with new media to prevent damage to air distribution system and equipment.

E. The following steps shall be taken during testing, adjusting, and balancing of each air system:

1. All constructi
on activities in all spaces served by the air system shall stop.

2. All airtight protectives and temporary filter media shall be removed from all portions of the air system.

3. Testing, adjusting, and balancing work shall not commence until all construction activity is stopped and all airtight protectives and temporary filter media is removed.

4. Once testing, adjusting, and balancing work is complete for the air system, airtight protectives or temporary filter media shall be installed over all ductwork openings and air terminals on the air system prior to resuming construction activities in any spaces served by the air system.

F. The Owner shall agree the building is sufficiently clean prior to the removal of any filtration media and airtight protectives from air terminal devices.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS SECTION 23 0500-27

READINESS CERTIFICATION PRIOR TO FINAL JOBSITE OBSERVATION To prevent the final job observation from occurring too early, we require that the Contractor review the completion status of the project and, by copy of this document, certify that the job is indeed ready for the final job observation. The following is a typical list of items that represent the degree of job completeness expected prior to your requesting a final job observation.

1. Penetrations fire sealed and labeled in accordance with specifications.

2. All air handling units operating and balanced.

3. All fans shall be operating and balanced.

4. All pumps, boilers and chillers operating and balanced.

5. All miscellaneous mechanical systems (unit heaters, fan coil units, cabinet heaters, etc.) operating.

6. All temperature control systems operating, programmed and calibrated.

7. Pipe insulation complete, pipes labeled and valves tagged.

8. Fire damper and fire/smoke damper access doors labeled in accordance with specifications.

Accepted by:

Prime Contractor _______________________________________________ By ___________________________________ Date ___________________ Upon Contractor certification that the project is complete and ready for a final job observation, we require the Contractor to sign this agreement and return it to the Architect/Engineer so that the final observation can be scheduled.

It is understood that if the Architect/Engineer finds the job not ready for the final observation and that additional trips and observations are required
to bring the project to completion, the costs incurred by the Architect/Engineers for additional time and expenses will be deducted from the Contractor's contract retainage prior to final payment at the completion of the job.

END OF SECTION 23 0500
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS SECTION 23 0500-28
(This Page Intentionally Left Blank)
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SECTION 23 0503-1
SECTION 23 0503 - THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Through-Penetration Firestopping.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section.

B. Installer: Individuals performing work shall be certified by the manufacturer of the system selected for installation.

1.3 REFERENCES
A. UL 263 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials B. UL 723 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials C. ANSI/UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through Penetration Firestops D. UL 2079 - Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems E. UL Fire Resistance Directory Through Penetration Firestop Systems (XHEZ) F. Intertek / Warnock Hersey - Directory of Listed Products G. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials H. ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops I. The Building Officials and Code Administrators National Building Code J. 1997 Uniform Building Code
K. 2021 International Building Code
L. NFPA 5000 - Building Construction Safety Code
M. CBC California Building Code

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 0500.

B. Submit Firestopping Installers Certification for all installers on the project.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit for each condition requiring firestopping. Include descriptions of the specific penetrating item, actual wall/floor construction, manufacturer's installation instructions, and UL or Intertek / Warnock Hersey Assembly number.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SECTION 23 0503-2
D. Through-Penetration Firestop System Schedule: Indicate locations of each through-penetration firestop system, along with the following information:

1. Types of penetrating items.

2. Types of constructions penetrated, including fire-resistance ratings and, where applicable, thicknesses of construction penetrated.

3. Through-penetration firestop systems for each location identified by firestop design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.

4. F ratings for each firestop system.

E. Maintain a notebook on the job site at all times that contains copies of approved submittals for all through penetration firestopping to be installed. Notebook shall be made available to the Authority Having Jurisdiction at their request and turned over to the Owner at the end of construction as part of the O&M Manuals.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store, protect and handle products on site. Accept material on site in factory containers and packing. Inspect for damage. Protect from deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes. Follow manufacturer's instructions for storage.

B. Install material prior to expiration of product shelf life.

1.6 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: For penetrations through the following fire-resistance-rated constructions, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items, provide through-penetration firestop systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resista nce rating of
construction penetrated.

1. Fire-resistance-rated walls including fire partitions, fire barriers, and smoke barriers.

2. Fire-resistance-rated horizontal assemblies including floors, floor/ceiling assemblies, and ceiling membranes of roof/ceiling assemblies.

B. Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with the following ratings determined per UL 1479:

1. F-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with F-ratings indicated, but not less than that equaling or exceeding fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.

2. L-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with L-ratings of not more than 5.0 CFM/sq. ft at both ambient temperature and 400°F for smoke barriers.

C. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to light, traffic, moisture, or physical damage, provide products that, after curing, do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions both during and after construction.

D. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E

84. IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SECTION 23 0503-3
E. For through-penetration firestop systems in air plenums, provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 50, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.

1. Adhesives and Sealants: All sealers, adhesives, and sealants shall comply with the low emitting material limits of the following standards’ Standard Method V1.1-2010 - Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions VOC from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers Version 1.1.

2. South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule 1168 - Adhesive and Sealant Applications. All adhesives and sealants wet-applied on site shall comply with the applicable chemical content requirements of SCAQMD Rule 1168.

3. SPECIFIER: For California projects.

4. South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule SCAQMD 1113 - Wet Applied Paints and Coatings. All paints and coatings wet-applied on site must meet the applicable VOC limits of SCAQMD Rule 1113.

1.7 MEETINGS
A. Pre-installation meeting: A pre-installation meeting shall be scheduled and shall include the Construction Manager, General Contractor, all Subcontractors associated with the installation of systems penetrating fire barriers, Firestopping Manufacturer's Representative, and the Owner.

1. Review foreseeable methods related to firestopping work.

2. Tour representative areas where firestopping is to be installed; inspect and discuss each type of condition and each type of substrate that will be encountered, and preparation to be performed by other trades.

1.8 WARRANTY
A. Provide one year warranty on parts and labor.

B. Warranty shall cover repair or replacement of firestop systems which fail in joint adhesion, cohesion, abrasion resistance, weather resistance, extrusion resistance, migration resistance, stain resistance, general durability, or appear to deteriorate in any manner not clearly specified by the manufacturer as an inherent quality of the material.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the through-penetration firestop systems indicated for each application that are produced by one of the following manufacturers. All firestopping systems installed shall be provided by a single manufacturer.

1. 3M; Fire Protection Products Division.

2. Hilti, Inc.

3. RectorSeal Corporation, Metacaulk.

4. Tremco; Sealant/Weatherproofing Division.

5. Johns-Manville.

6. Specified Technologies Inc. (S.T.I.)

7. Spec Seal Firestop Products

8. AD Firebarrier Protection Systems
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SECTION 23 0503-4

9. Dow Corning Corp.

10. Fire Trak Corp.

11. International Protective Coating Corp.

12. HoldRite

2.2 THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS
A. Provide materials and systems classified by or listed by Intertek / Warnock Hersey to provide firestopping equal to time rating of construction being penetrated.

B. All firestopping materials shall be free of asbestos, lead, PCB's, and other materials that would require hazardous waste removal.

C. Firestopping shall be flexible to allow for normal penetrating item movement due to expansion and contraction.

D. Firestopping systems for plumbing and wet pipe sprinkler piping shall be moisture resistant.

E. Provide firestopping systems capable of supporting floor loads where systems are exposed to possible floor loading or traffic.

F. Provide firestopping systems allowing continuous insulation for all insulated pipes.

G. Provide firestopping systems classified by UL or listed by Intertek / Warnock Hersey for penetrations through all fire rated construction. Firestopping systems shall be selected from the UL or listed by Intertek / Warnock Hersey Fire Resistance Directory Category XHEZ based on substrate construction and penetrating item size and material and shall fall within the range of numbers listed:

1. Combustible Framed Floors and Chase Walls - 1 or 2 Hour Rated:
a. F Rating = Floor/Wall Rating
b. L Rating = Penetrations in Smoke Barriers
Penetrating Item UL System No.

No Penetrating Item FC 0000-0999*
Metallic Pipe or Conduit FC 1000-1999
Non-Metallic Pipe or Conduit FC 2000-2999
Electrical Cables FC 3000-3999
Cable Trays FC 4000-4999
Insulated Pipes FC 5000-5999
Bus Duct and Misc. Electrical FC 6000-6999
Duct without Damper and Misc. Mechanical FC 7000-7999
Multiple Penetrations FC 8000-8999
*Alternate method of firestopping is patching opening to match original rated construction.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SECTION 23 0503-5

2. Non-Combustible Framed Walls - 1 or 2 Hour Rated:
a. F Rating = Wall Rating
b. L Rating = Penetrations in Smoke Barriers
Penetrating Item UL System No.

No Penetrating Item WL 0000-0999*
Metallic Pipe or Conduit WL 1000-1999
Non-Metallic Pipe or Conduit WL 2000-2999
Electrical Cables WL 3000-3999
Cable Trays WL 4000-4999
Insulated Pipes WL 5000-5999
Bus Duct and Misc. Electrical WL 6000-6999
Duct without Damper and Misc. Mechanical WL 7000-7999
Multiple Penetrations WL 8000-8999
*Alternate method of firestopping is patching opening to match original rated construction.

3. Concrete or Masonry Floors and Walls - 1 or 2 Hour Rated:
a. F Rating = Wall/Floor Rating
b. L Rating = Penetrations in Smoke Barriers
Penetrating Item UL System No.

No Penetrating Item CAJ 0000-0999*
Metallic Pipe or Conduit CAJ 1000-1999
Non-Metallic Pipe or Conduit CAJ 2000-2999
Electrical Cables CAJ 3000-3999
Cable Trays CAJ 4000-4999
Insulated Pipes CAJ 5000-5999
Bus Duct and Misc. Electrical CAJ 6000-6999
Duct without Damper and Misc. Mechanical CAJ 7000-7999
Multiple Penetrations CAJ 8000-8999
*Alternate method of firestopping is patching opening to match original rated construction.

H. Any opening in walls or floors not covered by the listed series of numbers shall be coordinated with the firestopping manufacturer.

I. Any openings in floors or walls not described in the UL or listed by Intertek / Warnock Hersey Fire Resistance Directory, or outlined in manufacturer's information shall be sealed in a manner agreed upon by the Firestopping Manufacturer, Owner, and the Authority Having Jurisdiction.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Ensure all surfaces that contact seal materials are free of dirt, dust, grease, oil, rust, or loose materials. Clean and repair surfaces as required. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SECTION 23 0503-6
B. Ensure substrate and penetrating items have been permanently installed prior to installing firestopping systems. Ensure penetrating items have been properly spaced and have proper clearance prior to installing firestopping systems.

C. Surfaces to which sealing materials are to be installed must meet the selected UL or Intertek / Warnock Hersey system substrate criteria.

D. Prime substrates where recommended in writing by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer. Confine primer to area of bond.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. In existing construction, provide firestopping of openings prior to and after installation of penetrating items. Remove any existing coatings on surfaces prior to firestopping installation.

Temporary firestopping shall consist of packing openings with fire resistant mineral wool for the full thickness of substrate, or an alternate method approved by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. All openings shall be temporarily firestopped immediately upon their installation and shall remain so until the permanent UL or listed by Intertek / Warnock Hersey listed firestopping system is installed.

B. Install penetration seal materials in accordance with printed instructions of the UL or Intertek / Warnock Hersey Fire Resistance Directory and with the manufacturer's printed application instructions.

C. Install dams as required to properly contain firestopping materials within openings and as required to achieve required fire resistance rating. Remove combustible damming after appropriate curing.

3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Clean excess fill materials adjacent to openings as Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by through-penetration firestop system manufacturers and that do not cause damage.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that through-penetration firestop systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, remove damaged or deteriorated through-penetration firestop systems immediately and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Provide and install labels adjacent to each firestopping location. Label shall be provided by the firestop system supplier and contain the following information in a contrasting color:

1. The words "Warning - Through Penetration Firestop System - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage."

2. Firestop System Supplier; UL or listed by Intertek / Warnock Hersey system number; date installed; contractor name and phone number; manufacturer's representative name, address, and phone number.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SECTION 23 0503-7

3.5 INSPECTION
A. All penetrations shall be inspected by the manufacturer's representative to ensure proper installation.

B. Access to firestop systems shall be maintained for examination by the Authority Having Jurisdiction at their request.

C. Proceed with enclosing through-penetration firestop system with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and firestop installations comply with requirements.

D. The contractor shall allow for visual destructive review of 5% of installed firestop systems (minimum of one) to prove compliance with specifications and manufacturer's instructions and details. Destructive system removal shall be performed by the contractor and witnessed by the Architect/Engineer and manufacturer's factory representative. The Architect/Engineer shall have sole discretion of which firestop system installations will be reviewed. The contractor is responsible for all costs associated with this requirement including labor and material for removing and replacing the installed firestop system. If any firestop system is found to not be installed per manufacturer's specific instructions and details, all firestop systems are subject to destructive review and replacement at the Architect/Engineer's discretion and the contractor's expense.

END OF SECTION 23 0503
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SECTION 23 0503-8
(This Page Intentionally Left Blank)
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 HVAC DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING SECTION 23 0505-1
SECTION 23 0505 - HVAC DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Mechanical demolition.

B. Cutting and Patching.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Materials and equipment shall be as specified in individual Sections.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. THE DRAWINGS ARE INTENDED TO INDICATE THE GENERAL SCOPE OF WORK

AND DO NOT SHOW EVERY PIPE, DUCT, OR PIECE OF EQUIPMENT THAT MUST BE REMOVED. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL VISIT THE SITE AND VERIFY CONDITIONS PRIOR TO SUBMITTING A BID.

B. Where walls, ceilings, etc., are shown as being removed on general drawings, the Contractor shall remove all mechanical equipment, devices, fixtures, piping, ducts, systems, etc., from the removed area.

C. Where ceilings, walls, partitions, etc., are temporarily removed and replaced by others, This Contractor shall remove, store, and replace equipment, devices, fixtures, pipes, ducts, systems, etc.

D. Verify that abandoned utilities serve only abandoned equipment or facilities. Extend services to facilities or equipment that shall remain in operation following demolition.

E. Coordinate work with all other Contractors and the Owner. Schedule removal of equipment to avoid conflicts.

F. This Contractor shall verify all existing equipment sizes and capacities where equipment is scheduled to be replaced or modified, prior to ordering new equipment.

G. Bid submittal shall mean the Contractor has visited the project site and verified existing conditions and scope of work.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Disconnect mechanical systems in walls, floors, and ceilings scheduled for removal.

When work must be performed on operating equipment, use personnel experienced in such operations.

C. Existing Heating System: Maintain existing system in service until new system is complete and ready for service. Drain system only to make switchovers and connections. Obtain permission from the Owner at least 48 hours before partially or completely draining system. Minimize outage duration.

3.3 DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING MECHANICAL WORK A. Demolish and extend existing mechanical work under provisions of Division 2 and this Section.

B. Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction.

C. Remove abandoned ducts and piping to source of supply and/or main lines.

D. Remove exposed abandoned pipes and ducts, including abandoned pipes and ducts above accessible ceilings. Cut ducts flush with walls and floors, cap duct that remains, and patch surfaces. Cut pipes above ceilings, below floors and behind walls. Cap remaining lines. Repair building construction to match original. Remove all clamps, hangers, supports, etc. associated with pipe and duct removal.

E. Disconnect and remove mechanical devices and equipment serving equipment that has been removed.

F. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work.

G. Maintain access to existing mechanical installations which remain. Modify installation or provide access panels as appropriate.

H. Remove unused sections of supply and return air ductwork back to mains. Patch opening with sheet metal and seal airtight. Patch existing insulation to match existing. Where existing ductwork is to be capped and reused, locate the end cap within 6" of the last branch. End caps shall be 3" pressure class and seal class "A".

I. Extend existing installations using materials and methods compatible with existing installations, or as specified.

J. Properly reclaim and dispose of all refrigerant in demolished equipment and as required for extension of existing equipment.

3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. This Contractor is responsible for all penetrations of existing construction required to complete the work of this project. Refer to Section 23 0529 for additional requirements.

B. Penetrations in existing construction should be reviewed carefully prior to proceeding with any work.

C. Penetrations shall be neat and clean with smooth and/or finished edges. Core drill where possible for clean opening.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 HVAC DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING SECTION 23 0505-3
D. Repair existing construction as required after penetration is complete to restore to original condition. Use similar materials and match adjacent construction unless otherwise noted or agreed to by the Architect/Engineer prior to start of work.

E. Floor slab on grade is a structural slab. All penetrations shall be X-rayed prior to cutting and/or drilling to avoid rebar or utilities encased in floor construction. Provide rebar dowels to replace damaged rebar and pin existing slab with patched slab. Refer to structural plans for additional information.

F. This Contractor is responsible for all costs incurred in repair, relocations, or replacement of any cables, conduits, or other services if damaged without proper investigation.

3.5 CLEANING AND REPAIR
A. Clean and repair existing materials and equipment which remain or are to be reused.

B. Clean all systems adjacent to project which are affected by the dust and debris caused by this construction.

C. MECHANICAL ITEMS REMOVED AND NOT RELOCATED REMAIN THE PROPERTY OF THE OWNER. CONTRACTOR SHALL PLACE ITEMS RETAINED BY THE OWNER IN A LOCATION COORDINATED WITH THE OWNER. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL

DISPOSE OF MATERIAL THE OWNER DOES NOT WANT TO REUSE OR RETAIN FOR MAINTENANCE PURPOSES.

3.6 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Install temporary filter media over outside air intakes which are within 100 feet of the limits of construction. This Contractor shall complete any cleaning required for existing systems which are affected by construction dust and debris.

B. Review locations of all new penetrations in existing floor slabs or walls. Determine construction type and review for possible interferences. Bring all concerns to the attention of the Architect/Engineer before proceeding.

END OF SECTION 23 0505
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 HVAC DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING SECTION 23 0505-4
(This Page Intentionally Left Blank)
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 MOTORS SECTION 23 0513-1
SECTION 23 0513 - MOTORS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Single Phase and Three Phase Electric Motors.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. AFBMA 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.

B. AFBMA 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.

C. ANSI/ASHRAE/IES Standard 90.1 (latest published edition) - Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings.

D. ANSI/IEEE 112 - Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators.

E. ANSI/NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators.

F. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

G. Energy Independence and Security Act of 2007.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 23 0500. Include nominal efficiency and power factor for all premium efficiency motors. Efficiencies must meet or exceed the nominal energy efficiency levels presented below.

B. Submit shop drawings for all three phase motors.

C. Submit motor data with equipment when motor is installed by the manufacturer at the factory.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect motors stored on site from weather and moisture by maintaining factory covers and suitable weatherproof coverings. For extended outdoor storage, follow manufacturer's recommendations for equipment and motor.

1.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit operation and maintenance data including assembly drawings, bearing data including replacement sizes, and lubrication instructions.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in the manufacture of commercial and industrial motors and acce
ssories, with a minimum of three years documented manufacturing experience.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 MOTORS SECTION 23 0513-2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MOTORS - GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AND REQUIREMENTS
A. Refer to the drawings for required electrical characteristics. Voltage is generally specified and scheduled as distribution voltage. Motor submittals may be based on utilization voltage if it corresponds to the correct distribution voltage.

Distribution/Nominal Voltage Utilization Voltage
120 115
208 200
240 230
277 265
480 460
B. Design motors for continuous operation in 40ºC environment, and for temperature rise in accordance with ANSI/NEMA MG 1 limits for insulation class, service factor, and motor enclosure type.

C. Visible Nameplate: Indicating horsepower, voltage, phase, hertz, RPM, full load amps, locked rotor amps, frame size, manufacturer's name and model number, service factor, power factor, insulation class.

D. Electrical Connection: Boxes, threaded for conduit. For fractional horsepower motors where connection is made directly, provide conduit connection in end frame.

E. Unless otherwise indicated, motors 3/4 HP and smaller shall be single phase, 60 hertz, open drip-proof or totally enclosed fan-cooled type.

F. Unless otherwise indicated, motors 1 HP and larger shall be three phase, 60 hertz, squirrel cage type, NEMA Design Code B (low current in-rush, normal starting torque), open drip-proof or totally enclosed fan-cooled type.

G. Each contractor shall set all motors furnished by him.

H. All motors shall have a minimum service factor of 1.15.

I. All motors shall have ball or roller bearings with a minimum L-10 fatigue life of 150,000 hours in direct- coupled applications and 50,000 hours for belted applications. Belted rating shall be based on radial loads and pulley sizes called out in NEMA MG1-14.43.

J. Bearings shall be sealed type for 10 HP and smaller motors. Bearings shall be regreasable type for larger motors.

K. Aluminum end housings are not permit
ted on motors 15 HP or larger.

L. Motor Driven Equipment:

1. No equipment shall be selected or operate above 90% of its motor nameplate rating. Motor size may not be increased to compensate for equipment with efficiency lower than that specified.

2. If a larger motor than specified is required on equipment, the contractor supplying the equipment is responsible for all additional costs due to larger starters, wiring, etc.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 MOTORS SECTION 23 0513-3
M. Provide all belted motors with a means of moving and securing the motor to tighten belts. Motors over 2 HP shall have screw type tension adjustment. Motors over 40 HP shall have dual screw adjusters. Slide bases shall conform to NEMA standards.

N. Motors for fans and pumps 1/12 HP or greater and less than 1 HP shall be electronically-commutated motors or shall have a minimum motor efficiency of 70% when rated in accordance with DOE 10 CFR 431. These motors shall also have the means to adjust motor speed for either balancing or remote control.

Belt-driven fans may use sheave adjustments for airflow balancing in lieu of varying motor speed.

2.2 ELECTRICALLY COMMUTATED MOTORS (ECM)
A. Motor shall be variable speed, constant torque, brushless DC motor for direct-drive applications.

Electronics shall be encapsulated for moisture protection and shall integral surge protection. Motor shall be pre-wired for specific voltage and phase.

B. Motor frame shall be NEMA 48; UL recognized components shall be provided for the motor construction.

C. All EC motors shall be a minimum of 85% efficient at all speeds.

D. Motors shall be permanently lubricated; utilize ball bearings to match with the connected driven equipment.

E. Provide motor with on-board motor control module. Motor speed shall be limited to provide electronic over current
protection. Starter shall provide soft start to reduce inrush current and shall be controllable from 20% to 100% of full rated speed.

F. Operational mode shall be as scheduled and shall be one of the following:

1. Constant Flow

2. Constant Temperature

3. Constant Pressure

2.3 PREMIUM EFFICIENCY MOTORS (INCLUDING MOST 3-PHASE GENERAL PURPOSE

MOTORS)
A. All motors, unless exempted by EPAct legislation that became federal law on December 19, 2010, shall comply with the efficiencies listed in that standard, which are reprinted below. These match the 2010 NEMA premium efficiency ratings. All ratings listed are nominal full load efficiencies, verified in accordance with IEEE Standard 112, Test Method B. Average expected (not guaranteed minimum) power factors shall also be at least the following:

Full-Load Efficiencies %
Open Drip-Proof Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled
HP 1200
rpm
1800
rpm
3600
rpm
1200
rpm
1800
rpm
3600
rpm

1.0 82.5 85.5 77.0 82.5 85.5 77.0

1.5 86.5 86.5 84.0 87.5 86.5 84.0

2.0 87.5 86.5 85.5 88.5 86.5 85.5

3.0 88.5 89.5 85.5 89.5 89.5 86.5

5.0 89.5 89.5 86.5 89.5 89.5 88.5

7.5 90.2 91.0 88.5 91.0 91.7 89.5

10.0 91.7 91.7 89.5 91.0 91.7 90.2
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 MOTORS SECTION 23 0513-4

15.0 91.7 93.0 90.2 91.7 92.4 91.0

20.0 92.4 93.0 91.0 91.7 93.0 91.0

25.0 93.0 93.6 91.7 93.0 93.6 91.7

30.0 93.6 94.1 91.7 93.0 93.6 91.7

40.0 94.1 94.1 92.4 94.1 94.1 92.4

50.0 94.1 94.5 93.0 94.1 94.5 93.0

60.0 94.5 95.0 93.6 94.5 95.0 93.6

75.0 94.5 95.0 93.6 94.5 95.4 93.6
100.0 95.0 95.4 93.6 95.0 95.4 94.1
125.0 95.0 95.4 94.1 95.0 95.4 95.0
150.0 95.4 95.8 94.1 95.8 95.8 95.0
200.0 95.4 95.8 95.0 95.8 96.2 95.4
250.0 95.4 95.8 95.0 95.8 96.2 95.8
300.0 95.4 95.8 95.4 95.8 96.2 95.8
350.0 95.4 95.8 95.4 95.8 96.2 95.8
400.0 95.8 95.8 95.8 95.8 96.2 95.8
450.0 96.2 96.2 95.8 95.8 96.2 95.8
500.0 96.2 96.2 95.8 95.8 96.2 95.8
B. Motor nameplate shall be noted with the above ratings.

C. plying to All Machines," Part 31 "Definite-Purpose Inverter-Fed Polyphase Motors.

2.4 SHEAVES
A. All sheaves shall conform to NEMA Standard MG1-14.42, which lists minimum diameters and maximum overhangs. Locate motors to minimize overhang.

B. When replacing sheaves, use sheaves of at least the originally supplied sizes.

C. Contractor responsible for motor shall also be responsible for replacement sheaves. Coordinate with testing and balancing of the equipment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. All rotating shafts and/or equipment shall be completely guarded from all contact. Partial guards and/or guards that do not meet all applicable OSHA standards are not acceptable. Contractor is responsible for providing this guarding if it is not provided with the equipment supplied.

B. For flexible coupled drive motors, mount coupling to the shafts in accordance with the coupling manufacturer's recommendations. Align shafts to manufacturer's requirements or within 0.002 inch per inch diameter of coupling hub.

C. For belt drive motors, mount sheaves on the appropriate shafts per manufacturer's instructions. Use a straight edge to check alignment of the sheaves. Reposition sheaves as necessary so the straight edge contacts both sheave faces squarely. After sheaves are aligned, loosen the adjustable motor base so the belt(s) can be added, and tighten the base so the belt tension is in accorda nce with the drive
manufacturer's recommendations. Frequently check belt tension and adjust if necessary during the first day of operation and again after 80 hours of operation.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 MOTORS SECTION 23 0513-5
END OF SECTION 23 0513
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 MOTORS SECTION 23 0513-6
(This Page Intentionally Left Blank)
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 HVAC SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS SECTION 23 0529-1
SECTION 23 0529 - HVAC SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Hangers, Supports, and Associated Anchors.

B. Equipment Bases and Supports.

C. Sleeves and Seals.

D. Flashing and Sealing of Equipment and Pipe Stacks.

E. Cutting of Openings.

F. Escutcheon Plates and Trim.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASME B31.1 - Power Piping.

B. MSS SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection, Application, and Installation.

C. MSS SP 69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application.

D. MSS SP 89 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices.

E. MSS SP-127 - Bracing for Piping Systems Seismic-Wind-Dynamic Design, Selection, Application

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 23 0500. Include plastic pipe manufacturers' support spacing requirements.

1.4 WORK FURNISHED BUT INSTALLED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS
A. Furnish sleeves and hanger inserts to General Contractor for placement into formwork.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS
A. Refer to Section 23 0550 for additional requirements for seismic restraints.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 HVAC SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS SECTION 23 0529-2

2.2 HANGER RODS
A. Hanger rods for single rod hangers shall conform to the following:

1. Copper, Plastic and Fiberglass Reinforced Pipe:
a. Hanger Rod Diameter:
1) 2-1/2" and smaller: 3/8"
2) 3") through 3-5/8": 3/8"
3) 4") through 6": 1/2"
4) 8": 5/8"
5) 10": 3/4"
6) 12": 7/8"
7) 14" and 16": 1"
8) 18" and 24": 1-1/4"
B. Rods for double rod hangers may be reduced one size. Minimum rod diameter is 3/8 inches.

C. Hanger rods and accessories used in mechanical spaces or otherwise dry areas shall have ASTM B633 electro-plated zinc finish.

D. All hanger rods, nuts, washers, clevises, etc., in damp areas shall have ASTM A123 hot-dip galvanized finish applied after fabrication. This applies to the following areas:

2.3 PIPE AND STRUCTURAL SUPPORTS
A. General:

1. Pipe hangers, clamps, and supports shall conform to Manufacturers Standardization Society MSS SP-58, 69, 89, and 127 (where applicable).

2. On all insulated piping, provide at each support an insert of same thickness and contour as adjoining insulation, between the pipe and insulation jacket, to prevent insulation from sagging and crushing. Refer to insulation specifications for materials and additional information.

3. Vertical Supports:

4. Wall supports shall be used where vertical height of structure exceeds minimum spacing requirements. Install wall supports at same spacing as hangers or strut supports along vertical length of pipe runs. Wall supports shall be coordinated with the Structural Engineer.

B. Hangers and Clamps:

1. Oversize all hangers, clamps, and supports on insulated piping to allow insulation and jacket to pass through unbroken. This applies to both hot and cold pipes.

2. Hangers in direct contact with bare copper pipe shall include plastic pipe insert similar to Unistrut Cush-A-Clamp, Hydra-Zorb, nVent Cushion Clamp or Eaton Vibra-Clamp within their temperature limits of -65°F to +275°F.

3. On all insulated piping, provide a semi-cylindrical metallic shield and vapor barrier jacket.

4. Ferrous hot piping 4 inches and larger shall have steel saddles tack welded to the pipe at each support with a depth not less than specified for the insulation. Factory fabricated inserts may be used.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 HVAC SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS SECTION 23 0529-3
a. Products:
1) Anvil Fig. 160, 161, 162, 163, 164, 165
2) Eaton Fig. 3160, 3161, 3162, 3163, 3164, 3165
3) nVent Model 630, 631, 632, 633, 634, 635

5. Unless otherwise indicated, hangers shall be as follows:
a. Clevis Type: Service: Bare Metal Pipe, Rigid Plastic Pipe, Insulated Cold Pipe, Insulated Hot Pipe - 3 inches and Smaller:
1) Products: Bare Steel, Plastic or Insulated Pipe:
a) Anvil Fig. 260
b) Eaton Fig. 3100
c) nVent Model 400
2) Products: Bare Copper Pipe:
a) Eaton Fig. B3104F or B3100CTC
b) Anvil Fig. CT65
c) nVent Fig. 402
b. Continuous Channel with Clevis Type: Service: Plastic Tubing, Flexible Hose, Soft Copper Tubing:
1) Products:
a) Eaton Fig. B3106, with Fig. B3106V
b) nVent Model 104, with Model 104V
c) Anvil Fig. 1V
c. Adjustable Swivel Ring Type: Service: Bare Metal Pipe - 4 inches and Smaller:
1) Products: Bare Steel Pipe:
a) Anvil Fig. 69
b) Eaton Fig. B3170NF
c) nVent Model FCN
2) Products: Bare Copper Pipe:
a) Eaton Fig. B3170CTC
b) nVent 102A0 Series
c) Anvil Fig. CT-69

6. Support may be fabricated from U-channel strut or similar shapes. Piping less than 4" in diameter shall be secured to strut with clamps of proper design and capacity as required to maintain spacing and alignment. Strut shall be independently supported from hanger drops or building structure. Size and support shall be per manufacturer's installation requirements for structural support of piping. Clamps shall not interrupt piping insulation. a. Strut used in mechanical spaces or otherwise dry areas shall have ASTM B633 electro-plated zinc finish.

C. Upper (Structural) Attachments:

1. Unless otherwise shown, upper attachments for hanger rods or support struts shall be as follows:
a. Steel Structure Clamps: C-Type Wide Flange Beam Clamps (for use on top and/or bottom of wide flanges. Not permitted for use with bar-joists.):
1) Products:
a) Anvil Fig. 86
b) Eaton Fig. B3033/B3034
c) nVent Model 300 & 310
b. Scissor Type Beam Clamps (for use with bar-joists and wide flange):
1) Products:
a) Anvil Fig. 228, 292
b) Eaton Fig. B3054
c) nVent Model 360
c. Concentrically Loaded Open Web Joist Hangers (for use with bar joists):
1) Products:
a) MCL. M1, M2 or M3
d. Concrete Anchors: Fasten to concrete using cast-in or post-installed anchors designed per the requirements of Appendix D of ACI 318-05. Post-installed anchors shall be qualified for use in cracked concrete by ACI-355.2. e. Masonry Anchors: Fasten to concrete masonry units with expansion anchors or self-tapping masonry screws. For expansion anchors into hollow concrete block, use sleeve-type anchors designed for the specific application. Do not fasten in masonry joints. Do not use powder actuated fasteners, wooden plugs, or plastic inserts.

2.4 FOUNDATIONS, BASES, AND SUPPORTS
A. Basic Requirements:

1. Furnish and install foundations, bases, and supports (not specifically indicated on the Drawings or in the Specifications of either the General Construction or Mechanical work as provided by another Contractor) for mechanical equipment.

2. All concrete foundations, bases and supports, shall be reinforced. All steel bases and supports shall receive a prime coat of zinc chromate or red metal primer. After completion of work, give steel supports a final coat of gray enamel.

B. Concrete Bases (Housekeeping Pads):

1. Refer to Section 23 0550 for additional requirements for concrete bases in seismic applications.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 HVAC SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS SECTION 23 0529-5

2. Unless shown otherwise on the drawings, concrete bases shall be nominal 4 inches thick and shall extend 3 inches on all sides of the equipment (6 inches larger than factory base), except where pad extension would interfere with working space at equipment control panels and electrical panels.

3. Where a base is less than 12 inches from a wall, extend the base to the wall to prevent a "dirt-trap".

4. Concrete materials and workmanship required for the Contractor's work shall be provided by the Contractor. Materials and workmanship shall conform to the applicable standards of the Portland Cement Association. Reinforce with 6"x6", W1.4-W1.4 welded wire fabric. Concrete shall withstand 3,000 pounds compression per square inch at 28 days (be 20 MPa strength).

5. Equipment requiring bases is as follows:
a. Air Handling Unit
b. Condensing Unit
C. Supports:

1. Provide sufficient clips, inserts, hangers, racks, rods, and auxiliary steel to securely support all suspended material, equipment and conduit without sag.

2. Hang heavy equipment from concrete floors or ceilings with Architect/Engineer- approved concrete inserts, furnished and installed by the Contractor whose work requires them, except where indicated otherwise.

2.5 OPENINGS IN FLOORS, WALLS AND CEILINGS
A. Exact locations of all openings for the installation of materials shall be determined by the Contractor and given to the General Contractor for installation or construction as the structure is built.

B. Coordinate all openings with other Contractors.

C. Hire the proper tradesman and furnish all labor, material and equipment to cut openings in or through existing structures, or openings in new structures that were not installed, or additional openings. Repair all spalling and damage to the satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer. Make saw cuts before breaking out concrete to ensure even and uniform opening edges.

D. Said cutting shall be at the complete expense of each Contractor. Failure to coordinate openings with other Contractors shall not exempt the Contractor from providing openings at Contractor's expense.

E. Do not cut structural members without written approval of the Architect or Structural Engineer.

2.6 ROOF PENETRATIONS
A. Roof Curb Enclosure: Provide weatherproof roof curb and enclosure for pipe and duct penetrations. Refer to drawings for details.

B. Break insulation only at the clamp for pipes between 60°F and 150°F. Seal outdoor insulation edges watertight.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 HVAC SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS SECTION 23 0529-6

2.7 SLEEVES AND LINTELS
A. Each Contractor shall provide sleeves and lintels for all duct and pipe openings required for the Contractor's work in masonry walls and floors, unless specifically shown as being by others.

B. Fabricate all sleeves from standard weight black steel pipe or as indicated on the drawings.

Provide continuous sleeve. Cut or split sleeves are not acceptable.

C. Fabricate all lintels for masonry walls from structural steel shapes or as indicated on the drawings. Have all lintels approved by the Architect or Structural Engineer.

D. Sleeves through the floors on exposed risers shall be flush with the ceiling, with planed squared ends extending 1" above the floor in unfinished areas, and flush with the floor in finished areas, to accept spring closing floor plates.

E. Sleeves shall not penetrate structural members or masonry walls without approval from the Structural Engineer. Sleeves shall then comply with the Architect/Engineer's design.

F. Openings through unexcavated floors and/or foundation walls below the floor shall have a smooth finish with sufficient annular space around material passing through opening so slight settling will not place stress on the material or building structure.

G. Install all sleeves concentric with pipes. Secure sleeves in concrete to wood forms. This Contractor is responsible for sleeves dislodged or moved when pouring concrete.

H. Where pipes rise through concrete floors that are on earthen grade, provide 3/4" resilient expansion joint material (e.g., foam, rubber, asphalt-coated fiber, bituminous-impregnated felt, or cork) wrapped around the pipe, the full depth of concrete, at the point of penetration. Secure to prevent shifting during concrete placement and finishing.

I. Size sleeves large enough to allow expansion and contraction movement. Provide continuous insulation wrapping.

J. Wall Seals ("Link-Seals"):

1. Where shown on the drawings, pipes passing through walls, ceilings, or floors shall have their annular space (sleeve or drilled hole - not tapered hole made with knockout plug) sealed by properly sized sealing elements consisting of a synthetic rubber material compounded to resist aging, ozone, sunlight, water and chemical action.

2. Sleeves, if used, shall be standard weight steel with primed finish and waterstop/anchor continuously welded to sleeve. If piping carries only fluids below 120°F, sleeves may be thermoplastic with integral water seal and textured surface.

3. Sleeves shall be at least 2 pipe sizes larger than the pipes.

4. Pressure shall be maintained by stainless steel bolts and other parts. Pressure plates may be of composite material for Models S and OS.

5. Sealing element shall be as follows:

Element
Model Service Material Temperature Range
S Standard (Stainless) EPDM -40°F to 250°F
T High/Low Temperature (Steam) Silicone -67°F to 400°F T Fire Seals (1 hour) Silicone -67°F to 400°F
FS Fire Seals (3 hours) Silicone -67°F to 400°F
OS Oil Resistant/Stainless Nitrile -40°F to 210°F
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 HVAC SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS SECTION 23 0529-7

6. Manufacturers:
a. Thunderline Corporation "Link-Seals"
b. O-Z/Gedney Company
c. Calpico, Inc.
d. Innerlynx
e. Metraflex Company (cold service only)
f. Polywater PHSD

2.8 ESCUTCHEON PLATES AND TRIM
A. Fit escutcheons to all insulated or uninsulated exposed pipes passing through walls, floors, or ceilings of finished rooms.

B. Escutcheons shall be heavy gauge, cold rolled steel, copper coated under a chromium plated finish, heavy spring clip, rigid hinge and latch.

C. Install galvanized steel (unless otherwise indicated) trim strip to cover vacant space and raw construction edges of all rectangular openings in finished rooms. This includes pipe openings.

2.9 PIPE PENETRATIONS
A. Seal all pipe penetrations. Seal non-rated walls and floor penetrations with grout or caulk.

Backing material may be used.

B. Seal fire rated wall and floor penetrations with fire seal system as specified.

2.10 PIPE ANCHORS
A. Provide all items needed to allow adequate expansion and contraction of all piping. All piping shall be supported, guided, aligned, and anchored as required.

B. Repair all piping leaks and associated damage. Pipes shall not rub on any part of the building.

2.11 FINISH
A. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 HVAC SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
A. General Installation Requirements:

1. Install all items per manufacturer's instructions.

2. Coordinate the location and method of support of piping systems with all installations under other Divisions and Sections of the Specifications.

3. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding.

4. Supports shall extend directly to building structure. Do not support piping from duct hangers unless coordinated with sheet metal contractor prior to installation. Do not allow lighting or ceiling supports to be hung from piping supports.

1. Where building structural steel is fireproofed, all hangers, clamps, auxiliary steel, etc., which attach to it shall be installed prior to application of fireproofing. Repair all fireproofing damaged during pipe installation.

2. Set all concrete inserts in place before pouring concrete.

3. Furnish, install and prime all auxiliary structural steel for support of piping systems that are not shown on the Drawings as being by others.

4. Install hangers and supports complete with lock nuts, clamps, rods, bolts, couplings, swivels, inserts and required accessories.

5. Hangers for horizontal piping shall have adequate means of vertical adjustment for alignment.

C. Pipe Requirements:

1. Support all piping and equipment, including valves, strainers, traps and other specialties and accessories to avoid objectionable or excessive stress, deflection, swaying, sagging or vibration in the piping or building structure during erection, cleaning, testing and normal operation of the systems.

2. Do not, however, restrain piping to cause it to snake or buckle between supports or to prevent proper movement due to expansion and contraction.

3. Support piping at equipment and valves so they can be disconnected and removed without further supporting the piping.

4. Piping shall not introduce strains or distortion to connected equipment.

5. Parallel horizontal pipes may be supported on trapeze hangers made of structural shapes and hanger rods; otherwise, pipes shall be supported with individual hangers.

6. Trapeze hangers may be used where ducts interfere with normal pipe hanging.

7. Provide additional supports where pipe changes direction, adjacent to flanged valves and strainers, at equipment connections and heavy fittings.

8. Provide at least one hanger adjacent to each joint in grooved end steel pipe with mechanical couplings.

D. Provided the installation complies with all loading requirements of truss and joist manufacturers, the following practices are acceptable:

1. Loads of 100 lbs. or less may be attached anywhere along the top or bottom chords of trusses or joists with a minimum 3' spacing between loads.

2. Loads greater than 100 lbs. must be hung concentrically and may be hung from top or bottom chord, provided one of the following conditions is met:
a. The hanger is attached within 6" from a web/chord joint. b. Additional L2x2x1/4 web reinforcement is installed per manufacturer's requirements.

3. It is prohibited to cantilever a load using an angle or other structural component that is attached to a truss or joist in such a fashion that a torsional force is applied to that structural member.

4. If conditions cannot be met, coordinate installation with truss or joist manufacturer and contact Architect/Engineer.

E. After piping and insulation installation are complete, cut hanger rods back at trapeze supports so they do not extend more than 3/4" below bottom face of lowest fastener and blunt any sharp edges.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 HVAC SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS SECTION 23 0529-9
F. Do not exceed 25 lbs. per hanger and a minimum spacing of 2'-0" on center when attaching to metal roof decking (limitation not required with concrete on metal deck). This 25 lbs. load and 2'-0" spacing include adjacent electrical and architectural items hanging from deck. If the hanger restrictions cannot be achieved, supplemental framing off steel framing will need to be added.

G. Do not exceed the manufacturer's recommended maximum load for any hanger or support.

H. Steel/Concrete Structure: Spacing of hangers shall not exceed the compressive strength of the insulation inserts, and in no case shall exceed the following:

1. Steel and Fiberglass (Std. Weight or Heavier - Liquid Service):
a. Maximum Spacing:
1) 1-1/4" & under: 7'-0"
2) 1-1/2": 9'-0"
3) 2": 10'-0"
4) 2-1/2": 11'-0"
5) 3": 12'-0"
6) 4" & larger: 12'-0"

2. Steel (Std. Weight or Heavier - Vapor Service):
a. Maximum Spacing:
1) 1-1/4" and under: 9'-0"
2) 1-1/2": 12'-0"
3) 2" & larger: 12'-0"

3. Hard Drawn Copper & Brass (Liquid Service):
a. Maximum Spacing:
1) 3/4" and under: 5'-0"
2) 1": 6'-0"
3) 1-1/4": 7'-0"
4) 1-1/2" 8'-0"
5) 2": 8'-0"
6) 2-1/2": 9'-0"
7) 3": 10'-0"
8) 4": 12'-0"
9) 6": 12'-0"

4. Hard Drawn Copper & Brass (Vapor Service):
a. Maximum Spacing:
1) 3/4" & under: 7'-0"
2) 1": 8'-0"
3) 1-1/4": 9'-0"
4) 1-1/2": 10'-0"
5) 2": 11'-0"
6) 2-1/2" & larger: 12'-0"
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 HVAC SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS SECTION 23 0529-10
I. Steel/Concrete Structure: Spacing of hangers shall not exceed the compressive strength of the insulation inserts, and in no case shall exceed the following:

1. Steel and Fiberglass (Std. Weight or Heavier - Liquid Service):
a. Maximum Spacing:
1) 1-1/4" & under: 7'-0"
2) 1-1/2": 9'-0"
3) 2": 10'-0"
4) 2-1/2": 11'-0"
5) 3": 12'-0"
6) 4" & larger: 12'-0"

2. Steel (Std. Weight or Heavier - Vapor Service):
a. Maximum Spacing:
1) 1/2" and under: 6'-0"
2) 3/4" to 1": 8'-0"
3) 1-1/4" and under: 9'-0"
4) 1-1/2": 10'-0"
5) 2" & larger: 10'-0"

3. Hard Drawn Copper & Brass (Liquid Service):
a. Maximum Spacing:
1) 3/4" and under: 5'-0"
2) 1": 6'-0"
3) 1-1/4": 6'-0"
4) 1-1/2" 6'-0"
5) 2": 8'-0"
6) 2-1/2": 9'-0"
7) 3": 10'-0"
8) 4": 10'-0"
9) 6": 10'-0"

4. Hard Drawn Copper & Brass (Vapor Service):
a. Maximum Spacing:
1) 3/4" & under: 6'-0"
2) 1": 6'-0"
3) 1-1/4": 6'-0"
4) 1-1/2": 6'-0"
5) 2": 10'-0"
6) 2-1/2" & larger: 10'-0"

5. Plastic Pipe:
a. Hangers shall be spaced based on the piping system manufacturer's instructions or, if no system instructions are available, space hangers at 4'-0" maximum centers.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 HVAC SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS SECTION 23 0529-11

6. Ultra-Flexible Pipe, Flexible Hose, and Soft Copper Tubing:
a. Continuous channel with hangers maximum 8'-0" OC.

J. Wood Structure: Spacing of hangers shall not exceed the compressive strength of the insulation inserts, and in no case shall exceed the following:

1. Steel and Fiberglass (Std. Weight or Heavier - Liquid Service):
a. Maximum Spacing:
1) 1-1/4" & under: 7'-0"
2) 1-1/2": 9'-0"
3) 2": 10'-0"
4) 2-1/2": 11'-0"
5) 3": 12'-0"
6) 4" through 6": 12'-0"8": 9'-0"10": 6'-0"12": 4'-0"

2. Steel (Std. Weight or Heavier - Vapor Service):
a. Maximum Spacing:
1) 1/2" and under: 6'-0"
2) 3/4" to 1": 8'-0"
3) 1-1/4" and under: 9'-0"
4) 1-1/2": 10'-0"
5) 2" & larger: 10'-0"
6) 3": 12'-0"
7) 4" through 8": 12'-0"
8) 10": 9'-0"
9) 12": 6'-0"

3. Hard Drawn Copper & Brass (Liquid Service):
a. Maximum Spacing:
1) 3/4" & under: 5'-0"
2) 1": 6'-0"
3) 1-1/4": 6'-0"
4) 1-1/2": 6'-0"
5) 2": 8'-0"
6) 2-1/2": 9'-0"
7) 3": 10'-0"
8) 4": 10'-0"
9) 6": 10'-0"

4. Hard Drawn Copper & Brass (Vapor Service):
a. Maximum Spacing:
1) 3/4" & under: 6'-0"
2) 1": 6'-0"
3) 1-1/4": 6'-0"
4) 1-1/2": 6'-0"
5) 2": 10'-0"
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 HVAC SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS SECTION 23 0529-12
6) 2-1/2" & larger: 10'-0"

5. Ultra-Flexible Pipe, Flexible Hose, and Soft Copper Tubing:
a. Continuous channel with hangers maximum 8'-0" OC.

K. Installation of hangers shall conform to MSS SP-58, 69, and 89.

END OF SECTION 23 0529
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 HVAC VIBRATION ISOLATION SECTION 23 0548-1
SECTION 23 0548 - HVAC VIBRATION ISOLATION
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Bases.

B. Vibration Isolation.

C. Flexible Connectors.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings per Section 23 0500 and the Vibration Isolation Submittal Form at the end of this section.

B. Vibration isolation submittals may be included with equipment being isolated, but must comply with this section.

C. Base submittals shall include equipment served, construction, coatings, weights, and dimensions.

D. Isolator submittals shall include:

1. Equipment served

2. Type of Isolator

3. Load in Pounds per Isolator

4. Recommended Maximum Load for Isolator

5. Spring Constants of Isolators (for Spring Isolators)

6. Load vs. Deflection Curves (for Neoprene Isolators)

7. Specified Deflection

8. Deflection to Solid (at least 150% of calculated deflection)

9. Loaded (Operating) Deflection

10. Free Height

11. Loaded Height

12. Kx/Ky (horizontal to vertical stiffness ratio - for spring isolators)

13. Materials and Coatings

14. Spring Diameters
E. Make separate calculations for each isolator on equipment where the load is not equally distributed.

F. Flexible connector shop drawings shall include overall face-to-face length and all specified properties.

G. Submit certification that equipment, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Section 23 0550. Include the following:

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 HVAC VIBRATION ISOLATION SECTION 23 0548-2
a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified." PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BASIC CONSTRUCTION AND REQUIREMENT
A. Vibration isolation for this project is subject to seismic restraint requirements of Section 23 0550.

B. All neoprene shall have UV resistance sufficient for 20 years of outdoor service.

C. All isolators shall be designed or treated for corrosion resistance. Steel bases shall be cleaned of welding slag and primed for interior use, and hot dip galvanized after fabrication for exterior use.

All bolts and washers over 3/8" diameter located outdoors shall be hot dip galvanized per ASTM A153. All other bolts, nuts and washers shall be zinc electroplated. All ferrous portions of isolators, other than springs, for exterior use shall be hot dip galvanized after fabrication. Outdoor springs shall be neoprene dipped or hot dip galvanized. All damage to coatings shall be field repaired with two coats of zinc rich coating.

D. Equip all mountings used with structural steel bases with height-saving brackets. Bottoms of the brackets shall be 1-1/2" to 2-1/2" above the floor or housekeeping pad, unless shown otherwise on the drawings. Steel bases shall have at least four points of support.

2.2 MOUNTINGS
A.

Type M2:

1. Double deflection neoprene with minimum static deflection of 0.15" at calculated load and

0.35" at maximum rated load.
a. All metal shall be neoprene covered. Mounting shall have friction pads both top and bottom.

2. All units shall have bolt holes and be bolted down.

3. Use steel rails above the mountings to compensate for the overhang of equipment such as small vent sets and close coupled pumps.

4. Manufacturers:
a. Mason Industries "ND" or "DNR"
b. VMC/Amber-Booth "RVD"
c. Kinetics "RD"
d. Vibration Mountings and Controls "RD"
e. Vibration Eliminator Co. "T22" or "T44"

2.3 HANGERS
A. Type H1:

1. Vibration hangers shall consist of a double-deflection neoprene element with a projecting bushing or oversized opening to prevent steel-to-steel contact.

2. Static deflection shall be at least 0.15" at calculated load and 0.35" at maximum rated load.

3. Provide hangers with end connections as required for hanging ductwork or piping.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 HVAC VIBRATION ISOLATION SECTION 23 0548-3

4. Manufacturers:
a. Mason "HD"
b. Kinetics "RH"
c. Aeroflex "RHD"
d. Vibration Eliminator Co. "IC/3C/3CTD"
e. Vibro Acoustics "RH"

2.4 BASES
A. Type B1:

1. Rectangular structural steel bases.

2. All perimeter members shall be beams or channels with minimum depth of 10% of the longest base dimension or 14" maximum if rigidity is acceptable to the equipment manufacturer.

3. Use height saving brackets, unless noted otherwise.

4. Manufacturers:
a. Mason "WF"
b. Kinetics "SBB"
c. Aeroflex
d. Vibration Eliminator Co. "AF"

2.5 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS (NOISE AND VIBRATION ELIMINATORS) A. Type FC1:

1. Spherical flexible connectors with multiple plies of nylon tire cord fabric and either EPDM or molded and cured neoprene. Outdoor units shall be EPDM.

2. Steel aircraft cables or threaded steel rods shall be used to prevent excess elongation.

3. All straight through connections shall be made with twin-spheres properly pre-extended as recommended by the manufacturer.

4. Connectors up to 2" size may have threaded ends.

5. Connectors 2-1/2" and over shall have floating steel flanges recessed to lock raised face neoprene flanges.

6. All connectors shall be rated for a minimum working pressure of 150 psi at 200°F.

7. Manufacturer:
a. Metraflex "Double Cable-Sphere"
b. Minnesota Flex Corp.
c. Mercer "200 Series"
d. Twin City Hose "MS2".

2.6 VIBRATION ISOLATION CURBS
A. Spring Isolated Curbs:

1. Roof Mounting Curb: Minimum 4'-0", minimum 14 gauge galvanized steel, one-piec e
construction, insulated, all welded, wood nailer.

2. Manufacturers:
a. Mason Industries, Inc. - Type RSC
b. Vibration Elimination Company - BERC
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 HVAC VIBRATION ISOLATION SECTION 23 0548-4
c. ThyCurb - Vibro Curb II
d. Kinetics - SSR.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION
A. Install all products per manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Provide vibration isolation as indicated on the drawings and as described herein.

C. Clean the surface below all mountings that are not bolted down and apply adhesive cement equal to Mason Type WG between mounting and floor. If movement occurs, bolt mountings down.

Isolate bolts from baseplates with neoprene washers and bushings.

D. All static deflections listed in the drawings and specifications are the minimum acceptable actual deflection of the isolator under the weight of the installed equipment - not the maximum rated deflection of the isolator.

E. Support equipment to be mounted on structural steel frames with isolators under the frames or under brackets welded to the frames. Where frames are not needed, fasten isolators directly to the equipment.

F. Where a specific quantity of hangers is noted in these specifications, it shall mean hanger pairs for support points that require multiple hangers, such as rectangular ducts or pipes supported on a strut rack.

3.2 PIPE ISOLATION
A. The first three hangers from vibration-isolated equipment shall be type H1.

B. The first five hangers from vibration-isolated equipment shall have spring isolators with the same static deflection as the equipment. Use type H1 or H2 as required for the specified deflection. The next five hangers shall be type H1.

For base mounted pumps without resilient mountings, the first five hangers shall be Type H1.

D. Where piping is floor-supported, use M2 instead of H1 and M3 instead of H2.

E. Install flexible connectors in all piping connected to vibration producing equipment. This includes all fans, base-mounted pumps, compressors, etc. Absence of flexible connectors on piping diagrams does not imply that they are not required.

F. Use Type FC1 where pressures are lower than 150 psi, temperatures are below 220°F, and the fluid handled is compatible with neoprene and EPDM.

G. Use Type FC2 for all other services. FC2 shall be installed parallel with equipment shafts.

H. Provide sufficient piping flexibility for vibrating refrigerant equipment or furnish flexible connectors with appropriate temperature and pressure ratings.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 HVAC VIBRATION ISOLATION SECTION 23 0548-5
I. Vibration isolators shall not cause any change in position of piping that will result in stresses in connections or misalignment of shafts or bearings. Equipment and piping shall be maintained in a rigid position during installation. Do not transfer load to the isolators until the installation is complete and under full operational load. Hanger H3 and Mounting M4 may be used instead of other products for this purpose.

J. Support piping to prevent extension of flexible connectors.

3.3 VIBRATION ISOLATION SCHEDULE
A. Packaged HVAC Unit (less than 10 HP):

1. Base Type: NA

2. Isolator Type: M3 or H2 or H3

3. Static Deflection: 0.75"

4. Flexible Connections: Per Section 23 3300
END OF SECTION 23 0548
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 HVAC VIBRATION ISOLATION SECTION 23 0548-6
(This Page Intentionally Left Blank)
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 HVAC IDENTIFICATION SECTION 23 0553-1
SECTION 23 0553 - HVAC IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Identification of products installed under Division 23.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems.

B. ASTM B-1, B-3, and B-8 for copper conductors.

C. ASTM D-1248 for Polyethylene Extrusion Materials, ICEA S-70-547 Weatherproof Resistant Polyethylene Conductors, ICEA S-61-402/NEMA WC5 Thermoplastic Insulated Wire & Cable, ICEA S-95-658/NEMA WC70 Non-Shielded 0 - 2kV Cables.

D. UL 1581 Standard for Electrical Wires, Cables, and Flexible Cords.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 23 0500. Include list of items identified, wording, letter sizes, and color coding.

B. Include valve chart and schedule listing valve tag number, location, function, and valve manufacturer's name and model number.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. 3M
B. Bunting
C. Calpico
D. Craftmark
E. Emedco
F. Kolbi Industries
G. Seton
H. W.H. Brady
I. Marking Services.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 HVAC IDENTIFICATION SECTION 23 0553-2

2.2 MATERIALS
A. General:

1. Plastic Nameplates: Laminated three-layer phenolic with engraved black, 1/4" minimum letters on light contrasting background.

2. Aluminum Nameplates: Black enamel background with natural aluminum border and engraved letters furnished with two mounting holes and screws.

3. Plastic Tags: Minimum 1-1/2" square or round laminated three-layer phenolic with engraved, 1/4" minimum black letters on light contrasting background.

4. Brass Tags: Brass background with engraved black letters. Tag size minimum 1-1/2" square or 1-1/2" round.

B. Pipe Markers:

1. All pipe markers (purchased or stenciled) shall conform to ANSI A13.1. Marker lengths and letter sizes shall be at least the following:

OD of Pipe or Insulation Marker Length Size of Letters
Up to and including 1-1/4" 8" 1/2"
1-1/2" to 2" 8" 3/4"
2-1/2" to 6" 12" 1-1/4"
8" to 10" 24" 2-1/2"
Over 10" 32" 3-1/2"
Plastic tags may be used for outside diameters under 3/4"

2. Plastic Pipe Markers: Semi-rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering; indicating flow direction and fluid conveyed. Vinyl Pipe Markers: Colored vinyl with permanent pressure sensitive adhesive backing.

3. Stencil Painted Pipe Markers: Use industrial enamel spray paint per ANSI Standard A13.1.

Indicate fluid conveyed and flow direction.

4. Underground Pipe Markers: Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon tape 6" wide by 3.5 mils thick, manufactured for direct burial, with aluminum foil core for location by non-ferric metal detectors and bold lettering identifying buried item.

5. Tracer Wire:
a. Single copper conductors shall be solid or stranded annealed or hard uncoated copper per UL83 and ASTM requirements. Tracer tape or copper-coated steel wire is not acceptable.
b. Conductor shall be insulated with HMWPE as specified and applied in a concentric manner. The minimum at any point shall not be less than 90% of the specified average thickness in compliance with UL 83.
c. Tracer wire shall be continuously spark tested at 7500 Volts DC. Other electrical and mechanical tests shall be in accordance with UL 1581.

C. Ductwork Markers:

1. Ductwork systems shall be provided with preprinted, color-coded lettering indicating service, equipment serving, and arrow showing flow direction. Refer to Part 3 for installation information.

2. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Duct Labels: Colored vinyl with permane nt Contact-type permanent
pressure-sensitive adhesive backing suitable for indoor and outdoor application compatible with label and with substrate. Stencil painted markers are not permitted on ductwork systems.

3. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160°F.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 HVAC IDENTIFICATION SECTION 23 0553-3

4. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2- 1/2 inch by 3/4 inch.

5. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and 1-1/2 inches high beyond 72 inches viewing distance. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

6. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with duct system service lettering to accommodate both directions or as separate unit on each duct label to indicate flow direction.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install all products per manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.

C. Valves:

1. All valves (except shutoff valves at equipment) shall have numbered tags.

2. Provide or replace numbered tags on all existing valves that are connected to new systems or that have been revised.

3. Provide all existing valves used to extend utilities to this project with numbered tags. Review tag numbering sequence with the Owner prior to ordering tags.

4. Secure tags with heavy duty key chain and brass "S" link or with mechanically fastened plastic straps.

5. Attach to handwheel or around valve stem. On lever operated valves, drill the lever to attach tags.

6. Number all tags and show the service of the pipe.

7. Provide one Plexiglas framed valve directory listing all valves, with respective tag numbers, uses and locations. Mount directory in location chosen by the Architect/Engineer.

D. Pipe Markers:

1. Adhesive Backed Markers: Use Brady Style 1, 2, or 3 on pipes 3" diameter and larger. Use Brady Style 4, 6, or 8 on pipes under 3" diameter. Similar styles by other listed manufacturers are acceptable. Secure all markers at both ends with a wrap of pressure sensitive tape completely around the pipe.

2. Snap-on Markers: Use Seton "Setmark" on pipes up to 5-7/8" OD. Use Seton "Setmark" with nylon or Velcro ties for pipes 6" OD and over. Similar styles by other listed manufacturers are acceptable.

3. Apply markers and arrows in the following locations where clearly visible:
a. At each valve.
b. On both sides of walls that pipes penetrate.
c. At least every 20 feet along all pipes.
d. On each riser and each leg of each "T" joint.
e. At least once in every room and each story traversed.

4. Underground Pipe Markers: Install 8" to 10" below grade, directly above buried pipes.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 HVAC IDENTIFICATION SECTION 23 0553-4
E. Equipment:

1. All equipment not easily identifiable such as controls, relays, gauges, etc.; and all equipment in an area remote from its function such as air handling units, exhaust fans, filters, reheat coils, dampers, etc.; shall have nameplates or plastic tags listing name, function, and drawing symbol. Do not label exposed equipment in public areas.

2. Fasten nameplates or plastic tags with stainless steel self-tapping screws or permanently bonding cement.

3. Mechanical equipment that is not covered by the U.S. National Appliance Energy Conservation Act (NAECA) of 1987 shall carry a permanent label installed by the manufacturer stating that the equipment complies with the requirements of ASHRAE 90.1.

F. Miscellaneous:

1. Attach self-adhesive vinyl labels at all duct access doors used to reset fusible links or actuators on fire, fire/smoke, or smoke dampers. Lettering shall be a minimum of 1/2" high.

Labels shall indicate damper type.

2. Provide engraved plastic tags at all hydronic or steam system make-up water meters.

3.2 SCHEDULE
A. Pipes to be marked shall be labeled with text as follows, regardless of which method or material is used:

1. CONDENSATE DRAIN: White lettering; green background

2. REFRIGERANT LIQUID: White lettering; purple background

3. REFRIGERANT SUCTION: White lettering; purple background

4. REFRIGERANT HOT GAS: White lettering; purple background

5. Underground Piping: Varies
B. Ductwork and Fan Systems: All fans, filte
rs housings, and access doors shall be labeled with text as follows:

1. SUPPLY AIR: White lettering; green background

2. RETURN AIR: White lettering; green background

3. VENTILATION AIR: White lettering; green background

4. RELIEF Black lettering; yellow background
END OF SECTION 23 0553
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING SECTION 23 0593-1
SECTION 23 0593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Testing, adjusting, and balancing of air systems.

B. Testing, adjusting, and balancing of heating systems.

C. Testing, adjusting, and balancing of cooling systems.

D. Testing, adjusting, and balancing of plumbing systems.

E. Testing, adjusting, and balancing of energy recovery systems.

F. Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Agency shall be a company specializing in the adjusting and balancing of systems specified in this section with minimum three years' experience. Perform work under supervision of AABC Certified Test and Balance Engineer, NEBB Certified Testing, Balancing and Adjusting Supervisor, SMARTA Certified Air and Hydronic Balancer, or TABB Certified Supervisor.

B. Work shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the references listed at the start of this section.

1.3 REFERENCES
A. AABC - National Standards for Total System Balance, Seventh Edition.

B. ADC - Test Code for Grilles, Registers, and Diffusers.

C. AMCA - Publication 203-90; Field Performance Measurement of Fan Systems.

D. ASHRAE - 2019 HVAC Applications Handbook; Chapter 39, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing.

E. ASHRAE/ANSI - Standard 111-2008; Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Building HVAC&R Systems.

F. NEBB - Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental Systems, Ninth Edition, 2019.

G. SMACNA - HVAC Systems; Testing, Adjusting and Balancing (latest edition).

H. TABB - International Standards for Environmental Systems Balance.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit copies of report forms, balancing procedures, and the name and qualifications of testing and balancing agency for approval within 30 days after award of Contract.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING SECTION 23 0593-2
B. Electronic Copies:

1. Submit a certified copy of test reports to the Architect/Engineer for approval. Electronic copies shall be in PDF format only. Scanned copies, in PDF format, of paper originals are acceptable. Copies that are not legible will be returned to the Contractor for resubmittal.

Do not set any permission restrictions on files; protected, locked, or secured documents will be rejected.

2. Electronic file size shall be limited to a maximum of 10MB. Larger files shall be divided into files that are clearly labeled as "1 of 2", "2 of 2", etc.

3. All text shall be searchable.

4. Bookmarks shall be used. All bookmark titles shall be an active link to the index page and index tabs.

1.5 REPORT FORMS
A. Submit reports on AABC, SMACNA or NEBB forms. Use custom forms approved by the Architect/Engineer when needed to supply specified information.

B. Include in the final report a schematic drawing showing each system component, including balancing devices, for each system. Each drawing shall be included with the test reports required for that system. The schematic drawings shall identify all testing points and cross- reference these points to the report forms and procedures.

C. Refer to PART 4 for required reports.

1.6 WARRANTY/GUARANTEE
A. The TAB Contractor shall include an extended warranty of 90 days after owner receipt of a completed balancing report, during which time the Owner may request a recheck of terminals, or resetting of any outlet, coil, or device listed in the test report. This warranty shall provide a minimum of 24 manhours of onsite service time. If it is determined that the new test results are not within the design criteria, the balancer shall rebalance the system according to design criteria.

B. Warranty/Guarantee must meet one of the following programs: TABB International Quality Assurance Program, AABC National Project Performance Guarantee, NEBB's Conformance Certification.

1.7 SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate schedule with other trades. Provide a minimum of seven days' notice to all trades and the Architect/Engineer prior to performing each test.

3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. All procedures must conform to a published standard listed in the References article of this section. All equipment shall be adjusted in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Any system not listed in this specification but installed under the contract documents shall be balanced using a procedure from a published standard listed in the References article.

B. The Balancing Contractor shall incorporate all pertinent documented construction changes (e.g. submittals/shop drawings, change orders, RFIs, ASIs, etc.) and include in the balancing report.

C. Recorded data shall represent actual measured or observed conditions.

D. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and balancing is complete, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials as specified.

Restore vapor barrier and finish as specified.

E. Permanently mark setting of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing for settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops.

F. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing doors to electrical switch boxes, plugging test holes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings.

G. The Balancing Contractor shall measure terminal air box air flow, and the TCC shall adjust DDC readout to match. Refer to Section 23 0900 for additional information.

H. Installations with systems consisting of multiple components shall be balanced with all system components operating.

3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Before beginning work, verify that systems are complete and operable. Ensure the following:

1. General Equipment Requirements:
a. Equipment is safe to operate and in normal condition. b. Equipment with moving parts is properly lubricated.
c. Temperature control systems are complete and operable. d. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment. e. Direction of rotation of all fans and pumps is correct. f. Access doors are closed and end caps are in place.

2. Duct System Requirements:
a. All filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media. b. Duct systems are clean and free of debris.
c. Fire/smoke and manual volume dampers are in place, functional and open. d. Air outlets are installed and connected.

3. Pipe System Requirements:
a. Coil fins have been cleaned and combed.
b. Hydronic systems have been cleaned, filled, and vented. c. Strainer screens are clean and in place.
d. Shutoff, throttling and balancing valves are open.

B. Report any defects or deficiencies to Architect/Engineer.

C. Promptly report items that are abnormal or prevent proper balancing.

D. If, for design reasons, system cannot be properly balanced, report as soon as observed.

E. Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions.

3.3 PREPARATION
A. Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations. Make instruments available to the Architect/Engineer for spot checks during testing.

B. Instruments shall be calibrated within six months of testing performed for project, or more recently if recommended by the instrument manufacturer.

3.4 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. ± 10% of scheduled values:

1. Adjust air inlets and outlets to ± 10% of scheduled values.

2. Adjust piping systems to ±10% of design values.

B. Adjust supply, return, and exhaust air-handling systems to +10% / -5% of scheduled values.

3.5 ADJUSTING
A. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that disruption has been rectified.

B. Once balancing of systems is complete, at least one damper or valve must be 100% open.

C. After testing, adjusting and balancing are complete, operate each system and randomly check measurements to verify system is operating as reported in the report. Document any discrepancies.

D. Contractor responsible for each motor shall also be responsible for replacement sheaves.

Coordinate with contractor.

E. Contractor responsible for pump shall trim impeller to final duty point as instructed by this contractor on all pumps not driven by a VFD. Coordinate with contractor.

F. Design Conditions:

1. Summer: 100 °F DB 70°F WB

2. Winter: 31 °F DB
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING SECTION 23 0593-5
G. Architect/Engineer will direct all test locations.

H. Report of test results shall include original recording and three reproductions.

3.6 SUBMISSION OF REPORTS
A. Fill in test results on appropriate forms.

B. Complete all applicable tests, certifications, forms, and matrices listed in the Illinois Department of Public Health (IDPH) Final Occupancy Checklist Certifications for Request of Inspection.

PART 4 - SYSTEMS TO BE TESTED, ADJUSTED AND BALANCED

4.1 VERIFICATION OF EXISTING SYSTEMS.

A. Perform a pre-balance of systems serving the area of construction prior to the start of any other work. Do not make adjustments to the systems. If the systems are not operating at maximum capacity, temporarily drive system to maximum and take readings for the system. Return the system to its original state when measurements are complete.

1. Air Handling Unit:
a. General Requirements:
1) Existing Equipment Tag (if available).
2) Location.
3) Manufacturer, model, arrangement, class, discharge.
4) Fan RPM.
b. Flow Rate:
1) Supply flow rate (cfm)
2) Return flow rate (cfm)
3) Outside flow rate (cfm)
4) Exhaust flow rate (cfm)
c. Pressure Drop and Pressure:
1) Filter pressure drop.
2) Total static pressure. (Indicate if across fan or external to unit). 3) Inlet pressure.
4) Discharge pressure.

2. Exhaust Fan
a. Drawing symbol.
b. Location.
c. Manufacturer and model.
d. Flow rate (cfm).
e. Total static pressure. (Indicate measurement locations). f. Inlet pressure.
g. Discharge pressure.
h. Fan RPM.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING SECTION 23 0593-6

3. Air Terminal (Inlet or Outlet):
a. Room number/location.
b. Terminal type and size.
c. Velocity.
d. Flow rate (cfm)
e. Percent of design flow rate.

4. Air Terminal Unit (Terminal Air Box) Data:
a. General Requirements:
1) Drawing symbol.
2) Location.
3) Manufacturer and model.
4) Size.
5) Type: constant, variable, single, dual duct.
b. Temperature:
1) Entering air temperature.
2) Leaving air temperature (in heating mode).
3) Entering water temperature.
4) Leaving water temperature.
c. Pressure Drop and Pressure:
1) Inlet static pressure during testing.
2) Coil air pressure drop.
3) Water pressure drop.

B. Report findings to Architect/Engineer on standard forms. Provide four (4) copies of report.

4.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Title Page:

1. Project name.

2. Project location.

3. Project Architect.

4. Project Engineer (IMEG Corp.).

5. Project General Contractor.

6. TAB Company name, address, phone number.

7. TAB Supervisor's name and certification number.

8. TAB Supervisor's signature and date.

9. Report date.

B. Report Index
C. General Information:

1. Test conditions.

2. Nomenclature used throughout report.

3. Notable system characteristics/discrepancies from design.

4. Test standards followed.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING SECTION 23 0593-7

5. Any deficiencies noted.

6. Quality assurance statement.

D. Instrument List:

1. Instrument.

2. Manufacturer, model, and serial number.

3. Range.

4. Calibration date.

4.3 AIR SYSTEMS
A. Duct Leakage Test:

1. Air system and fan.

2. Leakage class.

3. Test pressure.

4. Construction pressure.

5. Flow rate (cfm): specified and actual.

6. Leakage (refer to Section 23 3100 in the specifications): specified and actual.

7. Statement that fire dampers, reheat coils and other accessories were included in the test.

8. Pass or Fail.

9. Test performed by.

10. Test witnessed by.

B. Air Moving Equipment:

1. General Requirements:
a. Drawing symbol.
b. Location.
c. Manufacturer, model, arrangement, class, discharge.
d. Fan RPM.
e. Multiple RPM fan curve with operating point marked. (Obtain from equipment supplier).
f. Final frequency of motor at maximum flow rate (on fans driven by VFD).

2. Flow Rate:
a. Supply flow rate (cfm): specified and actual.
b. Return flow rate (cfm): specified and actual.
c. Outside flow rate (cfm): specified and actual.
d. Exhaust flow rate (cfm): specified and actual.

3. Pressure Drop and Pressure:
a. Filter pressure drop: specified and actual.
b. Total static pressure: specified and actual. (Indicate if across fan or external to unit).
c. Inlet pressure.
d. Discharge pressure.

C. Fan Data:

1. Drawing symbol.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING SECTION 23 0593-8

2. Location.

3. Manufacturer and model.

4. Flow rate (cfm): specified and actual.

5. Total static pressure: specified and actual. (Indicate measurement locations).

6. Inlet pressure.

7. Discharge pressure.

8. Fan RPM.

D. Electric Motors:

1. Drawing symbol of equipment served.

2. Manufacturer, Model, Frame.

3. Nameplate: HP, phase, service factor, RPM, operating amps, efficiency.

4. Measured: Amps in each phase.

E. Duct Traverse:

1. System zone/branch/location.

2. Duct size.

3. Free area.

4. Velocity: specified and actual.

5. Flow rate (cfm): specified and actual.

6. Duct static pressure.

7. Air temperature.

8. Air correction factor.

F. Air Terminal (Inlet or Outlet):

1. Drawing symbol.

2. Room number/location.

3. Terminal type and size.

4. Velocity: specified and actual.

5. Flow rate (cfm): specified and actual.

6. Percent of design flow rate.

7. Temperature:
a. Entering air temperature: specified and actual.
b. Leaving air temperature (in minimum airflow/heating mode): specified and actual. c. Entering water temperature: specified and actual.
d. Leaving water temperature: specified and actual.

8. Pressure Drop and Pressure:
a. Inlet static pressure during testing cooling maximum airflow rate (maximum and minimum).
b. Water pressure drop: specified and actual.

G. Positive Air Flow Test:

1. Occupied Supply Air (Max./Min.) Flow rate (cfm): specified and actual.

2. Occupied Return Air (Max./Min.) Flow rate (cfm): specified and actual.

3. Unoccupied Supply Air (Max./Min.) Flow rate (cfm): specified and actual.

4. Unoccupied Return Air (Min./Max.) Flow rate (cfm): specified and actual.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING SECTION 23 0593-9

4.4 HEATING SYSTEMS
A. Terminal Heat Transfer Units:

1. General Requirement:
a. Drawing symbol.
b. Location.
c. Manufacturer and model.
d. Include air data only for forced air units.

2. Flow Rate:
a. Flow rate (cfm): specified and actual.
b. Water flow rate (cfm): specified and actual.

3. Temperature:
a. Entering air temperature: specified and actual.
b. Leaving air temperature: specified and actual.
c. Entering water temperature: specified and actual.
d. Leaving water temperature: specified and actual.

4. Energy:
a. Air Btuh (cfm x temperature rise x 1.09).
b. Water Btuh (gpm x temperature drop x 500). Repeat tests if not within 10% of air Btuh.

4.5 COOLING SYSTEMS
A. Terminal Heat Transfer Units:

1. General Requirements:
a. Drawing symbol.
b. Location.
c. Manufacturer and model.
d. Include air data only for forced air units.

2. Temperature:
a. Entering air DB temperature: specified and actual.
b. Leaving air DB temperature: specified and actual.
c. Entering water temperature: specified and actual.
d. Leaving water temperature: specified and actual.

3. Flow rate:
a. Flow rate (cfm): specified and actual.
b. Water flow (gpm): specified and actual.

4. Energy:
a. Air Btuh (cfm x temperature rise x 1.09).

END OF SECTION 23 0593
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 DUCTWORK INSULATION SECTION 23 0713-1
SECTION 23 0713 - DUCTWORK INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Ductwork Insulation.

B. Insulation Jackets.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator: Company specializing in ductwork insulation application with five years minimum experience. When requested, installer shall submit manufacturer's certificate indicating qualifications.

B. Materials:

1. Listed and labeled for flame spread/smoke developed rating of no more than 25/50 when tested per ASTM E84 or UL 723 as required by code.

2. Fungal Resistance: No growth when tested in accordance with ASTM G21 (antifungal test).

3. Rated velocity on coated air side for air erosion in accordance with UL 181 at 5,000 fpm minimum.

1.3 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASHRAE/IES Standard 90.1 (latest published edition) - Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings.

B. ANSI/ASTM C553 - Mineral Fiber Blanket and Felt Insulation.

C. ANSI/ASTM C612 - Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation.

D. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

E. ASTM E136 - Standard Test Method for the Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750°C.

F. ASTM E814 - Fire Tests of Through Penetrations Firestops.

G. ASTM E2336-04 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Resistive Grease Duct Enclosure Systems.

H. ASTM G21 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to Fungi.

I. National Commercial & Industrial Insulation Standards - 1999 Edition - as published by Midwest Insulation Contractors Association and endorsed by National Insulation Contractors Association.

J. NFPA 255 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

K. UL - XHEZ - Through Penetration Firestop Systems.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 DUCTWORK INSULATION SECTION 23 0713-2
L. UL 181 - Standard for Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors.

M. UL 263 - Full Scale External Fire Tests with Hose Stream.

N. UL 723 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

O. UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through Penetrations Firestops.

P. California Title 24 - Building Energy Efficiency Standards Q. CMC California Mechanical Code

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings per Section 23 0500. Include product description, list of materials and thickness for each service, and location.

B. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. Type A: Flexible Fiberglass - Outside Wrap; ANSI/ASTM C553; commercial grade; 0.28 /

0.26 (Out-Of-Package/Installed-Compressed 25%) maximum 'K' value at 75°F; foil scrim Kraft facing, 1.0 lb./cu. ft. density. Submit both "Out of Package" and "Installed-Compressed 25%" K and R-values.

B. JACKETS

1. Vapor Barrier Jackets: Kraft reinforced foil scrim vapor barrier with self-sealing adhesive joints. Beach puncture resistance ratio of at least 25 units. Tensile strength: 35 psi minimum. Single, self-seal acrylic adhesive on longitudinal jacket laps and butt strips.

2.2 JACKET COVERINGS
A. Aluminum Jackets: ASTM B209; 0.016" thick; smooth or embossed stucco finish with Z edge seams and aluminum bands for outdoor use. Where colored jacket covers are called for, provide factory-applied hard film acrylic paint in color selected by Architect.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, codes, and industry standards.

B. Install materials after ductwork has been tested.

C. Clean surfaces for adhesives.

D. Provide insulation with vapor barrier when air conveyed may be below ambient temperature.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 DUCTWORK INSULATION SECTION 23 0713-3
E. Exterior Duct Wrap - Flexible, Type A:

1. Apply with edges tightly butted.

2. Cut slightly longer than perimeter of duct to insure full thickness at corners. Do not wrap excessively tight.

3. Seal joints with adhesive backed tape.

4. Apply so insulation conforms uniformly and firmly to duct.

5. Seal all penetrations of the vapor barrier by strap hangers or slip cable hangers with adhesive backed tape.

6. Provide high-density insulation inserts on rectangular ducts at trapeze duct hangers to prevent crushing of insulation. Provide high-density insulation inserts with clamp-on round ducts requiring two (2) rods or straps to prevent crushing of insulation. Maintain continuous vapor barrier through the hanger.

7. Tape all joints with Royal Tapes #RT 350 (216-439-7229), Venture Tape 1525CW, or Compac Type FSK. No substitutions will be accepted without written permission from the Architect/Engineer.

8. Press tape tightly to the duct covering with a squeegee for a tight continuous seal. Fish mouths and loose tape edges are not acceptable.

9. Staples may be used, but must be covered with tape.

10. Vapor barrier must be continuous.

11. Mechanically fasten on 12" centers at bottom of ducts over 24" wide and on all sides of vertical ducts.

F. Semi Rigid Fiberglass Board Wrap - Type B (Indoor Use):

1. Impale on pins welded to the duct and secured with speed clips. Clip pins off close to speed clips.

2. Space pins as needed to hold insulation firmly against duct, but not less than one pin per square foot. Pins must be long enough to avoid compressing the insulation.

3. Seal all joints and speed clips with glass fabric set in adhesive or a 3" wide strip of Royal Tapes #RT 350 (216-439-7229), Venture Tape 1525CW, or Compac Type FSK facing tape.

4. For small areas, secure insulation with adhesive over the entire surface of the duct. Use adhesive in addition to pins as needed to prevent sagging on horizontal surfaces.

G. Semi Rigid Fiberglass Board Wrap - Type B (Outdoor Use):

1. Impale on pins welded to the duct and secured with speed clips. Clip pins off close to speed clips.

2. Space pins as required to hold insulation firmly against duct, but not less than one pin per square foot. Pins must be long enough to avoid compressing the insulation.

3. Seal all joints and speed clips with glass fabric set in adhesive or a 3" wide strip of the same facing tape with adhesive.

4. For small areas, secure insulation with adhesive over the entire surface of the duct. Use adhesive in addition to pins as needed to prevent sagging on horizontal surfaces.

5. Install vapor barrier jacket. Cover with aluminum jacket covering with seams on the bottom of horizontal ductwork.

6. Seal all butt joints with metal draw bands screwed to jacket and filled with sealant. Seal all joints watertight.

7. Provide positive slope on top of all horizontal surfaces to prevent ponding of water.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 DUCTWORK INSULATION SECTION 23 0713-4
H. Interior Insulation - Flexible Duct Liner, Type C:

1. Observation of Duct Lining:
a. After installation of ductwork, Architect/Engineer may select random observation points in each system.
1) At each observation point, cut and remove an 18" x 18" section of ductwork and liner for verification of installation.
2) Random observation points based on one opening per 75 lineal ft. of total duct run.
b. When any of the observation points shows non-compliance, additional points will be designated by the Architect/Engineer, and observation repeated. c. If 20% of points observed do not comply, remove and replace all lined ducts and repeat tests. Where replacement is not required, correct all non-compliances. d. At end of observation, repair all duct lining and observation holes by installing standard, insulated, hinged access doors per Section 23 3300. e. Paint or finish to match adjacent duct surfaces.

2. Impale on spindle anchors welded or mechanically fastened to the duct. Adhesive or glue fastened anchors are not acceptable. Maximum anchor spacing per SMACNA Duct Construction Standards or manufacturer's recommendations, whichever is more restrictive. Locate pins less than 3" from corners and at intervals not over 6" around the perimeter at leading and trailing edges. Locate pins within 3" of transverse joints and at intervals not over 16" long the length of the duct. Pins must be long enough to prevent compressing the insulation.

3. In addition to anchors, secure liner with UL listed adhesive covering over 90% of the duct surface.

4. Install per the latest edition of the SMACNA Manual.

5. Leading edges shall be covered as follows:
a. For duct velocities below 3000 fpm, coat leading edges with adhesive. Neatly butt liner without gaps at transverse joints. Cut liner flush with end of the duct section for tight joints with no exposed duct. If adhesive is shop installed, field apply additional adhesive to the end of each duct section for complete adhesion of the liner. Protect edges from dirt and debris.
b. For duct velocities above 3000 fpm, cover leading edges with metal nosing. Use nosing on upstream edges of each section of duct. If the duct can be installed in either direction, provide nosing on each end or clearly mark the duct to allow visual verification after installation. Verify duct velocities based on the scheduled air flow rates and determine where metal nosing is required.
c. Install metal nosing in the following locations (regardless of velocity):
1) The first three fittings downstream of all fans.
2) At all duct liner interruptions. This includes fire dampers, access doors, branch connections, and all other locations where the edge of the liner is exposed.
3) Trailing edges of transverse joints do not require metal nosings.

6. Overlap liner at longitudinal joints. Make longitudinal joints at corners of the duct unless the duct size does not allow this. Coat longitudinal joints with adhesive at velocities over 2500 fpm.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 DUCTWORK INSULATION SECTION 23 0713-5

7. Seal all damaged duct liner with adhesive and glass cloth. Do not damage duct liner surface coatings.

8. Duct dimensions given are net inside dimensions. Increase sheet metal to allow for insulation thickness.

I. Plenum Walls - Type D:

1. Brush apply adhesive to the wall before installing insulation. Provide 100% coverage.

2. Apply pins to the wall with adhesive. Locate pins 15" O.C. maximum and within 2" of all insulation edges.

3. Secure insulation to pins with speed clips and cut all pins off close to the clips. Cover raw ends of pins with glass fabric set in adhesive.

4. Cover all joints with 3" wide strips of glass fabric set in adhesive.

5. Protect all door openings with sheet metal angles.

J. Exterior Duct Wrap - Type I:

1. On ducts with any sides having a dimension 20" and greater: Impale insulation on spindle anchors welded or mechanically fastened to the duct and secured with speed clips. Clip pins off close to speed clips. Adhesive or glue fastened anchors are not acceptable.

Maximum anchor spacing per SMACNA Duct Construction Standards or manufacturer's recommendations, whichever is more restrictive. Locate pins within 4" from edges and at intervals not over 16" in all directions. Pins shall be long enough to prevent compressing the insulation.

K. Continue insulation with vapor barrier through penetrations unless code prohibits.

L. Provide 2" wide, 24" high, 26 gauge, galvanized sheet metal corner protection angles for all externally insulated ductwork extending to a floor or curb.

3.2 SCHEDULE
A. Refer to Section 23 3100 for scheduling of insulation.

B. Unless noted otherwise, HVAC plenums and unit housings not pre-insulated at factory shall be insulated to geographical R-value requirements based on California Title 24, R-8.

END OF SECTION 23 0713
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 DUCTWORK INSULATION SECTION 23 0713-6
(This Page Intentionally Left Blank)
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 HVAC PIPING INSULATION SECTION 23 0719-1
SECTION 23 0719 - HVAC PIPING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Piping Insulation.

B. Insulation Jackets.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator: Company specializing in piping insulation application with five years minimum experience.

B. Materials: Listed and labeled for flame spread/smoke developed rating of no more than 25/50 when tested per ASTM E84 or UL 723 as required by code. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

C. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

D. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795.

E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.

F. Adhesives and Sealants: All sealers, adhesives, and sealants shall comply with the low emitting material limits of the following standards:

1. CDPH Standard Method V1.1-2010 - Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions VOC from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers Version 1.1.

2. South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule 1168 - Adhesive and Sealant Applications. All adhesives and sealant
s wet-applied on site shall comply with the
applicable chemical content requirements of SCAQMD Rule 1168.

3. South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule SCAQMD 1113 - Wet Applied Paints and Coatings. All paints and coatings wet-applied on site must meet the applicable VOC limits of SCAQMD Rule 1113.

1.3 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASHRAE/IES Standard 90.1 (latest published edition) - Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings.

B. ANSI/ASTM C195 - Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulation Cement.

C. ANSI/ASTM C533 - Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation.

D. ANSI/ASTM C534 - Elastomeric Foam Insulation.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 HVAC PIPING INSULATION SECTION 23 0719-2
E. ANSI/ASTM C547 - Mineral Fiber Preformed Pipe Insulation.

F. ANSI/ASTM C552 - Cellular Glass Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation.

G. ASTM C449 - Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement.

H. ASTM C591 - Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Insulation.

I. ASTM C578 - Preformed Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation.

J. ASTM C1126 - Standard Specification for Faced or Unfaced Rigid Cellular Phenolic Thermal Insulation.

K. ASTM C1729 - Standard Specification for Aluminum Jacketing for Insulation.

L. ASTM C1767 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Jacketing for Insulation.

M. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

N. NFPA 255 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

O. UL 723 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

P. National Commercial & Industrial Insulation Standards - 1999 Edition - as published by Midwest Insulation Contractors Association and endorsed by National Insulation Contractors Association.

Q. California Title 24 - Building Energy Efficiency Standards.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings per Section 23 0500. Include product description, list of materials and thickness for each service, and locations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSULATION
A. Type A: Glass fiber; ANSI/ASTM C547; 0.24 maximum 'K' value at 75°F; non-combustible. All- purpose polymer or polypropylene service jacket, listed and labeled at no more than 25/50 when tested per ASTM E84 or UL 723 as required by code.

3.2 VAPOR BARRIER JACKETS
A. All-purpose polymer or polypropylene service jacket vapor barrier with self-sealing adhesive joints. Beach puncture resistance ratio of at least 50 units. Tensile strength: 35 psi minimum.

Single, self-seal acrylic adhesive on longitudinal jacket laps and butt strips.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 HVAC PIPING INSULATION SECTION 23 0719-3

3.3 JACKET COVERINGS
A. Aluminum Jackets: ASTM C1729; 0.016" thick (thicker where required by ASTM C1729); stucco embossed finish with Z edge seams and aluminum bands for outdoor use. Where colored jacket covers are called for, provide factory-applied hard film acrylic paint in color selected by Architect.

PART 4 - EXECUTION

4.1 PREPARATION
A. Install insulation after piping has been tested. Pipe shall be clean, dry and free of rust before applying insulation.

B. Patch and repair torn insulation. Paint to match adjacent insulation surface.

4.2 INSTALLATION
A. General Installation Requirements:

1. Install materials per manufacturer's instructions, building codes and industry standards.

2. Continue insulation with vapor barrier through penetrations. This applies to all insulated piping. Maintain fire rating of all penetrations.

3. All piping and insulation that does not meet 25/50 that is in an air plenum shall have written approval from the Authority Having Jurisdiction and the local fire department for authorization and materials approval. If approval has been allowed, the non-rated material shall be wrapped with a product that has been listed and labeled having a flame spread index of not more than 25 and a smoke-developed index of not more than 50 when tested as a composite in accordance with ASTM E84 or UL 723.

4. On 1" and smaller piping routed through metal wall studs, provide a plastic grommet to
protect the piping. The piping shall be insulated between the wall studs, and the insulation shall butt up to each stud.

B. Insulated Piping Operating Below 60°F:

1. Insulate fittings, valves, unions, flanges, flexible connections, flexible hoses, and expansion joints. Seal all penetrations of vapor barrier.

2. On piping operating below 60°F in locations that are not mechanically cooled (e.g., penthouses, mechanical rooms, tunnels, chases at exterior walls, etc.), Type B insulation shall be used.

3. All balance valves and strainers with fluid operating below 60°F shall be insulated with a removable plug wrapped with vapor barrier tape to allow access for reading and adjusting of the balancing valve and cleaning and servicing of the balancing valve.

C. Insulated Piping Operating Between 60°F and 140°F:

1. Do not insulate flanges and unions, but bevel and seal ends of insulation at such locations.

Insulate all fittings, valves and strainers.

D. Insulated Piping Operating Above 140°F:

1. Insulate fittings, valves, flanges, float & thermostatic steam traps, and strainers. On gate valves, the insulation shall be extended to cover the entire valve bonnet, leaving only the portion of the stem that is above the bonnet and valve operator exposed.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 HVAC PIPING INSULATION SECTION 23 0719-4

2. All balance valves with fluid operating above 140°F shall be insulated and an opening shall be left in the insulation to allow for reading and adjusting the valve.

3. The use of removable insulation jackets is acceptable for insulating large and non- cylindrical shaped piping components (e.g., check valves, pressure regulating valves, calibrated balance valves, gate valve bonnets, F&T traps, strainers, line sets, and the like).

E. Refrigerant Piping:

1. On refrigerant piping (25°F and above) and not required to meet the 25/50 flame/smoke, provide at each strut or clevis support an insulation coupling to support pipe and to accept insulation thickness of adjoining insulation, to prevent insulation from sagging and crushing. The coupling shall be suitable for planned temperatures, use with specified pipe material, and shall be a 360°, one-piece cylindrical segment. Use mechanical fasteners where coupling cannot be installed on pipe during installation. Contractor shall apply adhesive to ends of insulation entering insulation coupling to maintain vapor barrier.

F. Exposed Piping:

1. Locate and cover seams in least visible locations.

2. Where exposed insulated piping extends above the floor, provide a sheet metal guard around the insulation extending 12" above the floor. Guard shall be 0.016" cylindrical smooth or stucco aluminum and shall fit tightly to the insulation.

4.3 SUPPORT PROTECTION
A.

Provide a shield on all insulated piping at each support between the insulation jacket and the support.

B. On all insulated piping greater than 1-1/2", provide shield with insulation insert of same thickness and contour as adjoining insulation at each support, between the pipe and insulation jacket, to prevent insulation from sagging and crushing. Inserts shall be as follows:

1. The insert shall be suitable for planned temperatures, be suitable for use with specific pipe material, and shall be a minimum 180° cylindrical segment the same length as metal shields.

Inserts shall be:
a. Molded hydrous calcium silicate (only use for pipes with operating temperatures above 90°F, with a minimum compressive strength of 100 psi is acceptable for pipe sizes 14" and below. For pipe sizes larger than 14", provide rolled steel plate in addition to the shield.
b. Polyisocyanurate insulation (for pipes below 300°F with a minimum compressive strength of 24 psi is acceptable for pipe sizes 3" and below, minimum 60 psi for pipe sizes 4" to 10". For pipe sizes larger than 10", provide rolled steel plate in addition to the shield. Where insulation is installed on piping located within return air plenums and mechanical rooms, insulation shall be listed and labeled at no more than 25/50 when tested per ASTM E84 or UL 723 as required
by code.
c. Cellular glass (for all temperature ranges) with a minimum compressive strength of 90 psi is acceptable for pipe sizes 14" and below. For pipe sizes larger than 14, provide rolled steel plate in addition to the shield.
d. Phenolic (for pipes operating below 250°F with a minimum compressive strength of 90 psi is acceptable for pipe sizes 14" and below. For pipe sizes larger than 14", provide rolled steel plate in addition to the shield.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 HVAC PIPING INSULATION SECTION 23 0719-5
e. As an alternative to separate pipe insulation insert and saddle, properly sized manufactured integral rigid insulation insert and shield assemblies may be used. 1) Products:
a) Buckaroo CoolDry
b) Cooper/B-Line Fig. B3380 through B3384
c) Pipe Shields A1000, A2000
f. Rectangular blocks, plugs, or wood material are not acceptable. g. Temporary wood blocking may be used by the Piping Contractor for proper height; however, these must be removed and replaced with proper inserts by the Insulation Contractor. Refer to Supports and Anchors specification section for additional information.

C. Neatly finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions.

D. Install metal shields between all hangers or supports and the pipe insulation. Shields shall be galvanized sheet metal, half-round with flared edges. Adhere shields to insulation. On cold piping, seal the shields vapor-tight to the insulation as required to maintain the vapor barrier, or add separate vapor barrier jacket.

E. Shields shall be at least the following lengths and gauges:

Pipe Size Shield Size
1/2" to 3-1/2" 12" long x 18 gauge
4" 12" long x 16 gauge
5" to 6" 18" long x 16 gauge
8" to 14" 24" long x 14 gauge
16" to 24" 24" long x 12 gauge
F. Elastomeric foam insulation shields/saddle; molded thermoplastic rigid pipe saddle sized for insulation outside diameter. Length as indicated above.

G. Ferrous hot piping 4 inches and larger, provide steel saddle at rollers as described in Section 23 0529 "HVAC Supports and Anchors".

H. Minimum 1/4" rolled galvanized steel plates shall be provided in addition to the sleeves as reinforcement on large pipes to reduce point loading on roller, trapeze hanger and strut support locations depending on insulation compressive strength. Refer to section above for exact locations.

4.4 INSULATION
A. Type A Insulation:

1. All Service Jackets: Seal all longitudinal joints with self-seal laps using a single pressure sensitive adhesive system. Do not staple.

2. Insulation without self-seal lap may be used if installed with Benjamin Foster 85-20 or equivalent Chicago Mastic, 3M or Childers lap adhesive.

3. Apply insulation with laps on top of pipe.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 HVAC PIPING INSULATION SECTION 23 0719-6

4. Fittings, Valve Bodies and Flanges: For 4" and smaller pipes, insulate with 1 lb. density insulation wrapped under compression to a thickness equal to the adjacent pipe insulation.

For pipes over 4", use mitered segments of pipe insulation. Finish with preformed plastic fitting covers. Secure fitting covers with pressure sensitive tape at each end. Overlap tape at least 2" on itself. For pipes operating below 60°F, seal fitting covers with vapor retarder mastic in addition to tape.

4.5 JACKET COVER INSTALLATION
A. Metal Covering:

1. Provide vapor barrier as specified for insulation type. Cover with aluminum jacket covering with seams located on the bottom of horizontal piping. Include fittings, joints and valves.

2. Seal all interior and exterior butt joints with metal draw bands and sealant. Seal all exterior joints watertight.

3. Interior joints do not need to be sealed.

4. Use metal covering on the following pipes:
a. All exposed piping in finished spaces unless noted otherwise on the drawings. b. All exposed piping in locker rooms.
c. All exposed piping in kitchen areas.
d. All exposed piping adjacent to cloud ceilings.
e. All exposed piping in unfinished areas as noted on drawings (e.g., storage rooms, janitor's closets, utility rooms, etc.).
f. All exposed piping in mechanical or equipment rooms below 8'-0" above floor. g. All exposed piping in mecha
nical rooms that is subject to damage from normal
operations. (Example: Piping that must be stepped over routinely.) h. All exposed piping in tunnels designated as passageways, equipment access or egress. i. All Type D, H, I and J insulation.

B. Plastic Covering:

1. Provide vapor barrier as specified for insulation type. Cover with plastic jacket covering.

Position seams to shed water.

2. Solvent weld all joints with manufacturer recommended cement.

3. Overlap all laps and butt joints 1-1/2" minimum. Repair any loose ends that do not seal securely. Solvent weld all fitting covers in the same manner. Final installation shall be watertight.

4. Use plastic insulation covering on all exposed pipes including, but not limited to:
a. All exposed piping in finished spaces unless noted otherwise on the drawings. b. All exposed piping adjacent to cloud ceilings.
c. All exposed piping in unfinished areas as noted on drawings (e.g., storage rooms, janitor's closets, utility rooms, etc.).
d. All exposed piping in mechanical or equipment rooms below 8'-0" above floor. e. All exposed piping in mechanical rooms that is subject to damage from normal operations. (Example: Piping that must be stepped over routinely.) f. All exposed piping in tunnels designated as passageways, equipment access, or egress.

5. Elastomeric piping insulati
on may have two coats of latex paint instead of plastic jacket.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 HVAC PIPING INSULATION SECTION 23 0719-7

4.6 SCHEDULE
A. Refer to drawings for insulation schedule.

END OF SECTION 23 0719
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 HVAC PIPING INSULATION SECTION 23 0719-8
(This Page Intentionally Left Blank)
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SECTION 23 0800-1
SECTION 23 0800 - COMMISSIONING OF HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Description
B. Responsibilities
C. Related Work
D. Test Equipment

1.2 DESCRIPTION
A. The purpose of this section is to specify Division 23 responsibilities in the commissioning process.

B. The systems to be commissioned are listed in the Commissioning Plan (Cx Plan). Refer to Section 01 9100.

C. Commissioning requires the participation of the Division 23 Contractor to ensure that all systems are operating in a manner consistent with the Contract Documents. The general commissioning requirements and coordination are detailed in Section 01 9100. Division 23 Contractor shall be familiar with all parts of Section 01 9100 and the commissioning plan issued by the CxA, and shall execute all commissioning responsibilities assigned to them in the Contract Documents.

1.3 RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Refer to the Cx Plan in the appendix of Section 01 9100.

1.4 RELATED WORK
A. Specific commissioning requirements are given in the following sections of these specifications. All the following sections apply to the Work of this section.

1. Section 01 7823 - Operations and Maintenance

2. Section 01 7900 - Demonstration and Training

3. Section 01 9100 - Commissioning

4. Section 21 0800 - Commissioning of Fire Suppression

5. Section 22 0800 - Commissioning of Plumbing

6. Section 26 0800 - Commissioning of Electrical

7. Section 27 0800 - Commissioning of Communications

8. Section 28 0800 - Commissioning of Electronic Safety and Security IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SECTION 23 0800-2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TEST EQUIPMENT
A. The Contractor shall provide all test equipment necessary to fulfill the testing requirements of this Division. This equipment includes, but is not limited to, the following:

1. Handheld temperature and relative humidity meter.

2. Infrared thermometer gun.

3. Analog differential pressure gauge and associated tubing.

4. Portable computer with access to the building automation system.

B. All testing equipment shall be of sufficient quality and accuracy to test and/or measure system performance with the tolerances specified in the related specifications. If not otherwise noted, the following minimum requirements apply:

1. Temperature sensors and digital thermometers shall have a certified calibration within the past year to an accuracy of 0.5°F and a resolution of +/- 0.1°F.

2. Pressure sensors shall have an accuracy of +/- 2.0% of the value range being measured (not full range of meter) and have been calibrated within the last year.

3. All equipment shall be calibrated according to the manufacturer's recommended intervals and when dropped or damaged. Calibration tags shall be affixed or certificates readily available.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
END OF SECTION 23 0800
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 CONTROLS SECTION 23 0900-1
SECTION 23 0900 - CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Complete System of Automatic Controls.

B. Control Devices, Components, Wiring and Material.

C. Instructions for Owners.

D. Remodeling.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with minimum five years' experience.

B. Control low (24V) and control line (120V) voltage wiring, conduit, and related switches and relays required for the automatic control and/or interlock of motors and equipment, including final connection, are to be furnished and installed under this section. Materials and installation to confirm to Class 1 or 2, California Administrative Code Title 24, Article E725, and as restricted under the Division 26 Electrical of these specifications.

1.3 REFERENCES
A. AMCA 500 - Test Methods for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters.

B. ANSI/ASHRAE/IES Standard 90.1 (latest published edition) - Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings.

C. ANSI/NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 volts Maximum).

D. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

E. ANSI/NFPA 90A - Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilation Systems.

F. ASHRAE 62.1 - Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality.

G. ASHRAE 85 - Automatic Control Terminology for Heating, Ventilating, Air Conditioning.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Equipment Coordination:

1. The Controls Contractor shall obtain approved equipment submittals from other contractors to determine equipment wiring connections, to choose appropriate controllers, and to provide programming.

2. Control valve selections shall be based on flow rates shown in approved shop drawings.

3. Coordinate the control interface of all equipment with the equipment manufacturers prior to submittal submission.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 CONTROLS SECTION 23 0900-2
B. Shop Drawings:

1. Submit shop drawings per Section 23 0500. In addition, submit an electronic copy of the shop drawings in Adobe Acrobat (.pdf) format to the Owner for review.

2. Cross-reference all control components and point names in a single table located at the beginning of the submittal with the identical nomenclature used in this section.

3. Submittal shall also include a trunk cable schematic diagram depicting operator workstations, control panel locations and a description of the communication type, media and protocol.

4. System Architecture: Provide riser diagrams of wiring between central control unit and all control panels. This shall include specific protocols associated with each level within the architecture. Identify all interface equipment between CPU and control panels. The architecture shall include interface requirements with other systems including, but not limited to, security systems, lighting control, fire alarm, elevator status, and power monitoring system.

5. Diagrams shall include:
a. Wiring diagrams and layouts for each control panel showing all termination numbers. b. Schematic diagrams for all control, communication, and power wiring. Provide a schematic drawing of the central system installation. Label all cables and ports with computer manufacturers' model numbers and functions. Show all interface wiring to the control system.
c. Identification of all control components connected to emergency power. d. Schematic diagram
s for all field sensors and controllers.
e. A schematic diagram of each controlled system. The schematics shall have all control points labeled. The schematics shall graphically show the location of all control elements in the system.
f. A schematic wiring diagram for each controlled system. Each schematic shall have all elements labeled. Where a control element is the same as that shown on the control system schematic, label it with the same name. Label all terminals. g. A tabular instrumentation list for each controlled system. The table shall show element name, type of device, manufacturer, model number and product data sheet number. h. All installation details and any other details required to demonstrate that the system will function properly.
i. All interface requirements with other systems.

6. The network infrastructure shall conform to the published guidelines for wire type, length, number of nodes per channel, termination, and other relevant wiring and infrastructure criteria as published. The number of nodes per channel shall be no more than 80% of the defined segment (logical or physical) limit in order to provide future system enhancement with minimal infrastructure modifications.

7. Sequences: Submit a complete description of the operation of the control system, including sequences of operation. The description shall include and referenc e a schematic diagram of
the controlled system. The wording of the control sequences in the submittal shall match verbatim that included in the construction documents to ensure there are no sequence deviations from that intended by the Architect/Engineer. Clearly highlight any deviations from the specified sequences on the submittals.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 CONTROLS SECTION 23 0900-3

8. Points List Schedule: Submit a complete points list of all points to be connected to the TCS and FMCS. The points list for each system controller shall include both inputs and outputs (I/O), point number, the controlled device associated with the I/O point, the location of the I/O device, and reference drawings. Where a control point is the same as that shown on the control system schematic, label it with the same name. Points list shall specifically identify alarms, trends, event history, archive, totalization, graphic points, and all mapped points from other systems (security systems, lighting control, fire alarm, etc.). Provide points lists, point naming convention, and factory support information for systems provided and integrated into the FMCS.

9. Damper Schedule: Schedule shall include a separate line for each damper and a column for each of the damper attributes:
a. Damper Identification Tag.
b. Location.
c. Damper Type.
d. Damper Size.
e. Duct Size.
f. Arrangement.
g. Blade Type.
h. Velocity.
i. Pressure Drop.
j. Fail Position.
k. Actuator Identification Tag.
l. Actuator Type.
m. Mounting.

10. Software: A list of operating system software, operator interface software, color graphic software, and third-party software.

11. Control System Demonstration and Acceptance: Provide a description of the proposed process, along with all reports and checklists to be used.

12. Clearly identify work by others in the submittal.

13. Quantities of item
s submitted may be reviewed but are the responsibility of the Contractor to verify.

C. Operation and Maintenance Manual:

1. Each O&M manual shall include:
a. Original Software: Complete original issue CDs for all software provided, including operating systems, programming language, operator workstation software, and graphics software.

D. Training Manual:

1. Provide a course outline and training manuals for each training class.

E. Record Documents:

1. Submit record documentation per Section 23 0500.

2. Provide a complete set of "as-built" drawings and application software on CDs. Provide drawings as AutoCAD¢¢ or Visio¢¢ compatible files. Provide two copies of the "as-built" drawings with revisions clearly indicated in addition to the documents on compact disk. All as-built drawings shall also be installed on the FMCS server in a dedicated directory. Provide all product data sheets in PDF format.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 CONTROLS SECTION 23 0900-4

3. Provide all completed testing and commissioning reports and checklists, along with all trend logs for each system identified in the points lists.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Provide factory-shipping cartons for each piece of equipment and control device. Maintain cartons through shipping, storage, and handling as required to prevent equipment damage. Store equipment and materials inside and protected from weather.

B. Factory-Mounted Components: Where control devices specified in this section are indicated to be factory mounted on equipment, arrange for shipping control devices to unit manufacturer.

1.6 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION A. Control Valves.

B. Flow Switches.

C. Temperature Sensor Sockets.

D. Gauge Taps.

E. Automatic Dampers.

F. Flow Meters.

1.7 AGENCY AND CODE APPROVALS
A. All products shall have the following agency approvals. Provide verification that the approvals exist for all submitted products with the submittal package.

1. UL-916; Energy Management Systems.

2. FCC, Part 15, Subpart J, Class A Computing Devices.

1.8 ACRONYMS
A. Acronyms used in this specification are as follows:

1. B-AAC BACnet Advanced Application Controller

2. B-ASC BACnet Application Specific Controller

3. BTL BACnet Testing Laboratories

4. DDC Direct Digital Controls

5. FMCS Facility Management and Control System

6. GUI Graphic User Interface

7. IBC Interoperable BACnet Controller

8. IDC Interoperable Digital Controller

9. LAN Local Area Network

10. NAC Network Area Controller

11. ODBC Open DataBase Connectivity

12. OOT Object Oriented
Technology

13. OPC Open Connectivity via Open Standards

14. PICS Product Interoperability Compliance Statement

15. PMI Power Measurement Interface

16. POT Portable Operator's Terminal

17. TCC Temperature Control Contractor
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 CONTROLS SECTION 23 0900-5

18. TCS Temperature Control System

19. WAN Wide Area Network

20. WBI Web Browser Interface

1.9 SUMMARY
A. Provide new standalone FMCS for this project.

B. Niagara Framework/Tridium Based Control System: The TCS provided by the TCC must use the BACnet communication protocol over the standard network. All DDC controllers used in the HVAC controls must be provided with Tridium AX Wizards for use within the Niagara framework.

C. Extend Existing System: Contractor is responsible for providing a local supervisory controller and migrating poins and graphics to the existing owner Tridium head end.

1. All controllers and accessories shall interface with the existing FMCS.

E. TCC shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and service necessary for a complete and operating Temperature Control System (TCS) and Facility Management and Control System (FMCS) using Direct Digital Controls as shown on the drawings and as described herein.

F. All labor, material, equipment and software not specifically referred to herein or on the plans that is required to meet the intent of this specification shall be provided without additional cost to the Owner.

G. The Owner shall be the named license holder of all software associated with any and all incremental work on the project.

1.10 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. The entire TCS shall be comprised of a network of interoperable, standalone digit al controllers
communicating via the following protocol to an NAC. Temperature Control System products shall be as specified below.

B. The FMCS shall include Network Area Controller or Controllers (NAC) within each facility. The NAC shall connect to the Owner's local or wide area network, depending on configuration. Provide access to the system, either locally in each building or remotely from a central site or sites, through standard Web browsers, via the Internet, and/or via local area network.

C. Provide materials and labor necessary to connect factory supplied control components.

D. Provide central and remote hardware, software, and interconnecting wire and conduit.

E. The FMCS shall include automated alarming software capable of calling e-mail compatible cellular telephones and pagers. The e-mail alarm paging system shall be able to segregate users, time schedules, and equipment and be capable of being programmed by the Owner.

F. For the dedicated configuration tool provided, it is preferable that it be launched from within the applicable Network Management Software. If not, include any software required for controller configuration as a leave-behind tool with enough license capability to support the installation.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 CONTROLS SECTION 23 0900-6
G. For each operator workstation provided, furnish one legal copy of all software tools, configuration tools, management tools, and utilities used during system commissioning and installation. All tools shall be readily available in the market. Contractor shall convey to the Owner all software tools and their legal licenses at project closeout.

1.11 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Cooperation with Other Trades: Coordinate the Work of this section with that of other sections to ensure that the Work will be carried out in an orderly fashion. It is this Contractor's responsibility to check the Contract Documents for possible conflicts between the Work of this section and that of other crafts in equipment location; pipe, duct and conduit runs; electrical outlets and fixtures; air diffusers; and structural and architectural features.

1.12 WARRANTY
A. Refer to Section 23 0500 for warranty requirements.

B. Within the warranty period, any defects in the work provided under this section due to faulty materials, methods of installation or workmanship shall be promptly (within 48 hours after receipt of notice) repaired or replaced by this Contractor at no expense to the Owner.

C. Warranty requirements include furnishing and installing all FMCS software upgrades issued by the manufacturer during the one-year warranty period.

D. Update all software and back-ups during warranty period and all user documentation on the Owner's archive
d software disks.

1.13 WARRANTY ACCESS
A. The Owner shall grant to this Contractor reasonable access to the TCS and FMCS during the warranty period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. BACnet Protocol with Tridium Niagara Platform:

1. Johnson Controls: Metasys Extended Architecture

2. Distech Controls

2.2 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE
A. General:

1. The Temperature Control System (TCS) and Facility Management Control System (FMCS) shall consist of a network of interoperable, standalone digital controllers, a computer system, graphic user interface software, printers, network devices, valves, dampers, sensors, and other devices as specified herein.

2. The installed system shall provide secure password access to all features, functions and data contained in the overall FMCS.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 CONTROLS SECTION 23 0900-7
B. Open, Interoperable, Integrated Architectures:

1. All components and controllers supplied under this Division shall be true "peer-to-peer" communicating devices. Components or controllers requiring "polling" by a host to pass data are not acceptable.

2. The supplied system must be able to access all data using standard Web browsers without requiring proprietary operator interface and configuration programs. An Open DataBase Connectivity (ODBC) or Structured Query Language (SQL) compliant server database is required for all system database parameter storage. This data shall reside on a supplier- installed server for all database access. Systems requiring proprietary database and user interface programs are not acceptable.

3. Hierarchical or "flat" topologies are required to have system response times as indicated below and to manage the flow and sharing of data without unduly burdening the customer's internal intranet network.
a. Maximum acceptable response time from any alarm occurrence (at the point of origin) to the point of annunciation shall not exceed 5 seconds for network connected user interfaces.
b. Maximum acceptable response time from any alarm occurrence (at the point of origin) to the point of annunciation shall not exceed 60 seconds for remote or dial-up connected user interfaces.

2.3 NETWORKS

2.4 REMOTE NETWORK ACCESS
A. For Local Area Network installations, provide access to the LAN from a remote locat ion via the
Internet. The Owner shall provide a connection to the Internet to enable this access via high speed cable modem, asynchronous digital subscriber line (ADSL) modem, ISDN line, T1 Line or via the customer's intranet to a corporate server providing access to an Internet Service Provider (ISP).

Customer agrees to pay monthly access charges for connection and ISP.

2.5 NETWORK AREA CONTROLLER (NAC)
A. The NAC shall support standard Web browser access via the Internet or an intranet and a minimum of five (5) simultaneous users.

B. Event Alarm Notification and Actions:

1. The NAC shall provide alarm recognition, storage; routing, management, and analysis to supplement distributed capabilities of equipment or application specific controllers.

2. The NAC shall be able to route any alarm condition to any defined user location whether connected to a LAN, remote via dial-up telephone connection, or WAN.

3. Alarm generation shall be selectable for annunciation type and acknowledgement requirements including, but not limited to:
a. Alarm
b. Normal

4. Provide for the creation of a minimum of eight alarm classes with different routing and acknowledgement properties, e.g. security, HVAC, Fire, etc.

5. Provide timed (scheduled) routing of alarms by class, object, group, or node.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 CONTROLS SECTION 23 0900-8

6. Provide alarm generation from binary object "runtime" and/or event counts for equipment maintenance. The user shall be able to reset runtime or event count values with appropriate password control.

C. Treat control equipment and network failures as alarms and annunciated.

D. Annunciate alarms in any of the following manners as defined by the user:

1. Screen message text.

2. E-mail of the complete alarm message to multiple recipients. Provide the ability to route and e-mail alarms based on:
a. Day of week.
b. Time of day.
c. Recipient.

3. Pagers via paging services that initiate a page on receipt of e-mail message.

4. Graphic with flashing alarm object(s).

5. Printed message, routed directly to a dedicated alarm printer.

E. The FMCS shall record the following for each alarm:

1. Time and date.

2. Location (building, floor, zone, office number, etc.).

3. Equipment tag.

4. Acknowledge time, date, and user who issued acknowledgement.

5. Number of occurrences since last acknowledgement.

F. Give defined users proper access to acknowledge any alarm.

G. A log of all alarms shall be maintained by the NAC and/or a server (if configured in the system) and shall be available for review by the user.

H. Provide a "query" feature to allow review of specific alarms by user-defined parameters.

I. A separate log for system alerts (controller failures, network failures, etc.) shall be provided and avail
able for review by the user.

J. An error log to record invalid property changes or commands shall be provided and available for review by the user.

2.6 BACNET FMCS
A. The intent of this specification is to provide a peer-to-peer networked, standalone, distributed control system with the capability to integrate ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-2001 BACnet, MODBUS, OPC, and other open and proprietary communication protocols in one open, interoperable system.

B. The supplied computer software shall employ object-oriented technology (OOT) for representation of all data and control devices in the system. Adherence to industry standards including the latest ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135 (BACnet) to assure interoperability between all system components is required. For each BACnet device, the device supplier must provide a PICS document showing the installed device's compliance level. Minimum compliance is Level 3; with the ability to support data read and write functionality. Physical connection of BACnet devices shall be via Ethernet (BACnet Ethernet/IP) and/or RS-485 (BACnet MSTP).

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 CONTROLS SECTION 23 0900-9
C. Interoperable BACnet Controller (IBC):

1. Controls shall be microprocessor based Interoperable BACnet Controllers (IBC) in accordance with the latest ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135. Provide IBCs for unit ventilators, fan coils, heat pumps, terminal air boxes (TAB) and other applications. The application control program shall reside in the same enclosure as the input/output circuitry that translates the sensor signals. Provide a PICS document showing the installed system's compliance level to ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135. Minimum compliance is Level 3.

2. The IBCs shall be listed by the BACnet Testing Laboratory (BTL) as follows:
a. BACnet Building Controller(s) (B-BC).
b. BACnet Advanced Application Controller(s) (B-AAC).
c. BACnet Application Specific Controller(s) (B-ASC).

3. The IBCs shall communicate with the NAC via an Ethernet connection at a baud rate of not less than 10 Mbps.

4. Each IBC sensor shall connect directly to the IBC and shall not use any of the I/O points of the controller. The IBC Sensor shall provide a two-wire connection to the controller that is polarity and wire type insensitive. The IBC sensor shall provide a communications jack for connection to the BACnet communication trunk to which the IBC controller is connected.

The IBC sensor, the connected controller, and all other devices on the BACnet bus shall be acces
sible by the POT.

5. All IBCs shall be fully application programmable and shall at all times maintain their BACnet Level 3 compliance. Controllers offering application selection only (non- programmable) require a 10% spare point capacity to be provided for all applications. Store all control sequences within or programmed into the IBC in non-volatile memory that does not depend on a battery to be retained.

6. The Contractor supplying the IBCs shall provide documentation for each device, with the following information at a minimum:
a. BACnet Device; MAC address, name, type and instance number. b. BACnet Objects; name, type and instance number.

7. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that the proper BACnet objects are provided in each IBC.

2.7 DATA COLLECTION AND STORAGE (TRENDING REQUIREMENTS) A. The NAC shall be able to collect data for any property of any object and store resident in the NAC that shall have, at a minimum, the following configurable properties:

1. Designating the log as interval or deviation.

2. For interval logs, configure the object for time of day, day of week and the sample collection interval.

3. For deviation logs, configure the object for the deviation of a variable to a fixed value. This value, when reached, will initiate logging of the object.

4. For all logs, provide the abili
ty to set the maximum number of data stores for the log and to set whether the log will stop collecting when full or rollover the data on a first-in, first-out basis.

5. Each log shall have the ability to have its data cleared on a time-based event or by a user- defined event or action.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 CONTROLS SECTION 23 0900-10
B. Store all log data in a relational database in the NAC that is accessible from a server (if the system is so configured) or a standard Web browser.

C. All log data, when accessed from a server, shall be capable of being manipulated using standard SQL statements.

D. All log data shall be available to the user in ALL the following data formats:

1. HTML.

2. XML.

3. Plain text.

4. Comma or tab separated values.

E. The NAC shall archive its log data either locally (to itself) or remotely to a server or other NAC on the network. Provide the ability to configure the following archiving properties:

1. Archive on time of day.

2. Archive on user-defined number of data stores in the log (buffer size).

3. Archive when log has reached its user-defined capacity of data stores.

4. Provide ability to clear logs once archived.

2.8 AUDIT LOG
A. Provide and maintain an audit log that tracks all activities performed on the NAC. Provide the ability to specify a buffer size for the log and the ability to archive log based on time or when the log has reached its user-defined buffer size. Provide the ability to archive the log locally (to the NAC), to another NAC on the network, or to a server. For each log entry, provide the following data:

1. Time and date.

2. User ID.

3. Change or activity: i.e., change setpoint, add or delete objects, commands, etc.

2.9 DATABASE BACKUP AND STORAGE
A. The NAC shall automatically backup its database on a user-defined time interval.

B. Store copies of the current database and, at the most, the recently saved database in the NAC. The age of the most recently saved database shall depend on the user-defined database save interval.

C. Store the NAC database in XML format to allow viewing and editing. Other formats are acceptable as long as XML format is supported.

2.10 GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE SOFTWARE
A. Operating System:

1. Provide computer with the most current Microsoft-based operating system with which the GUI has proven compatibility.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 CONTROLS SECTION 23 0900-11
B. The GUI shall employ browser-like functionality for ease of navigation. It shall include a tree view (similar to Windows Explorer) for quick viewing of, and access to, the hierarchical structure of the database. In addition, menu pulldowns and toolbars shall employ buttons, commands and navigation to permit the operator to perform tasks with basic computing skills. These shall include, but are not limited to, forward/backward buttons, home button, and a context sensitive locator line (similar to a URL line) that displays the location and the selected object identification.

C. Point Organization: Organize points by equipment categories, location, or other means acceptable to Owner.

D. Real-Time Displays: The GUI shall support the following graphic features and functions:

1. Graphic screens shall be developed using any drawing package capable of generating a GIF, BMP, or JPG file. Use of proprietary graphic file formats is not acceptable. In addition to, or in lieu of, a graphic background, the GUI shall support the use of scanned pictures.

2. Graphic screens shall be able to contain objects for text, real-time values, animation, color spectrum objects, logs, graphs, HTML or XML document links, schedule objects, hyperlinks to other URLs, and links to other graphic screens.

3. Graphics shall support layering, and each graphic object shall be configurable for assignment
to a layer. A minimum of six layers shall be supported.

4. Modifying common application objects, such as schedules, calendars, and setpoints, shall be accomplished graphically.
a. Schedule times shall be adjusted using a graphic slider without requiring any keyboard entry from the operator.
b. Holidays shall be set by using a graphic calendar without requiring any keyboard entry from the operator.

5. Commands to start and stop binary objects shall be made by selecting the object and the appropriate command from a pop-up menu. No text entry shall be required.

6. Adjustments to analog objects, such as setpoints, shall be made by selecting the object and using a graphic slider to adjust the value. No text entry shall be required.

E. System Configuration: At a minimum, the GUI shall include the necessary software and components to enable the operator to perform the following tasks with proper password access:

1. Create, delete or modify control strategies.

2. Add/delete objects.

3. Tune control loops by adjusting control loop parameters.

4. Enable or disable control strategies.

5. Generate hard copy records or control strategies on a printer.

6. Select alarm points and define the alarm state.

7. Select points to be trended and initiate the recording of values automatically.

8. View any trend as a graph.

On-Line Help: Provide a context sensitive, on-line help system to assist the operator in operation and editing of the system. On-line help shall be available for all applications and shall provide the relevant data for that particular screen. Additional help information shall be available using hypertext. All system documentation and help files shall be in HTML format.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 CONTROLS SECTION 23 0900-12
G. Security: Each operator shall be required to log on to that system with a user name and password to view, edit, add, or delete data. System security shall be selectable for each operator. The system administrator shall be able to set passwords and security levels for all other operators. Each operator password shall be able to restrict the operator's access for viewing and/or changing each system application, full screen editor, and object. Each operator shall be automatically logged off the system if no keyboard or mouse activity is detected. This auto log-off time shall be set per operator password. Store all system security data in an encrypted format.

H. System Diagnostics: The system shall automatically monitor the operation of all workstations, printers, modems, network connections, building management panels, and controllers. Annunciate the failure of any device to the operator.

I. Alarm Console:

1. The system shall have a dedicated alarm window or console. This window will notify the operator of an alarm condition, and allow the operator to view details of the alarm and to acknowledge the alarm.

2. When the alarm console is enabled, a separate alarm notification window will supersede all other windows on the desktop and shall not be capable of being minimized or closed by the operator. This window will notify the operator of new alarm s and un-acknowledged alarms.

Alarm notification windows or banners that can be minimized or closed by the operator are not acceptable. The use of the alarm console can be enabled or disabled by the system administrator.

2.11 WEB BROWSER CLIENTS
A. The system shall be capable of supporting an unlimited number of clients using a standard Web browser such as Internet Explorer¢¢, Firefox¢¢, or Chrome. Systems requiring additional software to enable a standard Web browser to reside on the client machine, or manufacturer-specific browsers, are not acceptable.

B. The Web browser shall provide the same view of the system, in terms of graphics, schedules, calendars, logs, etc., and provide the same interface methodology as is provided by the Graphic User Interface. Systems that require different views or that require different means of interacting with objects, such as schedules or logs, are not permitted.

C. The Web browser client shall provide:

1. User log-on identification and password shall be required. If an unauthorized user attempts access, display a blank web page. Implement security using Java authentication and encryption techniques to prevent unauthorized access.

2. Graphic screens developed for the GUI shall be the same screens used for the Web browser client. The web browser interfa
ce shall support all animated graphic objects supported by the GUI.

3. HTML programming shall not be required to display system graphics or data on a Web page.

HTML editing of the Web page shall be allowed if the user desires a specific look or format.

4. Store all graphic screens in the Network Area Controller (NAC) without requiring any graphics storage on the client machine.

5. Real-time values displayed on a Web page shall update automatically without requiring a manual "refresh" of the Web page.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 CONTROLS SECTION 23 0900-13

6. Users shall have administrator-defined access privileges. Depending on the access privileges assigned, the user shall be able to perform the following:
a. Modify common application objects, such as schedules, calendars, and setpoints, graphically.
1) Schedule times shall be adjustable using a graphic slider, without requiring any keyboard entry from the operator.
2) Holidays shall be set using a graphic calendar, without requiring any keyboard entry from the operator.
b. Commands to start and stop binary objects shall be made by right-clicking the selected object and selecting the appropriate command from a pop-up menu. No text entry shall be required.
c. View logs and charts.
d. View and acknowledge alarms.
e. Setup and execute SQL queries on log and archive information

7. The system shall be able to specify a user's (as determined by the log-on user identification) home page. Provide the ability to limit a specific user to just his/her defined home page.

From the home page, links to other views or pages in the system shall be possible, if allowed by the system administrator.

8. Graphic screens on the Web Browser client shall support hypertext links to other locations on the Internet or on intranet sites by specifying the Uniform Resource Locator (URL) for the desired link.

2.12 GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE COMPUTER HARDWARE (DESKTOP) A.

Provide a browser workstation with a High-Mid Range CPU as defined by www.cpubenchmark.net with 8.0 GB RAM and a 1 terabyte minimum hard drive. It shall include one parallel port, one asynchronous serial port and six USB ports. Include a 21" minimum flat panel color monitor, 8ms response time.

B. The workstation operating system shall be the latest version of Microsoft Windows and Microsoft internet browser.

C. Connect to the FMCS network via a 1 Gbps Ethernet network interface card.

2.13 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS)
A. A UPS shall be provided for each of the following:

1. FMCS workstations and servers.

2. Network area controllers.

3. Chiller plant manager (including refrigerant monitor).

4. Boiler plant manager.

5. Smoke control system controllers (e.g., atrium smoke evac, stairwell pressurization, etc.) B. Provide a 120-volt 60 Hz line-interactive uninterruptible power supply with backup battery capacity for two (2) minutes at 100% load. UPS shall have hot swappable batteries, automatic battery self- test and start-on-battery capabilities. Batteries shall be valve regulated, sealed lead acid type. UPS shall have sine wave shape output waveform. UPS shall be UL 1778 list and comply with FCC Part 15, Class A.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 CONTROLS SECTION 23 0900-14
C. Manufacturers:

1. Sola/Hevi-Duty

2. Eaton Powerware

3. APC

2.14 SYSTEM PROGRAMMING
A. The GUI software shall perform system programming and graphic display engineering. Access to the GUI software shall be through password access as assigned by the system administrator.

B. Provide a library of control, application, and graphic objects to enable creation of all applications and user interface screens. Applications shall be created by selecting the control objects from the library, dragging or pasting them on the screen, and linking them together using a built-in graphic connection tool. Completed applications may be stored in the library for future use. GUI screens shall be created in the same fashion. Data for the user displays shall be obtained by graphically linking the user display objects to the application objects to provide "real-time" data updates. Any real-time data value or object property may be connected to display its current value on a user display. Provide all software tools or processes to create applications and user interface displays.

C. Programming Methods:

1. Provide the capability to copy objects from the supplied libraries or from a user-defined library to the user's application. Link objects with a graphic linking scheme by dragging a link from one object to another. Object links will support one-to-one, many-to-one, or one-to- many relat
ionships. Linked objects shall maintain their connections to other objects regardless of where they are positioned on the page and shall show link identification for links to objects on other pages for easy identification. Links will vary in color depending on the type of link; e.g., internal, external, hardware, etc.

2. Configuration of each object shall be done through the object's property sheet using fill-in- the-blank fields, list boxes, and selection buttons. Use of custom programming, scripting language, or a manufacturer-specific procedural language for configuration is not acceptable.

3. The software shall provide the ability to view the logic in a monitor mode. When on-line, the monitor mode shall provide the ability to view the logic in real time for easy diagnosis of the logic execution. When off-line (debug), the monitor mode shall allow the user to set values to inputs and monitor the logic for diagnosing execution before it is applied to the system.

4. All programming shall be done in real time. Systems requiring the uploading, editing, and downloading of database objects are not allowed.

5. The system shall support object duplication in a customer's database. An application, once configured, can be copied and pasted for easy reuse and duplication. All links, other than to the hardware, shall be maint
ained during duplication.

2.15 DDE DEVICE INTEGRATION
A. The NAC shall support the integration of device data via Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE) over the Ethernet network. The NAC shall act as a DDE client to another software application that functions as a DDE server.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 CONTROLS SECTION 23 0900-15
B. Provide the required objects in the library included with the Graphic User Interface programming software to support the integration of these devices into the FMCS. Objects provided shall include, at a minimum:

1. DDE Generic AI Object.

2. DDE Generic AO Object.

3. DDE Generic BO Object.

4. DDE Generic BI Object.

2.16 CONTROL DAMPERS
A. Rectangular Control Dampers - Standard Construction:

1. Shall be licensed to bear the AMCA Certified Rating Seal.

2. Test leakage and pressure drop per AMCA 500.

3. Frame: Hat-shaped channel, minimum 12 gauge extruded aluminum, and minimum 4" deep.

Caulk or weld seams to prevent leakage.

4. Blades: Minimum 12 gauge extruded aluminum airfoil design, minimum 6" wide, and overlapping blades and blade seals (overlapping blade seals only is unacceptable).

5. Shaft: Non-cylindrical, solid aluminum or zinc plated steel with opening in blade to match profile of shaft. Shaft shall be securely fastened to the blade and of sufficient length to mount direct-coupled actuator. Damper manufacturer shall provide drive pin extensions and outboard bearing support brackets as required.

6. Bearings: Acetal (Delrin/Celcon) inner bearing fixed to an aluminum shaft, rotating within a polycarbonate outer bearing inserted in the frame. Provide thrust bearings for vertical damper applications.

7. Blade Seals: Extruded silicone gaskets secured in an integral slot within the blade.

8. Side Seals: Stainl
ess steel compression type or extruded silicone gasket secured in an integral slot within the frame.

9. Size Limits: 48" maximum horizontal blade length, 24 square foot maximum area per damper. Total cross-sectional area of dampers in ducts shall be at least as large as the duct without the use of blank-off sections.

10. Maximum Leakage: Class 1A at 1" w.c. pressure differential for a 24" x 24" damper.

11. Maximum Pressure Drop for Opposed Blade Damper: 0.15" for 8,000 CFM through a 24" x 24" damper (2000 fpm).

12. Maximum Pressure Drop for Parallel Blade Damper: 0.08" for 8,000 CFM through a 24" x 24" damper (2000 fpm).

2.17 DAMPER ACTUATORS
A. Damper Actuators - Pneumatic:

1. Pneumatic piston type with bracket arrangement for location outside the air stream whenever possible.

2. Provide with aluminum housing and synthetic elastomer or rolling neoprene diaphragm.

Actuator shall have 30 psi maximum safe operating pressure, -20°°F to 150°°F operating temperature range. Actuator shall be UL listed.

3. Provide pilot positioner on all damper actuators.

4. Select all actuators and spring ranges to operate their dampers as indicated in the control sequences with 50% additional force for future friction increases.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 CONTROLS SECTION 23 0900-16
B. Damper Actuators - Electronic:

1. Actuator shall be UL 873 or 60730 listed and provided with NEMA housing for applicable environment, electronic overload protection to prevent actuator damage due to over-rotation.

Mount actuator by means of a V-bolt dual nut clamp with a V-shaped toothed cradle, directly couple and mount to the valve bonnet stem, or ISO-style direct-coupled mounting pad.

Actuators shall be capable of being mechanically and electrically paralleled to increase torque, if required.

2. Actuators shall be warranted for a period of five (5) years from the date of production, with the first two (2) years unconditional.

3. Proportional actuator position shall be proportional to analog or pulse width modulating signal from electronic control system.

4. Fail-Safe Dampers: Where shown on the drawings or sequences, fail-safe mechanism shall operate the damper to the fail position following power interruption. a. Mechanical/Spring: Mechanical spring return mechanism to drive controlled drive to an end position (open or close) on loss of power.
b. Electronic: Electronic fail-safe shall incorporate an active balancing circuit to maintain equal charging rates among the capacitors. The power fail position shall be proportionally adjustable between 0 to 100% in 10 percent increments with a 2 second operational delay.

5. Feedback: Where shown on drawings or sequences, provide analog feedback signal for positive position indica
tion.

6. Damper End Switches: Where shown on the drawings or sequences, provide end switches to prove damper reaches open/closed position.

2.18 CONTROL INSTRUMENTATION
A. Temperature Measuring Devices:

1. Electric Thermostats:
a. Single Temperature - Line Voltage Electric: Integral manual ON/OFF/AUTO selector switch, minimum dead band of 5°F, concealed temperature adjustment, locking cover, rated for load, single or double pole as required.
b. Single Temperature - Low Voltage Electric: Integral manual ON/OFF/AUTO selector switch, minimum dead band of 5°F, anticipator circuits, concealed temperature adjustment, locking cover, 24 V control transformer (if not included with unit under control), single or double pole as required.

2. Low Limit Switch:
a. Provide one foot of sensing element for each one square foot of coil area, maximum element length 25 feet, of the vapor tension type, so that any point along the entire length of measuring element can trigger the switch.
b. Provide 3" minimum radius capillary support clips at each turn. c. Furnish each thermostat with one single pole, single throw normally-opened switch and one single pole, single throw normally-closed auxiliary switch. d. Setpoint range shall be 15°F to 55°F with a permanent stop at 35°F. e. Differential shall be fixed at approximately 5°°F and supplied with manual reset.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 CONTROLS SECTION 23 0900-17
B. Temperature Sensors:

1. Room Temperature Sensor:
a. Sensor Only: Two-piece construction, ventilated plastic enclosure, off-white color, thermistor sensing element or resistance temperature device (RTD), 45°F to 90°F operating range, ±± 0.50°F accuracy, no setpoint adjustment or override button. b. Sensor with Setpoint Adjustment: Two-piece construction, ventilated plastic enclosure, off-white color, thermistor sensing element or resistance temperature device (RTD), 45°F to 90°F operating range, ±± 0.50°F accuracy, with exposed single setpoint adjustment (no numeric temperature scale - provide with a single warmer/cooler or red/blue visual scale), no override button.
c. Sensor with Override: Two-piece construction, ventilated plastic enclosure, off-white color, thermistor sensing element or resistance temperature device (RTD), 45°F to 90°F operating range, ±± 0.50°F accuracy, occupied/unoccupied override button with LED, no setpoint adjustment.
d. Sensor with Setpoint Adjustment and Override: Two-piece construction, ventilated plastic enclosure, off-white color, thermistor sensing element or resistance temperature device (RTD), 45°F to 90°F operating range, ±± 0.50°F accuracy, with exposed single setpoint adjustment (no numeric temperature scale - provide with a warmer/cooler or red/blue visual scale), occupied/unoccupied override button with LED.

2. Duct Temperature Sensor:
a. RTD type averaging sensor. 1000 ohm platinum RTD; accuracy: minimum +/- 1.2°F; range -40°F-220°F.
b. Sensing element shall have a minimum of 1 foot of sensor length for each 2 square feet of duct or coil area.

Sensor shall be arranged evenly across the duct or coil such that no point in the duct or coil is more than 1 foot away from the sensor. c. Probe type thermistors are acceptable in VAV box duct applications downstream of reheat coils.

C. Pressure Measuring Devices

1. Differential Pressure Switches:
a. Standard Pressure Switches:
1) Diaphragm-activated gauge with 4-3/4" dial, cast aluminum case, sealed interior, designed to resist shock and vibration, and rated for 15 psig. 2) Accuracy shall be ±± 3% of full scale maximum throughout entire range at 70°F.
3) Provide mounting brackets, probes, and shutoff valves required for proper installation.
4) The range and service shall be as required for application or as noted on the drawings.
b. High Pressure Switches (Manual Reset):
1) Differential pressure switch with single pole, double-throw snap switch and enclosure.
2) Rated for pressure specified in sequence of control. 3) Electrical rating shall be 15 amps at 120-480 volts.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 CONTROLS SECTION 23 0900-18
4) Setpoint adjustment shall be screw type located inside enclosure. 5) Provide optional manual reset for overpressure protection with all tubing, brackets, and adapters.
6) Repeatability: ±± 3%.

2. Pressure Transmitters/Transducer:
a. Air-to-Air:

3. Room Pressure Monitor System:
a. General:
1) The room pressure monitor system shall include a room pressure monitor, remote pressure sensor, door switch, keyed switch, and low voltage control transformer.
2) The system shall continuously measure, display, and monitor the room pressure.
3) All components of the room pressure monitor system shall be completely designed, tested, cataloged, and coordinated for single point responsibility. 4) TCC shall furnish and install all wiring as required to connect system components.
b. Room Pressure Monitor:
1) Shall measure and display room pressure and provide access to menu driven programming options via a keypad. Refer to drawings for room pressure monitor requirements.
2) A minimum of two indicator lights shall be provided on the front of the monitor to indicate ALARM and NORMAL conditions.
3) There shall be an alphanumeric digital display indicating the measured room pressure in inches of H2O with a display accuracy of 0.001 and shall be updated every second.
4) There shall be low and high pressure audible alarms. Each alarm shall have a unique setpoint.
5) The room pressure monitor shall not be capable of changing the room mode without the use of a password or keyed switch.
6)
The room pressure monitor shall accept an input from the door switch to silence the alarm.
7) The room pressure monitor shall accept an input from the FMCS system to change the room mode as indicated in the control sequences. 8) Provide the following inputs/outputs to the FMCS system:
a) Pressure (analog).
b) Room Mode (binary).
c) Alarm (binary).
c. Pressure Sensor:
1) Shall be temperature compensated over a range of 55°F to 95°F. 2) The assembly shall not compromise the fire rating of the wall. 3) Shall measure room pressure from -0.20000 to +0.20000 inches H2O with an accuracy of ±± 0.001 inches H2O.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 CONTROLS SECTION 23 0900-19
4) Shall be bidirectional to determine the proper direction of pressure.

Unidirectional sensors are not acceptable.
5) Manufacturer shall provide cable between the pressure sensor and room pressure monitor.
d. Transformer:
1) The transformer shall have a primary-side voltage of 120 VAC and a secondary-side voltage of 24 VAC.
2) The transformer shall be UL and CSA listed.
3) Manufacturer shall provide cable between the transformer and room pressure monitor.

Area (sq.ft.) Total # of Sensors Required
Less than 2 4
2 to less than 4 6
4 to less than 8 8
8 to less than 16 12
≥ 16 16
D. Carbon Dioxide Sensors:

1. Microprocessor based non-dispersive infrared sensor with range of 0 to 2,000 ppm CO2 with ±± 100 ppm accuracy, maximum drift (compensated) of ±± 5% full scale in five years, VOC software and hardware sensing, duct mounting where applicable, 0-10V dc or 4-20 mA output directly proportional to ppm, adjustable alarm limit, membrane filter, and terminal block. The diffusion gas chamber in the sensor shall incorporate a reflective light pipe or wave guide surrounded by a gas permeable membrane that prevents particulate contamination of the sensor. Unit shall have selectable IAQ mode with output signal and sum of CO2 and VOC levels.

2.19 ±±CONDUIT AND BOXES
A. Conduit and Boxes: Refer to Electrical Section 26 0533 for materials, sizing, and other requirements
B. Conduit and Box Identification (Color and Labeling):

1. Refer to the Temperature Control Contractor notes located on the mechanical cover sheet for raceway and box color requirements.

2. Refer to Electrical Section 26 0553 for raceway and box labeling requirements.

2.20 WIRE AND CABLE
A. Wire and Cable: Refer to Electrical Section 26 0513 for wire and cable materials.

1. Wire and Cable Color: Refer to the Temperature Control Contractor notes located on the mechanical cover sheet for wire and cable color requirements.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 CONTROLS SECTION 23 0900-20
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION
A. Verify that systems are ready to receive work. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions.

B. Install system and materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Drawings of the TCS and FMCS network are diagrammatic only. Any apparatus not shown but required to meet the intent of the project documents shall be furnished and installed without additional cost.

D. Install all operators, sensors, and control devices where accessible for service, adjustment, calibration, and repair. Do not install devices where blocked by piping or ductwork. Devices with manual reset or limit adjustments shall be installed below 6'-0" if practical to allow inspection without using a ladder.

E. Verify locations of wall-mounted devices (such as thermostats, temperature and humidity sensors, and other exposed sensors) with drawings and room details before installation. Coordinate mounting heights to be consistent with other wall-mounted devices. Maximum height above finished floor shall not exceed ADA mounting requirements.

F. Provide valves over 3/4" size with position indicators and pilot positioners where sequenced with other controls.

G. Mount control panels adjacent to associated equipment on vibration-free walls or freestanding angle iron supports. One cabinet may accommodate more than one system in same equipment room.

H. After completion of installation, test and adjust control equipme nt.

I. Check calibration of instruments. Recalibrate or replace.

J. Furnish and install conduit, wire, and cable per the National Electric Code, unless noted otherwise in this section.

K. All controls associated with the proper operation of air handling units, pumps, or other mechanical equipment served by emergency power shall be connected to the emergency power system. Control components shall be powered from the equipment branch. In no instance shall panel be connected to the life safety branch of the emergency power system. Panels may be connected to a common 20 amp, 120 volt circuit provided the total load on the circuit does not exceed 16 amps. Circuit conductors shall be sized per the table below. All power connections to the control panels shall be performed by a licensed electrician at the cost of this Contractor. Submit circuit information (total amperage on circuit, conductors length, and panel) for control panels to the Architect/Engineer for approval.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 CONTROLS SECTION 23 0900-21
Circuit Load
(Amps)
Circuit Max
Length
Feeder Size
≤ 5 ≤ 200ft 2#12 & 1#12 ground in 3/4" conduit.
≤ 10 ≤ 100ft 2#12 & 1#12 ground in 3/4" conduit.
≤ 16 ≤ 75ft 2#12 & 1#12 ground in 3/4" conduit.
≤ 200 ≤ 325ft 2#10 & 1#10 ground in 3/4" conduit.
≤ 100 ≤ 160ft 2#10 & 1#10 ground in 3/4" conduit.
≤ 75 ≤ 100ft 2#10 & 1#10 ground in 3/4" conduit.

L. All hardware, software, equipment, accessories, wiring (power and sensor), piping, relays, sensors, power supplies, transformers, and instrumentation required for a complete and operational FMCS system, but not shown on the electrical drawings, are the responsibility of the TCC.

M. Remodeling:

1. All room devices as indicated on the drawings shall be removed by this Contractor. The Contractor shall also prepare the wall for finishes. Preparing the wall shall include patching old anchor holes (after the anchoring device has been removed) and sanding the wall to remove old paint outlines remaining from original devices. The wall shall be painted to match the existing wall prior to the installation of the new room device. If wall covering requires patching, the Contractor shall furnish new wall covering to match existing. If new wall covering is not available to match existing, the Contractor shall furnish a white acrylic or Plexiglas plate, 1/4" thick and sized to cover the void.

N. Labels For Control Devices:

1. Provide labels indicating service of all control devices in panels and other locations.

2. Labels may be made with permanent marking pen in the control panels if clearly legible.

3. Use engraved labels for items outside panel such as outside air thermostats.

4. Labels are not required for room thermostats, damper actua tors and other items where their
function is obvious.

O. Airflow Stations:

1. The transmitter shall be installed at a location that is protected from weather, water, and vibration.

2. Mount transmitter where they can easily be read (36" to 66" above floor). Do not fasten transmitters directly to ductwork or compromise duct insulation.

3. The manufacturer's authorized representative shall visit the project site during construction prior to station installations to confirm all submitted sizes, mounting requirements and locations. Size adjustments shall be made at no additional cost. The representative shall meet on site with the TCC to support and train them on proper installation procedures and calibration.

4. Install labels at each sensor and transmitter identifying its service.

3.2 GRAPHIC DISPLAY
A. Create a customized graphic for each piece of equipment indicated on the itemized points list.

B. Components shall be arranged on graphic as installed in the field.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 CONTROLS SECTION 23 0900-22
C. Include each graphic point listed in the itemized points list using real time data.

D. Provide a graphic representation of the following:

1. Where there are multiple buildings, color code the campus map by the systems serving that building. The building graphic shall be linked to the graphic for that building's systems.

2. Where there are multiple floors, provide color codes/designations for the areas served by each AHU and TAB by floor.

3. Where multiple AHUs serve one floor, color code the areas served by each AHU. The area shall be linked to the graphic for that area's AHU.

4. Provide an overall floor plan of each floor of the building color coded by zone linked to the TAB for that zone. The zone shall be linked to the graphic for that zone's TAB graphic.

5. Show the location of each thermostat on the floor plan.

6. Provide separate graphics showing the chilled and heating water system flow diagram. Show temperatures and flows on the flow diagram. Each piece of equipment shown on the flow diagram shall be linked to the graphic for that piece of equipment.

7. Provide a graphic showing the steam system flow diagram. Show pressures and flows on the flow diagram. Each piece of equipment shown on the flow diagram shall be linked to the graphic
for that piece of equipment.

E. The FMCS shall include full graphic operator interface to display the following graphics as a minimum:

1. Home page to include a minimum of six critical points: Outside Air Temperature, Outside Air Relative Humidity, Enthalpy, KWH, KW, etc.

2. Graphic floor plans accurately depicting rooms, walls, hallways, and showing accurate locations of space sensors and major mechanical equipment.

3. Detailed graphics for each mechanical system including AHUs, ERUs, EFs, chillers, and boilers, as a minimum.

4. Access corresponding system drawings, technical literature, and sequences of operations directly from each system graphic.

F. The FMCS shall include individual graphical buttons to access the following data stored in PDF format:

1. Project control as-built documentation including all TCS drawings, diagrams and sequences of operation.

2. TCS Bill of Material for each system, e.g. AHU, RTU, FCU, boiler, etc.

3. Technical literature specification data sheets for all components listed in the TCS Bill of Material.

3.3 CONDUIT AND BOXES INSTALLATION
A. Conduit and Box Installation: Refer to Electrical Section 26 0533 for execution and installation.

B. Conduit and Box Identification (color and labeling) installation. Refer to Electrical Section 26 0553 for raceway and box identification installation.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 CONTROLS SECTION 23 0900-23
C. Outlet Box Schedule: Thermostat/temperature sensor:

1. Dry Interior Locations: Provide 4" square galvanized steel with raised cover to fit flush with finished wall line. When located in concrete block walls, provide square edge title cover of sufficient depth to extend out to face of block or masonry boxes.

2. Other Conditions: Refer to Electrical Section 26 0533 for requirements.

3.4 WIRE AND CABLE INSTALLATION
A. Wire and Cable Installation: Refer to Electrical Section 26 0513 for execution and installation.

B. Field Quality Control:

1. Inspect wire and cable for physical damage and proper connection.

2. Torque test conductor connections and terminations to manufacturer's recommended values.

3. Perform continuity test on all conductors.

4. Protection of cable from foreign materials:
a. It is the Contractor's responsibility to provide adequate physical protection to prevent foreign material application or contact with any cable type. Foreign material is defined as any material that would negatively impact the validity of the manufacturer's performance warranty. This includes, but is not limited, to overspray of paint (accidental or otherwise), drywall compound, or any other surface chemical, liquid or compound that could come in contact with the cable, cable jacket or cable termination components.
b. Overspray of paint on any cable, cable jacket or cable termination component will not be acce
pted. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to replace any component containing overspray, in its entirety, at no additional cost to the project. Cleaning of the cables with harsh chemicals is not allowed. This requirement is regardless of the PASS/FAIL test results of the cable containing overspray. Should the manufacturer and warrantor of the structured cabling system desire to physically inspect the installed condition and certify the validity of the structured cabling system (via a signed and dated statement by an authorized representative of the structured cabling manufacturer), the Owner may, at their sole discretion, agree to accept said warranty in lieu of having the affected cables replaced. In the case of plenum cabling, in addition to the statement from the manufacturer, the Contractor shall also present to the Owner a letter from the local Authority Having Jurisdiction stating that they consider the plenum rating of the cable to be intact and acceptable.

C. Installation Schedule:

1. Conduit terminations to all devices installed in applications with rotating equipment, expansion/contraction or vibration shall be made with flexible metallic conduit, unless noted otherwise. Final terminations to exterior devices installed in damp or wet locations shall be made with liquidtight flexible metallic conduit. Terminations in hazardous areas, as defined in the National
Electrical Code, shall be made with flexible conduit rated for the environment.

3.5 FMCS INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate voltage and ampacity of all contacts, relays, and terminal connections of equipment being monitored or controlled. Voltage and ampacity shall be compatible with equipment voltage and be rated for full ampacity of wiring or overcurrent protection of circuit controlled.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 CONTROLS SECTION 23 0900-24
B. Naming Conventions: Coordinate all point naming conventions with Owner standards. In the absence of Owner standards, naming conventions shall use equipment designations shown on plans.

3.6 COMMISSIONING
A. Upon completion of the installation, this Contractor shall load all system software and start up the system. This Contractor shall perform all necessary calibration, testing and de-bugging and perform all required operational checks to ensure that the system is functioning in full accordance with these specifications.

B. This Contractor shall perform tests to verify proper performance of components, routines, and points. Repeat tests until proper performance results. This testing shall include a point-by-point log to validate 100% of the input and output points of the FMCS system operation.

C. This Contractor shall prove that the controls network is functioning correctly and within acceptable bandwidth criteria and shall test the system with an approved protocol analysis tool. Provide a log and statistics summary showing that each channel is within acceptable parameters. Each channel shall be shown to have at least 25% spare capacity for future expansion.

D. Upon completion of the performance tests described above, repeat these tests, point by point, as described in the validation log above in the presence of Owner's Representative, as required.

Properly schedule these tests so testing is comple
te at a time directed by the Owner's
Representative. Do not delay tests so as to prevent delay of occupancy permits or building occupancy.

E. System Acceptance: Satisfactory completion is when this Contractor has performed successfully all the required testing to show performance compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative. System acceptance shall be contingent upon completion and review of all corrected deficiencies.

3.7 PREPARATION FOR BALANCING
A. Verify that all dampers are in the position indicated by the controller (e.g., open, closed or modulating).

B. Check the calibration and setpoints of all controllers.

C. Check the locations of all thermostats and humidistats for potential erratic operation from outside influences such as sunlight, drafts, or cold walls.

D. Check that all sequences operate as specified. Verify that no simultaneous heating and cooling occurs, unless specified. Observe that heating cannot begin at TAB reheat terminals until the unit is at the minimum CFM.

E. Verify the operation of all interlock systems.

3.8 TEST AND BALANCE COORDINATION
A. The Contractor shall furnish a single set of all tools necessary to interface to the control system for test and balance purposes.

B. The Contractor shall provide a minimum of four (4) hours training for the Balancing Contractor in the use of these tools.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 CONTROLS SECTION 23 0900-25
C. In addition, the Contractor shall provide a qualified technician to assist in the test and balance process until the first 20 terminal units are balanced.

D. The tools used during the test and balance process shall be returned at the completion of the testing and balancing.

3.9 DEMONSTRATION AND ACCEPTANCE
A. At completion of installation, provide two days minimum instruction for operators. Demonstrate operation of all controls and systems. Describe the normal operation of all equipment.

3.10 TRAINING
A. On-Site:

1. After completion of commissioning, the manufacturer shall provide 8 hours of training on consecutive days for 4 Owner's representatives. The training course shall enable the Owner's representatives to perform Day-to-Day Operations as defined herein. A factory-trained instructor with experience in presenting the training material and the system programmer for this project shall perform the training.

3.11 INSTALLATION OF SENSORS
A. Install sensors in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Mount sensors rigidly and adequately for the environment within which the sensor operates.

C. Room temperature sensors shall be installed on concealed junction boxes properly supported by the wall framing.

D. All wires attached to sensors shall be air sealed in their raceways or in the wall to stop air transmitted from other areas affecting sensor readings.

E. Averaging sensors and low limits shall be installed at the top of the assembly with the element on a slight downward incli
ne away from the sensor making a serpentine pattern over the cross-sectional area with elements spaced not over 12" apart and within 6" of the top and bottom of the area.

F. All pipe-mounted temperature sensors shall be installed in immersion wells. Install all liquid temperature sensors with heat-conducting fluid in thermal wells.

G. Install outdoor air temperature sensors on exterior of north wall, complete with sun shield at designated location approved by Architect/Engineer. TCC shall prime and paint the device enclosure. Color selection by Architect.

H. Install all wall-mounted CO2 sensors between 3 feet and 6 feet above the floor.

END OF SECTION 23 0900
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 CONTROLS SECTION 23 0900-26
(This Page Intentionally Left Blank)
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 REFRIGERATION PIPING AND SPECIALTIES SECTION 23 2300-1
SECTION 23 2300 - REFRIGERATION PIPING AND SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Piping and Pipe Fittings
B. Moisture and Liquid Indicators
C. Check Valves
D. Pressure Relief Valves
E. Filter-Driers
F. Suction Filters
G. Solenoid Valves
H. Expansion Valves
I. Receivers
J. Suction Accumulators

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Remanufactured specialties are not acceptable.

1.3 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASME SEC 8D - Boilers and Pressure Vessels Code, Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels.

B. ANSI/ASME SEC 9 - Boilers and Pressure Vessels Code, Welding and Brazing Qualifications.

C. ANSI/ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.

D. ANSI/ASME B31.5 - Refrigeration Piping.

E. ANSI/ASTM B32 - Solder Metal.

F. ANSI/ASTM B88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube.

G. ANSI/AWS A5.8 - Brazing Filler Metal.

H. ASTM B280 - Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Field Service.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 23 0500.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 REFRIGERATION PIPING AND SPECIALTIES SECTION 23 2300-2
B. Submit layout of entire piping system including equipment, critical dimensions, and all pipe sizes, traps, valves, and accessories. Layout shall be a custom drawing for this job, not a standard detail. The refrigeration equipment supplier shall stamp the approval on layout drawings.

C. Submit product data for specialties, including manufacturers catalog information.

D. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver and store piping and specialties in shipping containers with labels in place.

B. Protect piping and specialties from entry of foreign material by leaving caps and plugs in place until installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING
A. Design Pressure: 450 psig.

1. Maximum Design Temperature: 250°F.

B. Piping - 4" and under; Brazed Joint:

1. Tubing: Type ACR hard drawn seamless copper tube, ASTM B280. Sizes indicated are nominal designation.

2. Joints: Brazed with silver solder.

3. Fittings: Wrought copper solder joint, ANSI B16.22.

4. Special Requirements: All tubing shall be cleaned, dehydrated, pressurized with dry nitrogen, plugged and tagged by manufacturer "for refrigeration service". During brazing operations, continuously purge the interior of the pipe with nitrogen to prevent oxide formation.

C. Piping - 1-3/8" and Under; Dual Concentric Crimp Mechanical Press Connection (Contractor's Option):

1. Tubing: Type ACR hard drawn seamless copper tube, ASTM B280. Sizes indicated are nominal designation.

2. Joints: Dual concentric crimp band mecha
nical press connection.

3. Fittings: Refrigerant Grade Copper in accordance with ASTM B75 or ASTM B743 with embedded HNBR O-ring.

4. Manufacturers:
a. Rapid Locking System (RLS)
b. Conex Banninger
c. Parker Hannifin
d. MaxiPro ACR
e. Nibco ACR Press
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 REFRIGERATION PIPING AND SPECIALTIES SECTION 23 2300-3
D. Piping - 1-3/8" and Under; Mechanically Attached, Axially Swaged Compression Connection (Contractor's Option):

1. Tubing: Type ACR hard drawn seamless copper tube, ASTM B280. Sizes indicated are nominal designation.

2. Joints: Mechanically attached connector, axially swaged compression connection.

3. Fittings: Refrigerant grade copper in accordance with ASTM B75 or ASTM B743. Brass body with two stabilization inserts in accordance with ASTM B15/B16M. Two steel rings in accordance with ASTM A108-13; anerobic adhesive sealant.

4. Manufacturers:
a. VULKAN Lokring

2.2 MOISTURE AND LIQUID INDICATORS
A. UL listed, with copper, brass, or copper-plated steel body, flared or solder ends, extended fittings in units up to at least 1-1/8" to allow brazing without removing the cartridge, sight glass, color coded paper moisture indicator that is replaceable without breaking piping connections for units up to 1-1/8" size, and plastic cap; maximum working pressure of 500 psi, and maximum temperature of 200°F.

1. Manufacturers:
a. Sporlan
b. Henry Valve Company
c. Alco Valve

2.3 VALVES
A. BA-14: Refrigerant Ball Valve: 3/8" thru 3-1/8", 500 psi, -40°F to +300°F, full-port up to 2-1/8" size, blow-out proof, PTFE seals, brass ball with equalizing orifice, visible position indication, seal cap, extended copper connections, replaceable stem seals, compatible with all CFC, HCFC, and HFC refrigerants.

1. Manufacturers:
a. Henry Valve Company
b. Superior Valve
c. Alco Valve

2.4 FILTER-DRIERS
A. Replaceable Cartridge
Angle Type: ANSI/AHRI 710, UL listed, brass or epoxy-coated steel shell, molded desiccant high-water capacity filter core(s); maximum working pressure of 500 psi; maximum temperature of 275°F; maximum pressure drop of 3 psi with R410a or 1.5 psi with R134a at system flow rate.

2.5 SOLENOID VALVES
A. Valve: AHRI 760; pilot operated; copper or brass body and internal parts; synthetic seat; stainless steel stem and plunger assembly; extended solder ends to permit installation without disassembly; maximum working pressure of 500 psi; normally closed. Maximum pressure drop at system flow of 5 psi for R410a and 3 psi for R134a.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 REFRIGERATION PIPING AND SPECIALTIES SECTION 23 2300-4
B. Coil Assembly: UL listed, replaceable with molded electromagnetic coil, moisture and fungus proof, surge protector and color-coded lead wires, integral junction box, Class F temperature rated, ANSI/UL 429.

2.6 EXPANSION VALVES
A. Angle or Straight Thru Type: ANSI/AHRI 750; materials suitable for system refrigerant, external equalizer, adjustable super heat setting, balanced port design, suitable for horizontal or vertical installation, with replaceable capillary tube and remote sensing bulb.

B. Selection: Evaluate refrigerant pressure drop through system to determine available pressure drop across valve. Select valve for maximum load at design operating pressure and minimum 10°°F super heat. Select to avoid being undersized at full load or excessively oversized at part load.

2.7 RECEIVERS
A. All receivers shall have capacity to hold the entire refrigerant charge when 90% full at 90°F per ASHRAE 15-78.

B. 6" and Smaller Internal Diameter: ANSI/AHRI 495, UL listed, steel or copper, brazed; 450 psi working pressure, with tappings for inlet, outlet, and relief valve or fusible plug.

2.8 EXPANSION COMPENSATION
A. Assembly consisting of two flexible connectors, two copper flexible connectors, two 90°° elbows, and a 180°° return pipe. Unit shall be in the form of a pipe loop.

B. Connectors shall have corrugated copper hose bodies with copper braided casings.

C. Connectors shall be rated for 150 psi working pressure at 70°F.

D. Sizes 2" and smalle
r shall have copper sweat ends.

E. Connectors shall be suitable for 1/2" permanent misalignment.

F. Manufacturer:

1. Metraflex Type MLS
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs.

B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.

C. Remove all scale, rust, dirt, oils, stickers and thoroughly clean exterior of all bare metal exposed piping, hangers, and accessories in preparation to be painted.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 REFRIGERATION PIPING AND SPECIALTIES SECTION 23 2300-5
B. Reducers are generally not shown. Where pipe sizes change at tee, the tee shall be the size of the largest pipe shown connecting to it.

C. Route piping in orderly manner, parallel to building structure, and maintain gradient.

D. Install piping to conserve building space and not interfere with use of space.

E. Do not install piping or other equipment above electrical switchboards or panelboards. This includes a dedicated space extending 25 feet from the floor to the structural ceiling with width and depth equal to the equipment.

F. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations and locations. Slope piping 1% in direction of oil return.

G. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment.

H. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings.

I. Provide access doors for concealed valves and specialties.

J. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building frame, brush clean, and apply zinc rich primer to welding.

K. Insulate piping and equipment; per Section 23 0719 and Section 23 0716.

L. Provide external equalizer piping on expansion valves, and locate expansion valve sensing bulb immediately downstream of evaporator on suction line. Connect distributor to expansion valve outlet.

M. Install flexible connectors parallel to the shafts of compressors.

N. Fully charge
system with refrigerant after testing.

3.3 PIPE ERECTION AND LAYING
A. Carefully inspect all pipe, fittings, valves, equipment and accessories before installation. Any items that are unsuitable, cracked or otherwise defective shall be rejected and removed from the job immediately.

B. All pipe, fittings, valves, equipment and accessories shall have factory applied identification sufficient to determine their conformance with specified requirements.

C. Exercise care at all times to prevent entry of foreign matter into piping, fittings, valves, equipment and accessories. Do not erect or install any item that is not clean.

D. During construction, until system is fully operational, keep all openings in piping and equipment closed except when actual work is being performed on that item or system. Closures shall be plugs, caps, blind flanges or other items designed for this purpose.

E. Change direction of pipes only with fittings or pipe bends. Change size only with fittings.

F. Cut all pipe to exact measurement and install without springing or forcing.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 REFRIGERATION PIPING AND SPECIALTIES SECTION 23 2300-6

3.4 APPLICATION
A. Provide solenoid valves in liquid lines of systems, in oil bleeder lines to stop flow of oil and refrigerant into the suction line when system shuts down, and in hot gas bypass lines, as applicable.

B. Provide refrigerant charging valve connections.

C. Provide replaceable cartridge filter-driers, with three-valve bypass assembly and suction filters without bypass assembly.

3.5 JOINING OF PIPE
A. Brazed Joints:

1. Make up joints with brazing filler metal conforming to ANSI/AWS A5.8. Cut copper tubing ends perfectly square and remove all burrs inside and outside. Thoroughly clean sockets of fittings and ends of tubing to remove all oxide, dirt, and grease just prior to brazing. Apply flux evenly, but sparingly, to all surfaces to be joined. Brazing filler metal with a flux coating may also be used. Heat joints uniformly to proper brazing temperature so braze filler metal flows to all mated surfaces. Wipe excess braze filler metal, leaving a uniform fillet around cup of fitting.

2. Flux shall conform to ANSI/AWS A5.31.

3. Remove composition discs and all seals during brazing if not suitable for a minimum of 840°F or greater than the melting temperature of the brazing filler metal, whichever is greater.

B. Mechanical Press Connection:

1. Copper press fitting shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions
.

2. Examination: Upon delivery to the jobsite, examine copper tubing and fittings for debris, defects, incise marks (manufacturer's engraving on tube), holes, or cracks.

3. Fully insert tubing into the fitting and mark tubing.

4. Prior to making connection, the fitting alignment shall be checked against the mark made on the tube to ensure the tubing is fully engaged in the fitting.

5. Joint shall be pressed with a tool approved by the manufacturer.

6. Installers shall be trained by manufacturer personnel or representative. Provide documentation upon request.

C. Axially Swaged Connection:

1. Brass axially swaged connectors shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions.

2. Installers shall be trained by a certified Vulkan LOKRING trainer. Provide proof of certification upon request.

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test piping system with nitrogen at 300 psig for at least 8 hours without loss of pressure.

B. Comply with ASHRAE Standard 147 for refrigerant system integrity testing.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 REFRIGERATION PIPING AND SPECIALTIES SECTION 23 2300-7
C. After pressure testing, evacuate all refrigerant piping to at least 28" of mercury for 24 hours without loss of vacuum. Ensure moisture does not enter the piping prior to and during the tests.

END OF SECTION 23 2300
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 REFRIGERATION PIPING AND SPECIALTIES SECTION 23 2300-8
(This Page Intentionally Left Blank)
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 DUCTWORK SECTION 23 3100-1
SECTION 23 3100 - DUCTWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Galvanized Ductwork
B. Aluminum Ductwork
C. Ductwork Reinforcement
D. Ductwork Sealants
E. Rectangular Ductwork
F. Flexible Duct
G. Underfloor Duct
H. Ductwork Penetrations

1.2 REFERENCES: Conform to all applicable requirements of the following publications:

A. ADC Flexible Duct Performance and Installation Standards, 3 rd Edition 1996.

B. ANSI/ASHRAE/IES Standard 90.1 (latest published edition) - Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings.

C. ASHRAE - Handbook 2022 Systems and Equipment; Chapter 19 - Duct Construction.

D. ASHRAE - Handbook 2021 Fundamentals; Chapter 21 - Duct Design.

E. ASHRAE 170 (latest published edition) - Ventilation of Health Care Facilities.

F. ASTM A90 - Standard Test Method for Weight (Mass) of Coating on Iron and Steel Articles with Zinc or Zinc-Alloy Coatings.

G. ASTM A167- Stainless & Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, & Strip.

H. ASTM A653 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

I. ASTM A924 - Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.

J. ASTM B209 - Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.

K. ASTM E90-02 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions.

L. ASTM E413-87 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 DUCTWORK SECTION 23 3100-2
M. AWS D9.1M/D9.1 - Sheet Metal Welding Code.

N. CDPH Standard Method V1.1-2010 - Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers Version 1.1.

O. IECC - International Energy Conservation Code (latest published edition) P. NADCA ACR 2002 - Assessment, Cleaning, and Restoration of HVAC Systems.

Q. NADCA Standard 05 1997 - Requirements for the Installation of Service Openings in HVAC Systems.

R. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.

S. NFPA 90B - Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air- Conditioning Systems.

T. NFPA 96 - Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Equipment.

U. SCAQMD Rule 1168 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule 1168 - Adhesive and Sealant Applications.

V. SMACNA - Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.

W. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards.

X. SMACNA - Phenolic Duct Construction Standard 022.

Y. SMACNA - Round Industrial Duct Construction Standards - 1999 Edition.

Z. UL 181 - Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors.

AA. UL 181A - Closure Systems for Use with Rigid Air Ducts and Air Connectors BB. UL 181B - Closure Systems for Use with Flexible Air Ducts and Air Connectors.

CC. CMC - California Mechanical Code
DD. CBC - California Building Code

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings per Section 23 0500.

B. Submit duct fabrication standards in compliance with SMACNA and these specifications.

Clearly indicate metal gauges, reinforcement, and joining methods intended for use for each pressure classification. Furnish details of all common duct fittings and joint connections to be used on this project.

C. The Architect/Engineer may require field verification of sheet metal gauges and reinforcing to verify compliance with these specifications. At the request of the Architect/Engineer, the contractor shall remove a sample of the duct for verification. The contractor shall repair as needed.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 DUCTWORK SECTION 23 3100-3
D. Duct Layout Drawings: Submit detailed duct layout drawings at 1/4" minimum scale complete with the following information:

1. Actual duct routing, ductwork fittings, actual sheet metal dimensions including insulation liner and wrap, duct hanger and support types, ductwork accessories, etc. with lengths and weights noted.

2. Differentiate ducts that are wrapped. Include insulation thickness, type of insulation, and acoustical lagging.

3. Room names and numbers, ceiling types, and ceiling heights.

4. Indicate location of all beams, bar joists, etc. along with bottom of steel elevations for each member.

5. Verify clearances and interferences with other trades prior to preparing drawings. IMEG will provide electronic copies of ventilation drawings for contractor's use if the contractor signs and returns the "Electronic File Transfer" waiver. IMEG will not consider blatant reproductions of original file copies an acceptable alternative for this submittal. Refer also to Section 23 0500.

E. Duct Leakage Test Summary Report: Upon completion of the pressure test described in Part 3, the Contractor shall submit an air duct leakage test summary report as outlined in the SMACNA HVAC Duct Leakage Test Manual.

1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Duct Sizes shown on drawings are inside clear dimensions. Maintain clear dimensions inside any lining.

B. Transitions are generally not shown in single-line ductwork. Where sizes change at a divided flow fitting, the larger size shall continue through the fitting.

C. Exterior Duct: Ductwork located outside the conditioned envelope including exposed ductwork above the roof, outside exterior walls, in attics above insulated ceilings, inside parking garages, and crawl spaces.

D. Interior Duct: Ductwork located within the conditioned envelope including return air plenums and indirectly conditioned spaces.

1.5 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Reference Coordination Drawings article in Section 23 0500 for required duct systems electronic CAD drawings to be provided to Coordinating Contractor for inclusion into composite coordination drawings.

B. Duct drawings shall be at 1/4" minimum scale complete with the following information:

1. Actual duct routing, ductwork fittings, actual sheet metal dimensions including insulation liner and wrap, duct hanger and support types, ductwork accessories, etc. with lengths and weights noted.

2. Differentiate ducts that are lined or wrapped. Include insulation thickness, type of insulation, and acoustical lagging.

3. Location and size of all duct access doors.

4. Room names and numbers, ceiling types, and ceiling heights.

5. Indicate location of all beams, bar joists, etc. along with bottom of steel elevations for each member.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 DUCTWORK SECTION 23 3100-4

6. IMEG will provide electronic file copies of ventilation drawings for contractor's use if the contractor signs and returns an "Electronic File Transfer" waiver provided by IMEG.

IMEG will not consider blatant reproductions of original file copies an acceptable alternative for coordination drawings. Architectural plans will need to be obtained from the Architect.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND SUPPORTS
A. Rectangular Duct - Single Wall:

1. General Requirements:
a. All ductwork gauges and reinforcements shall be as listed in SMACNA Duct Construction Standards Chapter 2. Where necessary to fit in confined spaces, furnish heaviest duct gauge and least space consuming reinforcement. b. Transitions shall not exceed the angles in Figure 4-7.

2. Exceptions and modifications to the 2005 HVAC Duct Construction Standards are:
a. All ducts shall be cross-broken or beaded.
b. Snap lock seams are not permitted.
c. Turning vanes shall be used in all 90° mitered elbows, unless clearly noted otherwise on the drawings. Vanes shall be as follows:
1) Type 1:
a) Description: Single wall type with 22-gauge (0.029") or heavier vanes, 3-1/4" blade spacing, and 4" to 4-1/2" radius. Vanes hemmed if recommended by runner manufacturer. Runners shall have extra-long locking tabs. C-value independently tested at below 0.26. EZ Rail II by Sheet Metal Connectors or equal.
b) Usage: Limited to 3,000 fpm and vane lengths 36" and under. 2) Type 2:
d. Rectangular branch and tee connections in ducts over 1" pressure class shall be 45° entry type per Figs. 4-5 and 4-6. Rectangular straight taps are not acceptable above 1" pressure class.
e. Bellmouth fittings shown on return duct inlets shall expand at a 60-degree total angle horizontally and vertically (space permitting) and have length of at least 25% of the smallest duct dimension.
f. Round taps off rectangular unlined ducts shall be flanged conical or bellmouth type (equal to Buckley Bellmouth or Sheet Metal Connectors E-Z Tap), or 45° rectangular with transition to round (equal to Sheet Metal Connectors Inc. High Efficiency Takeoff). Straight taps are acceptable if pressure class is 1" or less, round duct is 12" diameter or less, and the tap is not located between fans and TAB devices.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 DUCTWORK SECTION 23 3100-5
g. Duct offsets shall be constructed as shown on drawings. Additional offsets required in the field shall be formed of mitered elbows without turning vanes for offsets up to 30°° maximum angle in accordance with SMACNA offset Type 2. Offsets of greater than 30° angle shall be formed of radius elbows with centerline radius R/W=1.0 or greater. SMACNA Type 1 offsets are not permitted. h. All lined duct shall utilize dovetail joints where round or conical taps occur. The dovetail joints shall extend past the liner before being folded over. i. Cushion heads are acceptable only downstream of TAB devices in ducts up to ± 2" pressure class, and must be less than 6" in length.
j. Slide-on flanged transverse joint systems are acceptable provided they are a manufactured product that has been tested for conformance with Chapter 2 of the SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards for sheet and joint deflection at the specified pressure class.
1) Apply sealant to all inside corners. Holes at corners are not acceptable. 2) Manufacturers:
a) Ductmate Industries - 25/35/45
b) Nexus
c) Mez
d) WDCI
e) Other manufacturers must submit test data and fabrication standards and receive Architect/Engineer's approval before any fabrication begins.

B. Rectangular Duct - Double Wall:

1. Duct Construction:
a. Rectangular double wall duct shall be suitable for pressures listed in the ductwork application schedule.

C. Round Snap-Lock Seam Ductwork - Single Wall:

1. Factory sealed snap-lock pipe. Transverse and longitudinal seams shall contain factory- applied self-sealing EPDM and co-polymer gasket. Snap-lock shall conform to SMACNA RL-8. Duct and gasket material shall meet the flame/smoke spread rating of 25/50 per ASTM-E84.

2. G-60 galvanized coating meeting ASTM A653 and ASTM A90 G-90 galvanized steel aluminum meeting ASTM B209 Alloy 3003 Temper H14 304 stainless steel meeting ASTM A480 2B Finish.

3. Snap-lock seams are only permitted on systems between -1"w.c. and 2"w.c. pressure class.

4. 90°° elbows shall be smooth radius or have a minimum of five sections with mitered joints and R/D of at least 1.5.

5. Duct and fittings shall meet the required minimum gauges listed in Chapter 3 of the SMACNA requirements for the specified pressure class.

6. Divided flow fittings may be made as separate fittings or factory installed taps with sound, airtight, continuous welds at intersection of fitting body and tap.

7. Spot weld and bond all fitting seams in the pressure shell. Coat galvanizing damaged by welding with corrosion resistant paint to match galvanized duct color.

8. Manufacturers:
a. GreenSeam Industries.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 DUCTWORK SECTION 23 3100-6
D. Hangers and Supports General Requirements:

1. Hanger and support materials shall be as defined within Materials and Application Specific section below.

2. Strap Hangers: Strap hanger shall be a minimum of 1 inch, 18 gauge attached to the bottom of ducts at 8'-0" OC and as required by CMC/UMC and SMACNA guidelines.

3. Cable Hangers:
a. Aircraft cable and slip cable hangers are acceptable for ducts up to 18" diameter.

Protective sleeve tubing shall be used on the cable when supporting duct with exterior insulation. Corner saddles are required when supporting rectangular ductwork.
b. Aircraft cable with 2-point support in standard horseshoe arrangement. Protective sleeve tubing shall be used on the cable when supporting duct with exterior insulation. 8'-0" OC and as required by CMC/UMC and SMACNA guidelines.

4. Integral Corner Connector Hanger: Integral hanger and corner assembly for use with TDC/TDF style duct flanges. Die stamped offset hanger connects to the flanged corner assembly. For use with aircraft cable or 1/4" or 3/8" diameter threaded rods. Tested to hold up to 1,400 lbs.. Install per manufacturer’s ratings and instructions.

2.2 MATERIAL AND APPLICATION SPECIFIC
A. Galvanized Steel:

1. General Requirements:
a. Duct and reinforcement materials shall conform to ASTM A653 and A924. b. Interior Ductwork and reinforcements: G60 galvanized (0.60 ounces per square foot total zinc coating for two sides per ASTM A90) unless noted otherwise. c. Exterior Ductwork: G90 galvanized (0.90 ounces per square foot total zinc coating for two sides per ASTM A90) unless noted otherwise. G60 is not acceptable for exterior use.
d. Ductwork reinforcement shall be of galvanized steel.

2. Duct Hangers and Support Material:
a. Ductwork hangers and supports shall be of galvanized or painted steel. b. All fasteners shall be galvanized or cadmium plated.

B. Duct Hangers and Support Material:

1. Ductwork hangers and supports shall be of galvanized or painted steel.

2. All fasteners shall be galvanized or cadmium plated.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 DUCTWORK SECTION 23 3100-7

2.3 DUCTWORK SEALANTS
A. One-part joint sealers shall be water-based mastic systems that meet the following requirements: maximum 48-hour cure time, service temperature of -20°F to +175°F, resistant to mold, mildew and water, flame spread rating below 25 and smoke-developed rating below 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84, suitable for all SMACNA seal classes and pressure classes. Mastic used to seal flexible ductwork shall be marked UL 181B-M. Joint sealers for use on exterior weather exposed ductwork shall be rated for -30°F to +175°F and 2000-hour minimum UV resistance per ASTM G-53.

B. Two-part joint sealers shall consist of a minimum 3" wide mineral-gypsum compound impregnated fiber tape and a liquid sealant. Sealant system shall meet the following requirements: maximum 48-hour cure time, service temperature of 0°F to 200°F, resistant to mold, mildew, and water, flame spread rating below 25 and smoke developed rating below 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84, suitable for all SMACNA seal classes and pressure classes. Joint sealers for use on exterior weather exposed ductwork shall be rated for -30°F to +175°F and 2000-hour minimum UV resistance per ASTM G-53.

C. Adhesives and Sealants: All sealers, adhesives, and sealants shall comply with the low emitting material limits of the following standards:

1. CDPH Standard Method V1.1-2010 - Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions VOC from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers Version 1.1.

3. South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule SCAQMD 1113 - Wet Applied Paints and Coatings. All paints and coatings wet-applied on site must meet the applicable VOC limits of SCAQMD Rule 1113.

2.4 FLEXIBLE DUCT
A. Flexible duct shall be listed and labeled as UL 181 Class 1 Air Duct Material, and shall comply with NFPA 90A and 90B, and meet GSA, FHA and other U.S. Government agency standards.

Flexible duct shall bear the ADC Seal of Certification.

B. Flame Spread/Smoke Developed: Not over 25/50.

C. Stretch all flexible duct to prevent sags and reduce air friction. Shorten and reinstall all sagging or loose flexible duct. Avoid sharp elbows. Elbows shall maintain 1.5 diameter centerline turning radius.

D. Install per the SMACNA Flexible Duct Manual. Secure inner layer with draw band. Wrap with pressure sensitive tape for protection prior to installing draw band. Pressure sensitive tape alone is not acceptable.

E. Standard:

1. Flexible duct shall have corrosion-resistant wire helix, bonded to an inner liner that prevents air from contacting the insulation, covered with minimum 1-1/2", 3/4 lb/cf density fiberglass insulation blanket, sheathed in a vapor barrier of metalized polyester film laminated to glass mesh. Usage: All areas unless noted otherwise.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 DUCTWORK SECTION 23 3100-8

2. Usage:
a. Connections to air inlets and outlets. Do not exceed 5'-0"6'-0" in length.

F. Acoustic:

1. Flexible duct shall be acoustic rated in accordance with ASTM E477 and ADC Test Code FD 72-RI by ETL. Insertion loss values noted below are for flow velocities less than 2,500 fpm. Submittals shall include insertion losses ratings per sizes and lengths listed below regardless of sizes shown on the drawings.

2. Flexible have corrosion-resistant wire helix, bonded to a nylon fabric core inner liner that prevents air from contacting the insulation, covered with minimum 1-1/2", 3/4 lb/cf density fiberglass insulation blanket, sheathed in a vapor barrier of metalized polyester film laminated to glass mesh. Usage: All areas unless noted otherwise.

3. Inner liner shall be airtight and suitable for 6" WC static pressure through 16" diameter.

Outer jacket shall act as a vapor barrier only with permeance not over 0.1 perm per ASTM E96, Procedure A. "R" value shall not be less than 4.0 ft2*ºF*hr/Btuh.

Temperature range of at least 0-180ºF. Maximum velocity of 4,000 fpm. "R" value shall not be less than 4.0 ft2*°F*hr/Btuh. Ducts in unconditioned spaces and ventilated attics:
"R" value shall not be less than 6.0 ft2*°F*hr/Btuh.

Dia Length 63hz 125hz 250hz 500hz 1000hz 2000hz 4000hz
6" ø 6 ft 4.0 13 15 15 16 17 16
6" ø 3 ft 2.3 4.9 5.3 5.3 5.5 5.8 5.4
8" ø 6 ft 5.7 14 13 15 16 18 16
8" ø 3 ft 2.9 5.0 4.9 5.7 5.6 5.8 5.6
12" ø 6 ft 5.5 13 12 15 15 18 13
12" ø 3 ft 2.8 4.8 4.7 5.3 5.3 5.8 4.9
Dia Length 63hz 125hz 250hz 500hz 1000hz 2000hz 4000hz
6" ø 6 ft 10 15 16 17 18 17 18
6" ø 3 ft 3.8 5.4 5.5 5.7 5.9 5.8 5.9
8" ø 6 ft 10 15 16 17 16 18 18
8" ø 3 ft 2.4 5.3 5.6 5.8 5.6 5.9 6.0
12" ø 6 ft 11 14 15 16 15 16 15
12" ø 3 ft 4.4 5.1 5.3 5.5 5.4 5.6 5.3

4. Usage:
a. Take-offs from supply ducts to inlets of terminal air boxes. Do not exceed 36" in length.
b. Connections to air inlets and outlets. Do not exceed 5'-0" in length. c. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1) Flexmaster USA - Type 6
2) Thermaflex M-Ke
G. Radius Forming Elbows:

1. Flexible plastic radius forming elbow for use with flexible ducts to create 90deg elbow.

One size for 6" to 16" diameter ducts. UL listed for return plenum spaces.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 DUCTWORK SECTION 23 3100-9

2. Usage: All supply air terminals with flexible ductwork connection.

3. Installation: Attach to flex duct and secure draw bands without crushing flex duct to form smooth radius elbow. Suspend radius forming elbow to structure. Install per manufacturer's instructions.

4. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Hart & Cooley - Smartflow
b. Thermaflex - Flexflow
c. Titus - Flexright

2.5 ACOUSTICAL LAGGING
A. Type A: Lagging shall be a loaded vinyl noise barrier, fiberglass scrim facing, and 1" thick quilted fiberglass decoupling layer. Lagging shall have a minimum STC of 28, and Class A flammability (maximum 25/50) rating per ASTM E-84. Install lagging per manufacturer's recommendations.

1. Manufacturers, Type A Lagging:
a. Sound Seal B-10 Lag/QFA-3
b. McGill Air Pressure PDL-3
c. Kinetics KNM 100ALQ-1
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Provide openings in ducts for thermometers and controllers.

B. Locate ducts with space around equipment for normal operation and maintenance.

C. Do not install ducts or other equipment above electrical switchboards or panelboards. This includes a dedicated space extending 25 feet from the floor to the structural ceiling with width and depth equal to the electrical equipment. Unless intended to serve these rooms, do not install any ductwork or equipment in electrical rooms, transformer rooms, electrical closets, telephone rooms or elevator machine rooms.

D. Provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ducts to prevent dust from entering ductwork.

E. Supply ductwork shall be free of construction debris, and shall comply with Level "B" of the SMACNA Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines.

F. Repair all duct insulation and liner tears.

G. Install manual volume dampers in branch supply ducts so all outlets can be adjusted. Do not install dampers at air terminal device or in outlets, unless specifically shown.

H. Insulate terminal air box reheat coils. Seal insulation tight to form a tight vapor barrier.

I. Install flexible duct in accordance with the ADC Flexible Duct Performance and Installation Standards.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 DUCTWORK SECTION 23 3100-10
J. Install all exterior ductwork per SMACNA Fig. 6-3. Where drawings do not indicate otherwise, ductwork seams and joints shall be sealed watertight and pitched to shed water.

K. Support all duct systems in accordance with the SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards: Metal and Flexible and the SMACNA Seismic Restraint Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems, where applicable. Refer to Section 23 0550 for seismic requirements.

L. Install ducts with hangers and braces designed to withstand, without damage to equipment, seismic force required by California Building Codes.

M. Adhesives, sealants, tapes, vapor retarders, films, and other supplementary materials added to ducts, plenums, housing panels, silencers, etc. shall have flame spread/smoke developed ratings of under 25/50 per ASTM E84, NFPA 255, or UL 723.

N. All duct support shall extend directly to building structure. Do not support ductwork from pipe hangers unless coordinated with piping contractor prior to installation. Do not allow lighting or ceiling supports to be hung from ductwork or ductwork supports.

3.2 DUCTWORK APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. Refer to Ductwork Application Schedule on drawings for specific requirements for system, material, shape, pressure class, seal class and insulation application.

B. Example#2 Supply Duct from Fan to Terminal Air Boxes:

1. Shape: Round and Flat Oval Spiral Seam Ductwork - Single Wall

2. Material: Galvanized Steel

3. Pressure Class: +6"+

4. Seal Class: A

5. Insulation: 1-1/2" thick Type A (R=8)

6. Additional Requirements: None
C. Example #3 Supply Duct from Fan to Terminal Air Boxes:

1. Shape:
a. Rectangular Duct - Single Wall
b. Round and Flat Oval Spiral Seam Ductwork - Single Wall

2. Material: Galvanized Steel.

3. Pressure Class: +3"

4. Seal Class: A

5. Insulation: 1" thick Type A (R=8)

6. Additional Requirements: Provide all with slide on or formed on flanges

7. Additional Requirements: Provide all with slide-on flange system or formed-on flanges.

D. Example #11 Supply Duct from Terminal Air Boxes to Outlets:

1. Material: Galvanized Steel

2. Pressure Class: +2"

3. Seal Class: A

4. Insulation:
a. ASHRAE 90.1-2022: 1" thick Type C (R=8)
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 DUCTWORK SECTION 23 3100-11

5. Additional Requirements: None
E. Example #12 Constant Volume from Fan to Outlet:

1. Shape:
a. Rectangular Duct - Single Wall
b. Round and Flat Oval Spiral Seam Ductwork - Single Wall c. Round Snap-Lock Seam Ductwork - Single Wall

2. Material: Galvanized Steel

3. Pressure Class: +2"

4. Seal Class: A

5. Insulation:
a. ASHRAE 90.1-2022: 1" thick Type C (R=8)

6. Additional Requirements: None
F. Return Duct:

1. Shape:
a. Rectangular Duct - Single Wall

2. Material: Galvanized Steel

3. Pressure Class: -2"

4. Seal Class: A

5. Insulation:
a. ASHRAE 90.1-2022: 1-1/2"thick Type A (R-8)

6. Additional Requirements: Acoustic Liner
G. Example #15 General Exhaust Duct:

1. Shape:
a. Rectangular Duct - Single Wall
b. Round and Flat Oval Spiral Seam Ductwork - Single Wall

2. Material: Galvanized Steel

3. Pressure Class: -1"

4. Seal Class: A

5. Additional Requirements: None
H. Example #18 Relief/Exhaust Air Duct from Fan to Exhaust Outlet:

1. Shape:
a. Rectangular Duct - Single Wall
b. Round and Flat Oval Spiral Seam Ductwork - Single Wall

2. Material: Galvanized Steel

3. Pressure Class: +2"
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 DUCTWORK SECTION 23 3100-12

4. Seal Class: A

5. Insulation:
a. ASHRAE 90.1-2022: 1-1/2" thick Type A (R=8)
I. Example #22 Outside Air Intake from Louver to Heating Coil:

1. Shape:
a. Rectangular Duct - Single Wall
b. Round and Flat Oval Spiral Seam Ductwork - Single Wall

2. Material: Galvanized Steel

3. Pressure Class: -2"

4. Seal Class: A

5. Insulation: 1 1/2" thick Type B (R=8.0)
J. Example #23 Mixed/Make-up Air Duct:

1. Shape:
a. Rectangular Duct - Single Wall

2. Material: Galvanized Steel

3. Pressure Class: -2"

4. Seal Class: A

5. Insulation:
a. ASHRAE 90.1-2022: 1-1/2" thick Type A (R=4.5)
K. Example #24 Tempered Outdoor or Makeup Air Duct from Fan to Outlet:

1. Shape:
a. Rectangular Duct - Single Wall

2. Material: Galvanized Steel

3. Pressure Class: +2"

4. Seal Class: A

5. Insulation:
a. ASHRAE 90.1-2022: 1" thick Type C (R=8)
L. Example #25 Relief Air Louver to Backdraft Damper:

1. Shape:
a. Rectangular Duct - Single Wall

2. Material: Galvanized Steel

3. Pressure Class: +2"

4. Seal Class: A

5. Insulation:
a. ASHRAE 90.1-2022: 1 1/2" thick Type B (R=8.0)
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 DUCTWORK SECTION 23 3100-13
M. Example #26 Transfer Ducts:

1. Shape:
a. Rectangular Duct - Single Wall

2. Material: Galvanized Steel

3. Pressure Class: -1/2"
N. Example #30 Constant Volume from Fan to Outlet:

1. Shape: Rectangular Duct

2. Material: Phenolic Non-Fibrous Closed Cell Ductwork - Indoor

3. Pressure Class: +3"

4. Seal Class: A

5. Insulation: None
O. Example #31 Return Duct:

1. Shape: Rectangular Duct

2. Material: Phenolic Non-Fibrous Closed Cell Ductwork - Indoor

3. Pressure Class: -3"

4. Seal Class: A

5. Insulation: None

3.3 SPECIAL INSULATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Ductwork Accessories (Fabric Flex Connectors, Equipment Flanges, etc.):

1. Insulation:
a. ASHRAE 90.1-2022: 1-1/2" thick Type A (R=8)
b. IECC-2021: 1-1/2" thick Type A (R=4.5)

3.4 DUCTWORK SEALING
A. General Requirements:

1. Openings, such as rotating shafts, shall be sealed with bushings or similar.

2. Pressure sensitive tape shall not be used as the primary sealant unless it has been certified to comply with UL-181A or UL-181B by an independent testing laboratory and the tape is used in accordance with that certification.

3. All connections shall be sealed including, but not limited to, taps, other branch connections, access doors, access panels, and duct connections to equipment. Sealing that would void product listings is not required. Spiral lock seams need not be sealed.

4. Mastic-based duct sealants shall be applied to joints and seams in minimum 3 inch wide by 20 mil thick bands using brush, putty knife, trowel, or spray, unless manufacturer's data sheet specifies other application methods or requirements.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 DUCTWORK SECTION 23 3100-14
B. All ducts systems, regardless of pressure class, shall be Seal Class A as defined by Section 5-1 of SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual per the Energy Code, unless specifically noted otherwise. Seal Class A shall include sealing of all transverse joints, longitudinal seams, and duct wall penetrations with welds, gaskets, mastics, or fabric-embedded mastic system.

Joints are inclusive of, but not limited to, girth joints, branch and sub-branch intersections, duct collar tap-ins, fitting subsections, louver and air terminal connections to ducts, access door and access panel frames and jambs, duct, plenum, and casing abutments to building structures.

3.5 TESTING
A. Interior Duct - Less than 3" WG (positive or negative):

1. Leak testing of these pressure classes is not normally required for interior ductwork (inside the building envelope). However, leak tests will be required if, in the opinion of the Architect/Engineer, the leakage appears excessive. All exterior ductwork shall be tested. If duct has outside wrap, testing shall be done before it is applied.

2. Leak test shall be at the Contractor's expense and shall require capping and sealing all openings.

3. Seal ducts to bring the air leakage into compliance.

4. Contractor shall notify the Architect/Engineer five business days prior to pressurizing ductwork for testing.

B. Test Procedure:

1. Testing shall be as listed in the latest edition of the SMACNA HVAC Duct Leakage Manual, with the following additional requirements:
a. The required leakage class for Seal Class A, rectangular ducts, shall be 4; round shall be 2.
b. Test pressure shall be the specified duct pressure class. Testing at reduced pressures and converting the results mathematically is not acceptable. This is required to test the structural integrity of the duct system. c. If any leak causes discernible noise at a distance of 3 feet, that leak shall be eliminated, regardless of whether that section of duct passed the leakage test. d. All joints shall be felt by hand, and all discernible leaks shall be sealed. e. Totaling leakage from several tested sections and comparing them to the allowable leakage for the entire system is not acceptable. Each section must pass the test individually.
f. Contractor shall notify the Architect/Engineer five business days prior to pressurizing ductwork for testing. Failure to notify the Architect/Engineer of pressure testing may require the contractor to repeat the duct pressure test after proper notification.
g. Upon completion of the pressure test, the contractor shall submit an air duct leakage test summary report as outlined in the SMACNA HVAC Duct Leakage Test Manual.
h. All access doors, taps to terminal air boxes, and other accessories and penetrations must be installed prior to testing. Including terminal air boxes in the test is not required.
i. Positive pressure leakage testing is acceptable for negative pressure ductwork.

3.6 DUCTWORK PENETRATIONS
A. All duct penetrations of firewalls shall have fire or fire/smoke dampers where required by code.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 DUCTWORK SECTION 23 3100-15
B. Dampers shall be compatible with fire rating of wall assembly. Verify actual rating of any wall being penetrated with Architect/Engineer.

C. Seal all duct penetrations of walls that are not fire rated by caulking or packing with fiberglass.

Install trim strip to cover vacant space and raw construction edges of all openings in finished rooms. Install escutcheon ring at all round duct openings in finished rooms. Trim strips and rings shall be same material and finish as exposed duct.

3.7 DUCTWORK CLEANING
A. General:

1. This section applies to the cleaning of ductwork and HVAC system components.

2. The HVAC system cleaning contractor shall be a certified member of the National Air Duct Cleaners Association (NADCA) or shall maintain membership in a nationally recognized non-profit industry organization dedicated to the cleaning of HVAC systems.

3. The HVAC system cleaning contractor shall furnish all necessary equipment, materials, and labor to adequately perform the specified services.

4. The HVAC system cleaning contractor shall be capable of remediation of exposed damaged insulation in air handlers and/or ductwork requiring replacement.

5. Regulatory Requirements:
a. Contractor shall submit to the Owner SDS for all chemical products proposed to be used in the cleaning process.

B. Perform the services specified here in accordance with current NADCA standards.

C. System Component Inspections and Site Preparations:

1. Prior to beginning any cleaning work, perform a visual inspection of the HVAC system to determine appropriate methods, tools, and equipment needed. The cleanliness inspection should include air handling units, other air moving equipment, and ductwork In systems with multiple air handling units, a representative sample of the units should be inspected.

2. Coordinate any system shutdowns with the Owner a minimum of 24 hours in advance of any needed shutdowns.

3. The cleanliness inspection shall be conducted without negatively impacting the indoor environment through excessive disruption of settled dust, microbial amplification, or other debris. Follow the Owner's infection control policy where contamination is suspected and/or where even small amounts of contaminant may be of concern.

4. Damaged system components found during the inspection shall be documented and brought to the attention of the Owner and Architect/Engineer.

5. Conduct a site evaluation, and establish a specific, coordinated plan detailing how each area of the building will be protected during each phase of the project.

3.8 ACOUSTICAL LAGGING
A. Where indicated on drawings, completely wrap ductwork with lagging and seal all joints airtight with tape recommended by the lagging manufacturer to prevent acoustical leakage at joints. Overlap lagging 2" at any wall, floor, or structural deck penetration to prevent acoustical leakage.

END OF SECTION 23 3100
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 DUCTWORK SECTION 23 3100-16
(This Page Intentionally Left Blank)
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES SECTION 23 3300-1
SECTION 23 3300 - DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Manual Volume Dampers.

B. Pressure Relief Doors.

C. Backdraft Dampers.

D. Drip Pans.

E. Duct Test Holes.

F. Remote Volume Control Devices.

G. Temperature Control Dampers.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. AMCA Guide for Commissioning and Periodic Performance Testing of Fire, Smoke and Other Life Safety Related Dampers.

B. ASTM E477-20 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Acoustical and Airflow Performance of Duct Liner Materials and Prefabricated Silencers.

C. ASTM E2336-04 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Resistive Grease Duct Enclosure Systems.

D. CDPH Standard Method V1.1-2010 - Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers Version 1.1.

E. NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code
F. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives.

G. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.

H. NFPA 92 - Standard for Smoke Control Systems.

I. NFPA 105 - Standard for Smoke Door Assemblies and Other Opening Protectives.

J. SCAQMD Rule 1168 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule 1168 - Adhesive and Sealant Applications.

K. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards (latest edition).

L. UL 33 - Heat Responsive Links for Fire-Protection Service.

M. UL 555 - Fire Dampers and Ceiling Dampers.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES SECTION 23 3300-2
N. UL 555C - Ceiling Dampers.

O. UL 555S - Leakage Rated Dampers for Use in Smoke Control Systems.

P. UL 2043 - Fire Test for Heat and Visible Smoke Release for Discrete Products and Their Accessories Installed in Air-Handling Spaces.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 23 0500.

B. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.

C. Include UL ratings, California State Fire Marshal approval and NFPA 90A, dynamic ratings, leakage, pressure drop and maximum pressure data.

D. Submit certification that ductwork accessories will withstand seismic forces defined in Section 23 0550.

Include the following:

2.1 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS
A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA Duct Construction Standards, and as indicated.

B. Fabricate single blade dampers for duct sizes to 9-1/2 x 30 inches.

C. Fabricate multi-blade damper of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes 12" x 72". Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized channel frame with suitable hardware.

D. Except in round ductwork 12 inches and smaller, provide end bearings. On multiple blade dampers, provide molded synthetic
or oil-impregnated nylon or sintered bronze bearings.

E. Provide locking quadrant regulators on single and multi-blade dampers.

F. On insulated ducts, mount quadrant regulators on stand-off mounting brackets, bases, or adapters.

G. If blades are in open position and extend into the main duct, mount damper so blades are parallel to airflow.

2.2 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS
A. Gravity backdraft dampers, size 18 inches x 18 inches or smaller, furnished with air moving equipment, may be air moving equipment manufacturer's standard construction.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES SECTION 23 3300-3
B. Fabricate multi-blade, parallel action gravity balanced backdraft dampers of extruded aluminum, with blades of maximum 6 inch width, with felt or flexible vinyl sealed edges, linked together in rattle-free manner with 90°° stop, and plated steel pivot pin; adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure.

C. Models:

1. Ruskin CBD4

2. Arrow 655

3. Safe-Air/Dowco BRL

4. Greenheck EM.

2.3 FABRIC CONNECTORS
A. Fabric connectors shall be installed between all fans or fan units and metal ducts or casings to prevent transfer of fan or motor vibration.

B. The fabric connectors shall be completely flexible material which shall be in folds and not drawn tight.

C. Fabric connectors shall be of glass fabric double coated with neoprene, with UL approval. Weight = 30 oz. per square yard minimum. Fabric shall not be affected by mildew and shall be absolutely waterproof, airtight and resistant to acids, alkalis, grease and gasoline, and shall be noncombustible.

D. Fabric connections shall not exceed 6" in length on ductwork that has a positive pressure. On ductwork that has a negative pressure, the length shall not exceed 2" in length.

E. All corners shall be folded, sealed with mastic and stapled on 1" centers.

F. Fabric connectors shall not be painted.

G. Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, the fabric connect ion at the inlet to centrifugal fans shall be at
least one duct diameter from the fan to prevent inlet turbulence.

H. Materials:

1. Durodyne MFN-4-100

2. Vent Fabrics, Inc.

3. "Ventglas"

4. Proflex PFC3NGA
I. Fabric connectors exposed to sunlight and weather shall be as described above, except the coating shall be hypalon in lieu of neoprene.

J. Materials:

1. Durodyne "Duralon MFD-4-100"

2. Vent Fabrics, Inc.

3. "Ventlon"

4. Proflex PFC3HGA
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES SECTION 23 3300-4

2.4 DRIP PANS
A. Install drip pans under all rooftop exhaust fans, intake hoods, exhaust hoods and other roof penetrations that do not have ductwork below them to intercept dripping water.

B. Drip pans shall be 22 gauge minimum cross-broken or reinforced sheet metal with 2" welded upturned lips.

C. Pans shall extend 6" in all directions beyond the opening and shall have the top of the lip located 25% of the maximum throat dimension below the opening.

D. Insulate interior of drip pan with 1" thick elastomeric foam insulation. Adhere foam to drip pan with standard foam adhesive.

2.5 DUCT TEST HOLES
A. Cut or drill temporary test holes in ducts as required. Cap with neat patches, neoprene plugs, threaded plugs, or threaded or twist-on metal caps.

2.6 DUCTWORK ACCESSORY SEALANTS
A. Adhesives and Sealants: All sealers, adhesives, and sealants shall comply with the low emitting material limits of the following standards:

1. CDPH Standard Method V1.1-2010 - Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions VOC from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers Version

1.1. 2. South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule 1168 - Adhesive and Sealant Applications. All adhesives and sealants wet-applied on site shall comply with the applicable chemical content requirements of SCAQMD Rule 1168.

3. South Coast Air Quality
Management District Rule SCAQMD 1113 - Wet Applied Paints and Coatings. All paints and coatings wet-applied on site must meet the applicable VOC limits of SCAQMD Rule 1113.

2.7 CONTROL DAMPERS AND DAMPER ACTUATORS
A. Control dampers and damper actuators shall be furnished by the Temperature Control Contractor (Section 23 0900) and shall be installed by this Contractor.

B. Coordinate exact sizes, locations, and installation requirements with the Temperature Control Contractor.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General Installation Requirements:

1. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

2. Where duct access doors are located above inaccessible ceilings, provide ceiling access doors.

Coordinate location with the Architect/Engineer.

3. Coordinate and install access doors provided by others.

4. Provide access doors for all equipment requiring maintenance or adjustment above an inaccessible ceiling. Minimum size shall be 24" x 24".

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES SECTION 23 3300-5
B. Drain Pan:

1. Drain pans shall be installed per ASHRAE 62.1.
a. All drain pans shall be field tested under normal operating conditions to ensure proper drainage.
b. Field testing of drain pans is not required if units with factory installed drain pans have been certified (attested in writing) by the manufacturer for proper operation when installed as recommended.

END OF SECTION 23 3300
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES SECTION 23 3300-6
(This Page Intentionally Left Blank)
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 POWER VENTILATORS SECTION 23 3423-1
SECTION 23 3423 - POWER VENTILATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Roof Exhaust Fan.

B. Rooftop Fan Curbs.

C. In-Line Cabinet Fan.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Performance Ratings: Conform to AMCA 210 and bear AMCA Certified Rating Seal.

B. Sound Ratings: AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300.

C. Fabrication: Conform to AMCA 99.

D. Fan Energy Index (FEI): Fans shall meet or exceed the minimum FEI scheduled at the specified airflow, pressure, and air density (duty point). In no case shall the FEI at the specified duty point fall below 1.0.

1.3 REFERENCES
A. AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook.

B. AMCA 208 - Calculation of the Fan Energy Index (FEI).

C. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating Purposes.

D. AMCA 230 - AMCA 230 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Air Circulating Fans for Rating and Certification.

E. AMCA 300 - Test Code for Sound Rating Air Moving Devices.

F. AMCA 301 - Method of Publishing Sound Ratings for Air Moving Devices.

G. ANSI/AFBMA 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.

H. ANSI/AFBMA 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.

I. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards (latest edition).

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.

B. Submit electrical power/controls wiring diagrams and product data indicating general assembly, components, safety controls, and service connections.

C. Submit motor data indicating compliance with Section 23 0513.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 POWER VENTILATORS SECTION 23 3423-2
D. Manufacturer shall provide special seismic certification per HCAI CAN 2-1708a.5 with submittal. Submittals without certification will be returned and not reviewed.

1.5 EXTRA STOCK
A. Provide one (1) extra belt set for each fan unit.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ROOFTOP EXHAUST FAN - DIRECT DRIVEN
A. Fan Wheel: Centrifugal type, aluminum or composite with backward inclined or airfoil blades, statically and dynamically balanced.

B. Housing: Removable, spun aluminum dome or rectangular top, with square, one piece, aluminum base and curb cap with Venturi inlet cone.

C. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub.

D. Any steel parts shall be galvanized or epoxy coated. Non-corrosive fasteners.

E. Direct drive, motor mounted outside of airstream and ventilated with outside air.

F. Aluminum or brass bird screen. Plastic mesh will not be allowed.

G. Air-dried enamel custom color selected by Architect.

H. Dampers: Furnish normally closed, electric motorized damper. Provide step-down transformer if required. Install and wire damper to open when fan runs. Dampers shall be aluminum with brass bushings, blade seals and blade tie rods. Leakage shall not exceed 4 cfm/sq.ft @1" SP (or shall be AMCA Class 1 certified).

I. Speed Controller: For single phase shaded pole or permanent split capacity motor fans, furnish solid-state dial speed controller factory mounted inside fan unless shown otherwise on the drawings. Provide permanent marking at balanced point.

J. Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball bearings.

2.2 ROOFTOP FAN CURBS
A. Furnish and install prefabricated roof curbs for all rooftop fans.

B. Size curb to match the curb cap of fan.

C. Roof Mounting Curb: Minimum 10inches, minimum 14 gauge galvanized steel, one-piece construction, insulated, all welded, wood nailer.

D. Construction: Unitized construction, continuous arc welded corner seams. Insulated with 1-1/2" thick, 3 lb. density rigid fiberglass board. Damper support angle. Pressure treated wood nailer.

Curb without cant.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 POWER VENTILATORS SECTION 23 3423-3
E. If called for in the drawings, curbs shall be of the sound attenuation type. Sound attenuation curbs shall reduce the fan sone rating by at least 40% and not decrease fan cfm more than 8% (which is accounted for in the scheduled fan cfm). Baffles shall be removable for access to the dampers.

2.3 IN-LINE CABINET FAN
A. Fiberglass lined, sheet metal housing, arranged for in-line installation.

B. Rubber torsion motor mounts.

C. Manual Motor Starter: NEMA ICS 2; AC general-purpose Class A manually operated non- reversing full-voltage controller for fractional horsepower induction motors, with thermal overload relay, toggle operator.

D. Built-in backdraft damper.

E. Centrifugal fan.

F. Provide variable speed controller if shown on the drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Secure roof exhausters with cadmium plated lag screws to roof curb.

C. If manufacturer has no recommendations, secure roof exhaust fans to curbs with 1/4" lag bolts on 8" maximum centers.

D. MC shall install and wire factory provided damper to open when the fan runs if the manufacturer does not provide an option to pre-wire the damper.

END OF SECTION 23 3423
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 POWER VENTILATORS SECTION 23 3423-4
(This Page Intentionally Left Blank)
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 AIR INLETS AND OUTLETS SECTION 23 3700-1
SECTION 23 3700 - AIR INLETS AND OUTLETS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Grilles And Registers.

B. Roof Curbs.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Test and rate performance of air inlets and outlets per ASHRAE 70.

B. Test and rate performance of louvers per AMCA 500L-99.

C. All air handling and distribution equipment mounted outdoors shall be designed to prevent rain intrusion into the airstream when tested at design airflow and with no airflow, using the rain test apparatus described in Section 58 of UL 1995.

1.3 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASHRAE 70 - Method of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of Inlets and Outlets.

B. ANSI/ASHRAE/IES Standard 90.1 (latest published edition) - Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings.

C. SMACNA - Duct Construction Standards.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 23 0500.

B. Submit schedule of inlets and outlets indicating type, size, location, application, and noise level.

C. Review requirements of inlets and outlets as to size, finish, and type of mounting prior to submitting product data and schedules of inlets and outlets.

D. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.

1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to ANSI/NFPA 90A.

B. Conform to ASHRAE 90.1.

1.6 EXTRA STOCK
A. Provide clean filters in all filter return grilles at time of installation.

B. Provide one additional set of replacement filters for all filter return grilles. Deliver to Owner at job site.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 AIR INLETS AND OUTLETS SECTION 23 3700-2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 AIR TERMINALS - GRILLES AND REGISTERS
A. Reference to a grille means an air supply, exhaust or transfer device without a damper.

B. Reference to a register means an air supply, exhaust or transfer device with a damper.

C. The type of unit, margin, material, finish, etc., shall be as shown on the drawing schedule and suitable for the intended use.

D. All margins shall be compatible with ceiling types specified (including 'Thin-Line' T-bar lay-in grid system).

Any discrepancies in contract documents shall be brought to the attention of the Architect/Engineer, in writing, prior to Bid Date. Submission of Bid indicates ceiling and air inlet and outlet types have been coordinated.

E. The capacity and size of the unit shall be as shown on the drawings.

F. All units shall handle the indicated cfm as shown on the drawings while not exceeding an NC level of 25, referenced to 10-12 watts with a 10 dB room effect.

G. Refer to the drawings for construction material, color and finish, margin style, deflection, and sizes of grilles and registers.

H. Provide with 3/4" blade spacing. Blades shall have steel friction pivots to allow for blade adjustment, plastic pivots are not acceptable.

I. Corners of steel grilles and registers shall be welded and ground smooth before painting. Aluminum grille s and registers shall have staked corners.

J. Where specified to serve registers, provide opposed blade volume dampers operable from the face of the register.

K. Screw holes for surface fasteners shall be countersunk for a neat appearance. Provide concealed fasteners for installation in lay-in ceilings and as specified on the drawings.

L. Manufacturers:

1. Tuttle & Bailey

2. Titus

3. Price

4. Nailor

5. Krueger

2.2 AIR TERMINALS - SQUARE MODULAR CORE DIFFUSERS
A. Reference to a diffuser means an air supply device, ceiling mounted, that shall diffuse air uniformly throughout the conditioned space.

B. The type of unit, margin, material, finish, etc., shall be as shown on the drawing schedule.

C. All margins shall be compatible with ceiling types specified (including 'Thin-Line' T-bar lay-in grid system).

Any discrepancies in contract documents should be brought to the attention of the Architect/Engineer, in writing, prior to bid date. Submission of bid indicates ceiling and air inlet and outlet types have been coordinated.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 AIR INLETS AND OUTLETS SECTION 23 3700-3
D. The capacity and size of the unit shall be as shown on the drawings.

E. All units shall handle the indicated cfm as shown on the drawings while not exceeding an NC level of 25, referenced to 10-12 watts with a 10 dB room effect. .

F. Modular core diffusers shall consist of an outer frame assembly to facilitate mounting and shall include an integral square collar to allow connection to the square duct. Where shown on the drawings, the diffuser shall be supplied with a square to round adapter. Flat-oval inlets are not acceptable for connection to flexible ducts.

G. The diffuser core shall consist of fixed louver directional modules that may be field adjusted from the diffuser face without any type of tools or mechanical device for one-way or four-way horizontal discharge airflow.

H. Each louvered module shall be removable to allow access to any damper or other component in or near the diffuser neck.

I. The core's blade spacing shall be 1 inch on center.

J. Manufacturers:

1. Tuttle & Bailey

2. Titus

3. Price

4. Nailor

5. Krueger

2.3 AIR TERMINALS - DISPLACEMENT WALL DIFFUSERS
A. 18 gauge all metal construction, totally perforated front panel. Device shall be recessed in wall cavity provided by others.

B. Uniform velocity over entire face area, detachable front face. Total free area maximum of 13%. Provide with inner structure
and baffles for low displacement ventilation applications.

C. Unit casing comprises fixed flow equalization for uniform velocity over entire discharge area.

D. Provide each with a supply collar. Refer to schedule on ventilation plans for connection locations for each device. Fabric, PVC, or other nonmetal based components shall not be used.

E. Electrostatic powder coated. Color selection by Architect/Engineer.

F. Units shall be submitted with verifiable test data indicating face velocity, throw, air volume, and sound level specified supply air temperature and volume.

G. Units shall be capable of 1:1 mixing ratio 18" from the diffuser face for use with standard air delivery.

H. Refer to Displacement Ventilation Schedule for size and type device for application.

I. The displacement units and damper device shall be by one manufacturer, with catalog data to support design parameters.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 AIR INLETS AND OUTLETS SECTION 23 3700-4
J. Manufacturer:

1. Titus

2. Halton

3. Krantz

4. Price

2.4 AIR TERMINALS - DISPLACEMENT FLOOR DIFFUSERS
A. Reference to a floor diffuser means an air supply device, floor mounted, that shall diffuse air uniformly throughout the conditioned space.

B. The type of unit, material, finish, etc. shall be as shown on the drawing schedule.

C. Floor supply diffuser shall be furnished and installed where shown on the drawings.

D. The casing shall be made of galvanized steel, with the front panel epoxy-painted galvanized steel. Color selection by Architect/Engineer from RAL standard colors.

E. The construction shall cause an efficient pressure loss to provide a self-balancing system for ductless installation where space beneath the raised floor is used as a plenum chamber.

F. Air shall be supplied through the front panel of the device with a swirling low velocity action. Effective draught- free mixing with room air and natural convection shall cause supplied air to rise.

G. Manufacturers:

1. Halton TRF

2. Krantz

3. Price

2.5 AIR TERMINALS - AIR SUPPLY BASEBOARD CABINET
A. Cabinet shall be paint grip furniture grade steel with a baked enamel finish. Final color by Architect/Engineer.

All cabinets shall be one standard color.

B. Back and bottom panels of cabinet shall be 20 gauge, galvanized. Front, top and ends shall be 16 gauge steel.

C. Unit shall be constructed with concealed fasteners.

D. Unit shall contai
n grille and accessories as called for in the Schedule.

E. Cabinet size, grille size shall be as shown on the drawings.

F. Manufacturer:

1. Kees, Inc.

2. Price Model LE

2.6 ROOF CURBS
A. Furnish and install, where shown on the drawings, prefabricated roof curbs for all rooftop hood openings.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 AIR INLETS AND OUTLETS SECTION 23 3700-5
B. Roof Mounting Curb: Curb shall be sized to match curb cap of the hood. Minimum 8 inches, minimum 14 gauge galvanized steel, one-piece construction, insulated, all welded, wood nailer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General Installation Requirements:

1. Install items in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.

2. Check location of inlets and outlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform to architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement.

3. Install diffusers to ductwork with air tight connections.

4. Flexible ducts shall NOT be joined to flat-oval connections. Provide sheet metal oval-to-round transitions where required.

5. Supply grille and register blades shall be aimed in the field to provide adequate air distribution in the space. All return grilles and registers blades shall be oriented to minimize sight distance beyond installed device.

B. Volume Damper:

1. Provide manual volume dampers on duct take-off to diffusers when there are multiple connections to a common duct. Locate volume dampers as far as possible from the air inlet or outlet.

C. Maintaining Duct Cleanliness:

1. When grilles, registers, and diffusers are installed, Contractor shall prevent construction dust, dirt, and debris from entering ductwork as required by Section 23 0500.

END OF SECTION 23 3700
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 AIR INLETS AND OUTLETS SECTION 23 3700-6
(This Page Intentionally Left Blank)
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 AIR CLEANING SECTION 23 4000-1
SECTION 23 4000 - AIR CLEANING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Filters and Filter Media.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Air filters shall be State Fire Marshal approved and of a listed type. Preformed filters having combustible framing shall be tested as a complete assembly. Air filters in all occupancies shall be Class 2 or better (as shown in the State Fire Marshal listing). Air filters shall be accessible for cleaning or replacement.

1.3 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/UL 586 - Test Performance of High Efficiency Particulate, Air Filter Units.

B. ANSI/UL 867 - Standard for Electrostatic Air Cleaners.

C. ANSI/UL 900 - Test Performance of Air Filter Units.

D. ANSI/UL 2998 - Environmental Claim Validation Procedure (ECVP) for Zero Ozone Emissions from Air Cleaners.

E. ASHRAE 26 - Guideline for Field Testing of General Ventilation Devices and Systems for Removal Efficiency In-Situ by Particle Size and Resistance to Flow.

F. ASHRAE 52.2 - Method of Testing Air Cleaning Devices Used in General Ventilation for Removing Particulate Matter. Appendix J (for MERV-A rating) G. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings per Section 23 0500. Include data on media, performance, assembly and frames.

B. Submit certification that all air cleaning devices, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Section 23 0550. Include the following:

1.5 EXTRA STOCK
A. Provide a total of three (3) sets of filters for all units.

1. Provide clean filters in all units at time of installation.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 AIR CLEANING SECTION 23 4000-2

2. Provide clean filters in all units at project final completion after all interior finishes are complete.

3. Provide one additional set of replacement filters for all units. Deliver to Owner at job site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MERV 8 (MEDIUM EFFICIENCY) - DISPOSABLE - TYPE D
A. Pleated media, disposable type with welded wire grid support bonded to the filter media.

B. Heavy duty, paper board frame with diagonal support members bonded to inlet and exit sides of each pleat. Bond frame to media periphery to eliminate air bypass.

C. 2" thick media with at least 4.6 square feet of media per square foot of face area. Maximum initial resistance of 0.30" WGat 500 fpm face velocity.

2.2 MERV 13 (85% EFFICIENT) RIGID FILTER - DISPOSABLE - TYPE F A. Pleated, rigid, disposable type with high density, fine fiberglass laminated to non-woven synthetic backing. Welded wire grid media support bonded to the filter media. Galvanized steel enclosing frame bonded to media periphery to eliminate air bypass.

B. Maximum 12" thick cartridges with at least 14.5 square feet of media per square foot of face area.

C. MERV 13 per ASHRAE 52.2. Maximum 0.60" WG initial resistance at 500 fpm face velocity.

D. Manufacturers:

1. Camfil

2. American Air Filter
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install all products per manufacturers' instructions.

B. Seal filter media to prevent passage of unfiltered air around filters with felt, rubber, or neoprene gaskets.

C. Do not operate fan systems without filters.

D. Install static pressure tips upstream and downstream of filters. Mount filter gauges on outside of filter housing or filter plenum, in accessible position. Adjust and calibrate. Every filter bank, including packaged units, shall have a filter gauge.

E. Install four (4) high efficiency filter test holes, two upstream and two downstream, at all high efficiency filter banks in air handling units and ductwork (85% efficiency and higher).

Coordinate location of test holes with Owner.

END OF SECTION 23 4000
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNITS SECTION 23 6213-1
SECTION 23 6213 - AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Condensing Unit Package.

B. Refrigerant Circuit.

C. Electrical Power Connections.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASHRAE/IES Standard 90.1 (latest published edition) - Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings.

B. ANSI/UL - Safety for Heating and Cooling Equipment.

C. AHRI 210/240 - Unitary Air-Conditioning and Air-Source Heat Pump Equipment.

D. ASHRAE 23 - Methods of Testing for Rating Positive Displacement Condensing Units.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings per Section 23 0500 indicating components, assembly, dimensions, weights and loadings, required clearances, location and size of field connections, rated capacities, and electrical nameplate data. Include schematic layouts showing condensing units, cooling coils, refrigerant piping, and accessories required for complete system. Piping diagrams shall apply specifically to this job. Include description of capacity control logic and interface with building control system.

B. Submit electrical power/controls wiring diagrams and product data indicating general assembly, components, safety controls, and service connections.

C. Submit operation and maintenance data including start-up instructions, maintenance instructions, parts lists, controls, and accessories.

D. Submit certification that condensing units, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Section 23 0550. Include the following:

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions for rigging, unloading, and transporting units.

B. Protect units on site from physical damage. Protect coils.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNITS SECTION 23 6213-2

1.5 WARRANTY
A. Provide a one-year parts and labor warranty. Compressors shall have an additional four year warranty covering all material and labor costs for compressor repair or replacement at the Owner's option.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Units: Self-contained, packaged, factory assembled and wired units suitable for outdoor use consisting of cabinet, compressors, condensing coil and fans, integral sub-cooling coil, controls, liquid receiver, and screens.

B. Construction and Ratings: In accordance with AHRI 210/240 and ANSI/UL 207 and 303. Testing shall be in accordance with ASHRAE 14.

C. Performance Ratings: EER and COP meeting ANSI/ASHRAE 90.1.

2.2 CASING
A. House components in welded steel frame with galvanized steel panels with painted finish meeting ASTM B117 salt spray test standard.

B. Mount starters, disconnects, and controls in weatherproof panel with full opening access doors.

C. Provide gasketed removable access doors or panels with quick fasteners.

2.3 CONDENSER COILS
A. Aluminum fins mechanically bonded to seamless copper tubing. Provide 12°°F of refrigerant subcooling at design conditions.

B. Coil Guard: Painted expanded metal or PVC coated steel wire.

C. Provide hail guards on all condenser coils.

2.4 CONDENSER FANS AND MOTORS
A. Vertical discharge direct drive propeller type condenser fans with fan guards.

B. Weatherproof motors suitable for outdoor use, single phase permanent split capacitor or 3 phase, with permanent lubricated ball bearings and built in therma l overload protection.

C. Dynamically and statically balanced fans.

D. Separate motors for each fan.

2.5 COMPRESSORS
A. Construction: Semi-hermetic or hermetic scroll type with suction and discharge valves.

B. Mounting: Dynamically balance rotating parts and mount on vibration isolators.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNITS SECTION 23 6213-3
C. Lubrication System: Oil pump with oil charging valve, oil level sight glass, oil filter, and magnetic plug or strainer.

D. Capacity Reduction Equipment: Multiple compressors, and/or multi-speed or variable-speed compressors.

E. Motor: Suction gas cooled with electronic sensor and winding over temperature protection.

F. Crankcase Heater: Evaporates refrigerant in crankcase during shutdown.

G. Suitable for operating on voltages plus or minus 15% of nameplate ratings.

2.6 REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT
A. Refrigerant may be new or reclaimed, and shall meet ARI-700-2004 Standard for Refrigerant Purity.

B. Provide each unit with the number of refrigerant circuits needed to provide the scheduled unloading and properly transport oil.

C. Provide the following for each refrigerant circuit:

1. Replaceable core type filter dryer.

2. Liquid line sight glass and moisture indicator.

3. Thermal expansion valve.

4. Insulated suction line.

5. Suction and liquid line service valves.

6. Schraeder valve.

7. Condenser pressure relief valve.

8. Suction filter.

9. Liquid line solenoid valve.

D. For heat pump units, provide reversing valve, suction line accumulator, discharge muffler, flow control check valve, and solid-state defrost control using thermistors.

E. The use of chlorofluorocarbon (CFC)-based refrigerants is prohibited.

2.7 CONTROLS
A. On unit, mount NEMA 4 steel control panel containing power and control wiring, factory wired with single point power connection.

B. For each compressor, provide across-the-line starter, factory wired non-fused disconnects, non- recycling compressor overload, starter
relay, and control power transformer. For each condenser fan, provide across-the-line starter with starter relay.

C. Provide the following safety controls arranged so operating any one will stop unit:

1. Manual reset high discharge pressure switch for each compressor.

2. Automatic reset low suction pressure switch for each compressor.

3. Manual reset oil pressure switch.

D. Provide the following operating controls:

1. Timer(s) that prevents compressor short cycling.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNITS SECTION 23 6213-4

2. Low ambient temperature (as scheduled) thermostat to lock out compressor.

3. If discharge or return air control is provided with the unit, provide adjustable time delay between stages of operation. All units shall be compatible with direct control of staging by DDC systems. Suction pressure control of staging is not acceptable.

4. Pump down control that activates when the lead compressor of each circuit stops.

5. Hot gas bypass sized for minimum compressor loading, or "Frostat" control. If hot gas is used, the pipe with modulating flow (hot gas or suction) must pitch continuously downward in the direction of flow.

2.8 MANUFACTURERS
A. AAON
B. Trane
C. York
D. Daikin
E. Carrier
F. Units shall be of the same manufacturer as the evaporator coil.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Comb all condenser coils to repair bent fins.

C. Install on vibration isolators as scheduled on the drawings or in Section 23 0548.

D. Connect to refrigeration piping and evaporators.

3.2 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A. Provide initial start-up by factory authorized service representatives. Adjust units to provide proper superheat.

B. Supply initial charge of refrigerant and oil for each refrigerant circuit. Replace losses of refrigerant and oil during the warranty period.

END OF SECTION 23 6213
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check 2 Submission – December 09, 2024 ENERGY RECOVERY DEVICES SECTION 23 7200-1
SECTION 23 7200 - ENERGY RECOVERY DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Energy Recovery Wheels.

B. Fixed Plate Energy Exchange Element.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sound Ratings: Tested to AMCA 300.

B. Fabrication: Conform to AMCA 99 and AHRI 430.

C. Enthalpy/Heat Recovery Wheels and Fixed Plate Energy Exchange Element: Effectiveness values shall be tested in accordance with ASHRAE 84, be AHRI certified to Standard 1060, and bear the AHRI Certification symbol for AHRI Air-to-Air Energy Recovery Ventilation Equipment Certification program based on AHRI 1060.

D. Unit shall bear a UL or ETL label of approval.

1.3 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/AHRI 1060 - 2011 - Rating Air-to-Air Energy Recovery Ventilation Equipment B. ANSI/AFBMA 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.

C. ANSI/AFBMA 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.

D. ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 62.1 - 2010 - Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality E. ANSI/ASHRAE/IES Standard 90.1 (latest published edition) - Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings.

F. ASHRAE 84 - Method of Testing Air-to-Air Heat Exchangers G. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

H. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilation Systems.

I. UL 1812 - UL Standard for Safety for Ducted Heat Recovery Ventilators.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings per Section 23 0500.

B. Energy transfer performance shall be clearly documented through a certification program conducted in accordance with ASHRAE 84 and AHRI 1060 standards. Submit enthalpy wheel AHRI 1060 compliance certification with reference number.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check 2 Submission – December 09, 2024 ENERGY RECOVERY DEVICES SECTION 23 7200-2
C. Indicate ratings, performance, pressure drop, outdoor air correction factor (OACF), exhaust air transfer rate (EATR), motor electrical characteristics, gauges, material finishes, assembly, unit dimensions, weight, required clearances, construction details, and field connection details.

D. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.

E. Any exceptions to the specifications must be clearly noted. Contractor is responsible for any additional expenses that may occur due to any exception made.

F. Submit operation and maintenance data. Include instructions for lubrication, belt replacement, motor and drive replacement, and spare parts lists.

G. Submit static pressure calculations showing total pressure drops.

H. Submit electrical power/controls wiring diagrams and product data indicating general assembly, components, safety controls, and service connections.

I. Submit certification that energy recovery devices, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Section 23 0550. Include the following:

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.
a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified." b. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.

1.5 EXTRA STOCK
A. Provide one extra set of energy recovery wheel drive belts. Deliver to Owner at job site.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site in factory-fabricated protective containers, with factory-installed shipping skids and lifting lugs.

B. Store in clean dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. Handle carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures, and finish.

1.7 WARRANTY
A. Provide manufacturer's 60-month parts and labor warranty on the enthalpy wheel against defects in material and workmanship.

B. Provide manufacturer's 60-month parts and labor warranty on enthalpy wheel drive belt and bearings against defects in material and workmanship.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check 2 Submission – December 09, 2024 ENERGY RECOVERY DEVICES SECTION 23 7200-3

1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Include maintenance items as outlined in manufacturer's operating and maintenance data, including minimum of belt replacement, and controls checkout, adjustments and recalibrations.

B. Submit copy of service call work order or report and include description of work performed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ENERGY RECOVERY WHEEL
A. Enthalpy Wheel:

1. Wheel shall provide both sensible and latent heat recovery. Sensible and latent effectiveness shall meet or exceed scheduled values.

2. The media shall be constructed of lightweight polymer and shall not degrade or require additional coatings over time. The rotor media shall be continuously wound with one flat and one structured layer that is coated with a non-migrating, permanently bonded molecular sieve or silica gel desiccant, specifically developed for the selective transfer of water vapor. Wheels greater than 25" in diameter shall have multiple segments that can be individually removed. Surfaces sprayed, dip coated, or desiccants that must be reapplied over time are not acceptable. Wheels with desiccant applied after wheel formation are not acceptable.

3. Energy recovery effectiveness values shall be tested in accordance with ASHRAE 84 and be AHRI certified to Standard 1060 and bear the AHRI Certification symbol for AHRI Air-to-Air Energy Recovery Ventilation Equipment Certification program based on AHRI 1060.

4. Seal: Enthalpy wheel cassette shall be complete with face seal and perimeter seal to prevent cross leakage between the two airstreams. Both seals shall be non-wearable to minimize leakage.

5. Casing: Rotor casing shall limit the deflection of the rotor due to air pressure differential to less than 1/16 inch at design differential pressure. Framing shall be corrosion resistant.

Support rotor from bearings that can be maintained or replaced without removal of the rotor from its casing or the media from its spoke system. Wheel bearings shall be selected to provide an L-10 life more than 200,000 hours.

6. Frame: The rotor frame shall be a hub, spoke and rim system that provides the structural integrity required at design pressure differentials.

7. Drive: Rotor shall be driven from belt system and electric motor. Wheel shall be perimeter driven. Provide motor with internal overload protection.

8. Frost Control: Provide variable speed control on rotors for frost control. Provide VFD inverter with manual override speed adjustment and turn down ratio of 20:1

9. The media shall be fluted, corrugated in design to minimize the leakage of the exhaust air to the supply air through the media. The rotor media shall be coated with a non-migrating desiccant specifically developed for the selective transfer of water vapor. Silica gel and oxidized aluminum are not acceptable. All media surfaces shall be coated with desiccant prior to being formed into the fluted media structure. Surfaces sprayed, dip coated, or desiccants that must be reapplied over time are not acceptable. Impregnated desiccants in non-metallic substrates, such as plastic or glass fiber will not be acceptable. Wheels with desiccant applied after wheel formation are not acceptable. Wheels shall be treated for corrosion resistance to water moisture.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check 2 Submission – December 09, 2024 ENERGY RECOVERY DEVICES SECTION 23 7200-4

10. |Energy recovery effectiveness values shall be tested in accordance with ASHRAE 84 and be AHRI certified to Standard 1060 and bear the AHRI Certification symbol for AHRI Air-to-Air Energy Recovery Ventilation Equipment Certification program based on AHRI 1060.

11. Seal: Enthalpy wheel cassette shall be complete with face seal and perimeter seal to prevent cross leakage between the two airstreams. Both seals shall be non-wearable to minimize leakage up to specified differential pressure. Seals shall be adjustable.

12. Flame and Smoke Test and Rating: Wheel shall have a flame-spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke-developed rating of 50 or less as tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

13. Wheel flatness shall be within ±± 1/32 inch and wheel runout shall be within ±± 1/8 inch measured with wheel rotating and no air pressure applied. Cassette frame shall allow for adjustment of wheel to run true and be centered within the frame.

14. Frame: The rotor frame shall be industrial spoke system that provides the structural integrity required at design pressure differentials. Wheel construction shall allow for post-fabrication wheel alignment.

15. Shaft: Shaft shall be machined to provide a shoulder against the bearings for a positive locked position to eliminate any lateral movement of the rotor due to set screw failure or shaft wear.

16. Drive: Rotor shall be driven from belt system and electric motor. Wheel shall be perimeter driven with pulley sized properly for wheel size and rotation speed. Rotor belt shall have no field adjustments required (0% stretch after initial tension). Provide motor with internal overload protection.

B. Media Cleaning:

1. The media shall be cleanable with hot water or light detergent, , vacuum, or compressed air (less than 80 psi) without degrading the latent recovery. Dry particles up to 800 microns shall freely pass through the media. Enthalpy wheel shall be self-cleaning by two counter flow airstreams.

C. Controls:

1. Provide unit with microprocessor controls with remote control panel located as noted on the drawings. Coordinate with Temperature Control Contractor for all wiring of system.

2. Unit shall be equipped with an outdoor air temperature sensor and controller such that the energy recovery wheel can be stopped during moderate temperature periods. The controller shall perform a stop/jog function for the wheel long enough to promote the self-cleaning features of the wheel but not long enough to induce energy recovery.

3. Unit shall be equipped with a rotation sensor and controller such that should the energy recovery wheel not rotate during a signaled run period, the controller shall send a 24-volt AC signal suitable for operating a relay to be used as an alarm contact. The controller shall not initiate an alarm during a stop/jog function.

4. Unit shall be equipped with defrost controls to prevent frost from forming on the enthalpy wheel and to maintain exhaust and outside air ventilation at all times.

D. Manufacturers:

1. Airxchange

2.2 Greenheck CONTROLS
A. Unit shall be equipped with an outdoor air temperature sensor and controller such that the bypass dampers can be modulated during moderate temperature periods.

C. Refer to Specification Section 23 0900 for additional control information.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install per manufacturer's instructions.

B. Do not operate units for any purpose, temporary or permanent, until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings lubricated, and fan(s) have been test run under observation.

C. P-traps must be installed for all drain pans.

END OF SECTION 23 7200
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check 2 Submission – December 09, 2024 ENERGY RECOVERY DEVICES SECTION 23 7200-6
(This Page Intentionally Left Blank)
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS SECTION 23 8126-1
SECTION 23 8126 - SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Split system air conditioning wall units.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. ARI 210 - Unitary Air Conditioning Equipment
B. ARI 240 - Air Source Unitary Heat Pump Equipment
C. ANSI NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems.

D. ANSI/ASHRAE 62.1 - Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality.

E. ANSI/ASHRAE/IES Standard 90.1 (latest published edition) - Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings.

F. ANSI/NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).

G. ASHRAE 52 - Air Cleaning Devices Used in General Ventilation for Removing Particulate Matter.

H. ASTM B1003 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube for Linesets.

I. FS TT-C-490 - Cleaning Method and Pretreatment of Ferrous Surfaces for Organic Coatings.

J. UL - Underwriters' Laboratories.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 23 0500.

B. Indicate drain, electrical, and refrigeration rough-in connections on shop drawings or product data.

C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.

D. Submit certification that split system air conditioning equipment, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Section 23 0550. Include the following:

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.
a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device
when subjected to the seismic forces specified."
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS SECTION 23 8126-2

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Accept units and components on site in factory protective containers, with factory shipping skids and lifting lugs. Inspect for damage.

B. Comply with manufacturer's installation instruction for rigging, unloading, and transporting units.

C. Protect units from weather and construction traffic by storing in dry, roofed location until units are ready for immediate installation.

1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to ANSI/NFPA 90A for the installation of computer room air conditioning units.

B. Conform to ASHRAE 90.1 (latest published edition) - Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low- Rise Residential Buildings.

1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit operation and maintenance data.

B. Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, installation instructions, and maintenance and repair data.

1.7 WARRANTY
A. Provide five (5) year manufacturer's warranty on all compressors.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Manufacturers:

1. Trane/Mitsubishi

2. LG

3. Samsung

4. Daikin Applied
B. Manufactured Units:

1. Provide packaged, air-cooled, factory assembled, pre-wired and pre-piped unit consisting of cabinet, fans, filters, remote condensing unit, and controls. Wall-mounted units shall be furnished with integral wall mounting bracket and mounting hardware.

2. Assemble unit for wall-mounted or ceiling installation with service access required.

3. Performance shall be as scheduled on the drawings.

4. Unit shall be rated per AHRI Standards 210/240 and listed in the AHRI directory as a matched system.

5. Provide unit with factory-supplied cleanable air filters.

6. The units shall be listed
by Electrical Laboratories (ETL) in accordance with UL-1995 certification and bear the ETL label.

7. All wiring shall be in accordance with the National Electric Code (NEC).

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS SECTION 23 8126-3
C. Evaporator Cabinet and Frame:

1. Cabinet:
a. Refer to schedule on drawings for mounting type wall-mounted). b. Exposed units shall have a finished appearance with concealed refrigerant piping, condensate drain piping, and wiring connections.

D. Evaporator Fans and Motors:

1. Fans:
a. The evaporator fan shall be direct drive with a single motor having permanently lubricated bearings.
b. The fan shall be statically and dynamically balanced. c. The indoor fan shall have at least three speeds.

2. Motor:
a. Direct driven, digitally controlled with multiple speeds. Permanently lubricated with internal overload protection.

E. Evaporator Coils (Direct Expansion):

1. Direct expansion cooling coil of seamless copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins.

2. Single refrigeration circuit with externally equalized expansion valve.

3. Coils shall be pressure tested at the factory.

4. A sloped, corrosion-resistant condensate pan with drain shall be provided under the coil.

F. Electrical Panel:

1. Service Connections, Wiring, and Disconnect Requirements: Conform to the National Electrical Code and local electrical codes.

G. Control:

1. The unit shall have a hard-wired 7-day programmable remote controller to operate the system.

Provide wall mounting bracket for controller.

2. Remote controller shall have "automatic", "dry" (dehumidification), and "fan only" operating modes.

3. The remote controller shall have the following features:
a. On/Off power switch.
b. Mode Selector to operate the system in auto, cool, heat, fan, or dehumidification (dry) operati
on.
c. Fan Setting to provide multiple fan speeds.
d. Swing Louver for adjusting supply louver discharge.
e. On/Off Timer for automatically switching the unit off or on. f. Temperature Adjustment allows for the increase or decrease of the desired temperature. g. Powerful Operation to allow quick cool down or heating up in the desired space to achieve maximum desired temperature in the shortest allowable time.

4. The remote controller shall perform fault diagnostic functions that may be system related, indoor or outdoor unit related depending on the fault code.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS SECTION 23 8126-4

5. Temperature range on the remote controller shall be 64°F to 90°F in cooling mode and 50°F to 86°F in heating mode.

6. The indoor unit microprocessor shall have the capability to receive and process commands via return air temperature and indoor coil temperature sensors enabled by commands from the remote controller.

7. Integration: Manufacturer shall provide a BACnet interface with the building automation system in accordance with ASHRAE/ANSI Standard 135. This may be accomplished through a system integration panel or "gateway". Integration panels shall be provided as part of the split system.

H. Outdoor Unit:

1. General:
a. The outdoor unit shall be specifically matched to the corresponding indoor unit size.

The outdoor unit shall be completely factory assembled and pre-wired with all necessary electronic and refrigerant controls.

2. Cabinet:
a. The outdoor unit shall be fabricated of galvanized steel, bonderized and coated with a baked enamel finish for corrosion protection.

3. Fan:
a. The fan shall be direct drive, propeller type fan with fan guard. b. Fan blades shall be statically and dynamically balanced. c. The fan shall have permanently lubricated type bearings. d. Motor shall be protected by internal thermal overload protection. e. Airflow shall be horizontal discharge.

4. Coil:
a. The outdoor coil shall be nonferrous construction with corrugated fin tube. b. The coil shall be protected with an internal guard.
c. Refrigerant flow from the condenser shall be controll ed via a metering device.

5. Compressor:
a. Hermetic or scroll refrigerant compressors with resilient suspension system, inverter driven, oil strainer, sight glass/moisture indicator, internal motor protection, high pressure switch, and crankcase heater.
b. The outdoor unit shall have an accumulator and four-way reversing valve.

6. Refrigerant:
a. Unit shall use R-410a.
b. The use of chlorofluorocarbon (CFC)-based refrigerants is prohibited.

I. Condensate Pump:

2.2 PIPING
A. Design Pressure: 450 psig; Maximum Design Temperature: 250°F IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS SECTION 23 8126-5
B. Type ACR Seamless Copper Tube Linesets; Brazed Joints:

1. 3/4" and under.

2. Tubing: Type ACR seamless copper tube linesets, ASTM B1003. Sizes indicated are nominal designation.

3. Joints: Brazed with silver solder.

4. Fittings: Wrought copper solder joint, ANSI B16.22.

5. Special Requirements: All tubing shall be cleaned, dehydrated, pressurized with dry nitrogen, plugged, and tagged by manufacturer "for refrigeration service". During brazing operations, continuously purge the interior of the pipe with nitrogen to prevent oxide formation.

6. Limitations:
a. Only between refrigerant splitter box and indoor terminal unit. b. For use above ceiling only. Do not use in exposed areas.

C. Type ACR Hard Drawn Seamless Copper Tube; Brazed Joint:

1. 4" and under.

2. Tubing: Type ACR hard drawn seamless copper tube, ASTM B280. Sizes indicated are nominal designation.

3. Joints: Brazed with silver solder.

4. Fittings: Wrought copper solder joint, ANSI B16.22.

5. Special Requirements: All tubing shall be cleaned, dehydrated, pressurized with dry nitrogen, plugged and tagged by manufacturer "for refrigeration service". During brazing operations, continuously purge the interior of the pipe with nitrogen to prevent oxide formation.

D. Piping - 1-3/8" and Under; Dual Concentric Crimp Mechanical Press Connection (Contractor's Option):

1. Tubing: Type ACR hard drawn seamless copper tube, ASTM B280. Sizes indicated are nominal designation.

2. Joints: Dual concentric crimp band mechanical press connection.

3. Fittings
: Refrigerant grade copper in accordance with ASTM B75 or ASTM B743 with embedded HNBR O-ring.

4. Manufacturers:
a. Rapid Locking System (RLS)
b. Conex Banninger
c. Parker Hannifin
d. MaxiPro ACR
e. Nibco ACR Press
E. Piping - 1-3/8" and Under; Mechanically Attached, Axially Swaged Compression Connection (Contractor's Option):

1. Tubing: Type ACR hard drawn seamless copper tube, ASTM B280. Sizes indicated are nominal designation.

2. Joints: Mechanically attached connector, axially swaged compression connection.

3. Fittings: Refrigerant grade copper in accordance with ASTM B75 or ASTM B743. Brass body with two stabilization inserts in accordance with ASTM B15/B16M, two steel rings in accordance with ASTM A108-13, anerobic adhesive sealant.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS SECTION 23 8126-6

4. Manufacturers:
a. VULKAN Lokring
F. Refrigerant linesets are permitted.

1. Provide manufacturer-packaged refrigerant linesets and accessories of sizes needed for installation. Verify lengths of piping required for installation.

2.3 INSULATION
A. EPDM (NBR/PVC Blend is not permitted) elastomeric cellular foam; ANSI/ASTM C534; flexible plastic; 0.25 maximum 'K' value at 75°F, 25/50 flame spread/smoke developed rating when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 (UL 723). Minimum 1/2" thick for pipe sizes less than 1-1/4" and 3/4" thick for pipe sizes 1-1/4" and above.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that proper power supply is available.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General Installation Requirements:

1. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment.

2. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install all units level and plumb.

Indoor units shall be installed using manufacturer's standard mounting hardware securely fastened to building structure.

3. Refer to Section 23 0529 for concrete base for outdoor unit.

4. Coordinate the exact mounting location of all indoor and outdoor units with architectural and electrical work. Coordinate installation of ceiling-mounted units with ceiling grid layout.

Provide additional ceiling grid reinforcement or modification as required and coordinate the work with the GC. Locate the indoor unit where it is readily accessible for maintenance and filter changes. Where outdoor units are located on the roof, locate at least 10' from the roof edge.

5. Verify locations of wall-mounted remote controllers with drawings and room details before installation. Coordinate mounting heights to be consistent with other wall-mounted devices.

Height above finished floor shall not exceed 48".

6. Maintain minimum clearances to all equipment. Maintain manufacturer's minimum maintenance, and airflow clearances, and maintain minimum spaces about electrical equipment, whichever is greater.
a. 120V: 36" deep x 30" wide or the width of the panel whichever is wider. b. 208V: 42" deep x 30" wide or the width of the panel whichever is wider. c. 480V: 42" deep x 30" wide or the width of the panel whichever is wider.

B. Condensate Removal:

1. Install condensate piping with trap and route from drain pan to nearest drain. Discharge to nearest code-approved receptor or to a properly vented indirect waste fitting. Flush all piping before making final connections to units.

D. Install new filters in the unit at Substantial Completion.

E. A factory-authorized service agent shall assist in commissioning the unit and inspecting the installation prior to startup. Submit startup report with O&M manuals.

3.3 REFRIGERANT PIPING
A. Install refrigerant piping from the indoor unit(s) to the condensing unit. Refrigerant pipe sizes, lengths, specialties and configurations shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. Evacuate refrigerant piping and fully charge system with refrigerant per manufacturer's requirements.

B. Provide weather-tight insulated roof curb to accommodate refrigerant piping and conduit roof penetrations.

C. Insulate all refrigerant piping. Both liquid and suction lines shall be insulated between the indoor and outdoor units.

D. Joining of Piping:

1. Brazed Joints:
a. Make up joints with brazing filler metal conforming to ANSI/AWS A5.8. Cut copper tubing ends perfectly square and remove all burrs inside and outside. Thoroughly clean sockets of fittings and ends of tubing to remove all oxide, dirt, and grease just prior to brazing. Apply flux evenly, but sparingly, to all surfaces to be joined. Brazing filler metal with a flux coating may also be used. Heat joints uniformly to proper brazing temperature so braze filler metal flows to all mated surfaces. Wipe excess braze filler metal, leavi
ng a uniform fillet around cup of fitting.
b. Flux shall conform to ANSI/AWS A5.31.
c. Remove composition discs and all seals during brazing if not suitable for a minimum of 840°°For greater than the melting temperature of the brazing filler metal, whichever is greater.

2. Mechanical Press Connection:
a. Copper press fitting shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions.
b. Examination: Upon delivery to the jobsite, examine copper tubing and fittings for debris, defects, incise marks (manufacturer's engraving on tube), holes, or cracks. c. Fully insert tubing into the fitting and mark tubing. d. Prior to making connection, the fitting alignment shall be checked against the mark made on the tube to ensure the tubing is fully engaged in the fitting. e. Joint shall be pressed with a tool approved by the manufacturer. f. Installers shall be trained by manufacturer personnel or representative. Provide documentation upon request.

3. Axially Swaged Connection:
a. Brass axially swaged connectors shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions.

E. Insulation:

1. Insulate all refrigerant pipes between the heat pump and indoor units. This includes the liquid pipe, the suction pipe, the hot gas pipe, and the high/low pressure gas pipe. All fittings, valves, and specialty refrigerant components in the piping between the indoor and heat pump units shall also be insulated. The insulation shall have a continuous vapor barrier and shall pass through hangers and supports unbroken. All exterior insulated piping shall be painted with minimum of one (1) coat of UV resistant paint. Over size hangers and supports to allow the insulation to pass through unbroken. Following are the minimum insulation thicknesses unless noted otherwise in the manufacturer's literature or required by local AHJ:
a. Code/Year: ASHRAE 2019
b. Refrigerant Suction (40°F & Below):
1) Up to 1": 1/2"
2) 1" and up: 1"
c. Refrigerant Suction (41°F to 60°F):
1) Up to 1-1/2": 1/2"
2) 1-1/2" and up: 1"

2. California Title 24 - 2016:
a. Refrigerant Suction (40°F & Below):
1) Up to 1": 1"
2) 1" and up: 1-1/2"
b. Refrigerant Suction (41°F to 60°F:
1) Up to 1-1/2": 1/2"
2) 1-1/2" and up: 1"
END OF SECTION 23 8126
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW HEAT PUMPS SECTION 23 8145-1
SECTION 23 8145 - VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW HEAT PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Variable refrigerant flow split system heat pump with heat recovery (simultaneous heat/cool).

B. Refrigerant piping/tubing and insulation.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Manufacturer shall have a factory trained service contractor within 50 miles of project site.

B. Installed: Company with minimum five years documented experience performing the work of this Section.

C. Installer: Refrigerant system installer shall be certified with one of the following:

1. ASSE 6010 Medical Gas Installer Certificate

2. Commercial Refrigeration Technician Certificate

1.3 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/AHRI 210/240 - Performance Rating of Unitary Air-Conditioning & Air-Source Heat Pump Equipment.

B. ANSI/AHRI 270 - Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment.

C. ANSI/ASHRAE 62 - Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality.

D. ANSI/ASHRAE/IES Standard 90.1 (latest published edition) - Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings.

E. MIL-H-22547B - Heat Pump, Heating and Cooling (Unitary).

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 23 0500.

B. Indicate water, drain, and electrical rough-in connections on shop drawings or product data.

C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.

D. Submit manufacturer's warranty information.

E. Submit installing contractor's manufacturer training certification.

F. Submit ASSE 6010 or Commercial Refrigeration Technician Certificates for all installers.

G. Submit refrigerant charge. Charge calculation should be based on installed piping lengths and equipment capacities.

1. Submit manufacturer's detailed VRF piping layout drawings at 1/8" = 1'-0" minimum scale complete with the following information at beginning of project:
a. Actual pipe routing, fittings, hanger and support types, accessories, etc. with lengths and refrigerant charge noted.
b. Include insulation thickness and type of insulation. c. Room names and numbers, ceiling types, and ceiling heights. d. Indicate location of all beams, bar joists, etc., along with bottom of steel elevations, for each member.

2. Submit VRF piping and equipment layout drawings. Verify clearances and interferences with other trades prior to preparing drawings. IMEG will provide electronic copies of piping drawings for Contractor's use if the Contractor signs and returns an "Electronic File Transfer" waiver provided by IMEG. IMEG will not consider blatant reproductions of original file copies an acceptable alternative for this submittal. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 23 0500.

3. Following installation and prior to refrigerant charge, Contractor shall verify actual installation, pipe routing, elevation changes, and piping lengths, noting variations from the original manufacturer's design and resubmit to the manufacturer. Manufacturer shall verify layout and determine the final refrigerant charge prior to operation.

I. Submit Electrical Power and Controls Diagrams:

1. Power wiring diagrams for each component.

2. Wiring diagrams and layouts for each control panel showing all termination numbers.

3. Schematic diagrams for all control, communication, and power wiring. Provide a schematic drawing of the central system installation. Show all interface wiring to the control system.

4. Schematic diagrams for all field sensors and controllers.

5. A schematic diagram of each controlled system. The schematics shall have all control points labeled. The schematics shall graphically show the location of all control elements in the system.

6. A schematic wiring diagram for each controlled system. Each schematic shall have all elements labeled. Label all terminals.

7. All installation details and any other details required to demonstrate that the system will function properly.

8. All interface requirements with other systems.

J. Sequences: Submit a complete description of the operation of the control system, including sequences of operation. The description shall include and reference a schematic diagram of the controlled system. The wording of the control sequences in the submittal shall match verbatim that included in the construction documents to ensure there are no sequence deviations from that intended by the Architect/Engineer. Clearly highlight any deviations from the specified sequences on the submittals.

K. Control System Demonstration and Acceptance: Provide a description of the proposed process, along with all reports and checklists to be used.

L. Clearly identify work by others in the submittal.

M. Quantities of items submitted may be reviewed but are the responsibility of the Contractor to verify.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW HEAT PUMPS SECTION 23 8145-3
N. Manufacturer™™s Startup Report: Submit manufacturer™™s startup report documenting equipment startup. StartUp report shall include Contractor™™s field test reports.

1.5 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Protect finished cabinets from physical damage by leaving factory packing cases in place before installation and providing temporary covers after installation.

1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit operation and maintenance data.

B. Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, installation instructions, and maintenance and repair data.

1.7 WARRANTY
A. Installing contractor shall perform tasks required by manufacturer to ensure maximum available warranty is achieved. This will include but is not limited to:

1. System design performed by manufacturer certified designer.

2. System installation performed by manufacturer certified installer.

3. Complete system commissioning paperwork and submit to manufacturer.

B. Provide one (1) year manufacturer's warranty on all parts and labor (excluding compressors).

C. Provide minimum five (5) year manufacturer's parts warranty (one-year basic warranty plus four-year extended warranty) on all parts (excluding compressors) and one (1) year labor warranty.

D. Provide minimum five (5) year manufacturer's compressor parts warranty.

E. Contractor shall provide one (1) year parts and labor warranty on the associated controls system, including all devices, wiring, and programming.

1.8 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage manufacturer or factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain individual units and complete system.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Trane/Mitsubishi
B. Daikin AC
C. Panasonic/Sanyo
D. LG
E. Carrier/Toshiba
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW HEAT PUMPS SECTION 23 8145-4
F. Samsung
G. York/Hitachi

2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. The variable capacity, heat recovery, heat pump air conditioning system shall be a variable refrigerant flow split system. The system shall consist of multiple evaporators using PID control and inverter driven heat pump unit. The unit shall consist of direct expansion (DX), air- source heat pump air conditioning system, and variable speed driven compressor multi zone split system.

B. Air-Source Heat Pump Unit - General: The heat pump unit is designed specifically for use with the manufacturer's components:

1. Refrigerant: R410A.

2. The air-source heat pump unit shall be factory assembled and pre-wired with all necessary electronic and refrigerant control. The refrigeration circuit of the heat pump unit shall consist of a compressor, motors, fans, condenser coil, electronic expansion valves, oil separators, service ports, liquid receivers, and accumulators.

3. All refrigerant lines shall be individually insulated between the heat pump and indoor units.

4. The connection ratio of the nominal capacity of indoor units to heat pump unit shall be 50-130%.

5. The sound pressure shall be no greater than 63 dBA at 4 feet from the heat pump unit at full load at fan height.

6. The system shall automatically restart operation after a power failure and shall not cause any settings to be lost, thus eliminating the need for re-programming.

7. The following safety devices shall be included on the heat pump unit: high pressure switch, control circuit fuses, crankcase heaters, fusible plug, high pressure switch, overload relay, inverter overload protector, thermal protectors for compressor and fan motors, over current protection for the inverter and anti-recycling timers. To ensure the liquid refrigerant does not flash when supplying to the various indoor units, the circuit shall be provided with a sub-cooling feature. Oil recovery cycle shall be automatic as required to maintain oil levels at the heat pump unit.

8. The heat pump unit shall be able to operate in heating mode to -4°F -13°F dry bulb ambient temperature without additional ambient controls. a. Heating capacity at design condition of -5°F, shall be no less than 50% of the value scheduled on the drawings.

9. The heat pump unit shall have air cooled heat exchange coils constructed from copper tubing with aluminum fins. The coils shall be capable of being divided into sections to enable the heat pump unit to match the capacity required by the indoor units and to allow individual defrosting to take place as required.

10. The heat pump unit shall have at least one inverter controlled compressor, depending on scheduled capacity. The system shall use a control sequence to ensure that indoor loads are matched to the compressor capacity control.

11. The refrigeration process of the heat pump unit will be maintained by pressure and temperature sensors controlling solenoid valves, check valves, and bypass valves. The heating or cooling mode of the heat pump unit will be controlled using a combination of 2 and 3-way valves that shall reverse the cycle of the refrigerant to change the mode of the heat pump unit.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW HEAT PUMPS SECTION 23 8145-5

12. Unit Cabinet: The heat pump unit model shall be completely weatherproof and corrosion resistant. The heat pump unit shall be constructed from steel plate and treated with an anti-corrosive paint. Provide hail guards on all condenser coils and fans.

13. Fan:
a. The heat pump unit shall consist of propeller type, direct-drive fan motors that have multiple speed operation via a DC inverter.
b. The fans shall be a vertical discharge. The fan motors shall have inherent protection and permanently lubricated bearings.
c. The fans shall be provided with fan guards.

14. Condenser Coil: The condenser coil shall be manufactured from copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins to form a mechanical bond.

15. Compressor:
a. The variable speed compressor shall be capable of changing the speed to follow the variations in total cooling load as determined by the suction gas pressure as measured in the heat pump unit.
b. The inverter driven compressor in each heat pump unit shall be DC, hermetically sealed, scroll type.
c. The capacity control range shall be a minimum of 20% to 100% of total capacity. d. Each compressor shall be equipped with a crankcase heater, high pressure safety switch, and internal thermal overload protector.
e. Oil separators shall be standard with the equipment, together with an oil balancing circuit.
f. The compressor shall be mounted to avoid the transmission of vibration.

16. Bypass Filter Assembly: Provide bypass cartridge filter at outdoor unit. The purpose is to provide refrigerant contaminate filtration for the first 24 hours of operation. Normal operation will bypass filter to outdoor unit.
a. Replaceable Cartridge Angle Type: ANSI/AHRI 710, UL listed, brass or epoxy- coated steel shell, molded desiccant high-water capacity filter core(s); maximum working pressure of 500 psi; maximum temperature of 275°F; maximum pressure drop of 3 psi with R410a at system flow rate.

C. Refrigerant Splitter Box:

1. Refrigerant splitter box is a generic term for the following manufacturer specific labels: , Heat Recovery Unit.

2. The unit shall be constructed from galvanized steel plate and be internally insulated with polyurethane foam. The connection to the system shall be either via brazed connection or flare nuts.

3. The unit shall be connected to the indoor units or group of indoor units via its own dedicated connection. This connection shall supply power and control signals to the solenoid valves in the unit.

4. The unit shall have integral controls and be factory assembled, wired, and piped.

5. The unit shall include an integral drain pan and condensate pump as required.

6. The unit electrical power shall be 208-230V/3-phase/60Hz or as noted on the drawings.

7. Provide unit with at least two (2) additional unused connections for future expansion and maintenance. Provide isolation valves and caps on unused connections.

1. System shall be equipped with an oil recovery system to ensure stable operation with long refrigerant piping.

2. System shall be designed for proper oil return to compressor, along with distribution of oil to individual compressor.

E. Indoor Units:

1. General ““ Each indoor unit shall have a heat exchanger that shall be constructed from copper tubing with aluminum fins. The flow of refrigerant through the heat exchanger shall be controlled by an electronic modulating expansion valve. This valve shall be controlled by internal temperature sensors and shall be capable of controlling the variable capacity of the indoor unit between at least 25% and 100%. The units shall be shipped from the factory fully charged with dehydrated air.

2. The indoor units shall be designed for installation within a conditioned space to be connected to an air-source heat pump air conditioning system.

3. Wall Mounted:
a. Acoustic Performance: The indoor units' sound pressure shall not exceed 35 dBA at low speed measured at 3.3 feet from the units.
b. Construction:
1) The indoor units shall be completely factory assembled and tested. Included in each unit is factory wiring, piping, electronic modulating expansion valve, control circuit board, fan motor thermal protector, flare connections, condensate drain pan, self-diagnostics, auto-restart function, 3-minute fused time delay, and test run switch. Each unit shall have at least one auto-swing louver for efficient air distribution, which closes automatically when the unit stops. The remote controller shall be able to set five (5) steps of discharge louver angle. The front grille shall be easily removed for washing.

The discharge angle shall automatically set at the same angle as the previous operation upon restart. The condensate drain pipe shall be able to be connected to either left or right sides.
c. The indoor units shall be equipped with a return air thermistor. d. The indoor unit shall be separately powered.
e. Unit Cabinet:
1) The cabinet shall be affixed to a factory supplied wall mounting template and located in the conditioned space.
2) The cabinet shall be constructed of molded plastic cover with sound absorbing foamed polystyrene and polyethylene insulation. f. Fan:
1) The fan shall be a direct-drive cross-flow type, statically and dynamically balanced with high and low fan speeds available.
2) The fan motor shall be thermally protected.
g. Filter: The return air shall be filtered by means of a washable long-life filter with mildew proof resin.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW HEAT PUMPS SECTION 23 8145-7
h. Coils:
1) Coils shall be of the direct expansion type, constructed from copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins to form a mechanical bond.
2) The refrigerant connections shall be flare connections and the condensate shall be coordinated with piping material specified in Section 23 2100. 3) A condensate pump with at least 18 inches lift shall be located below the coil in the condensate pan, with a built-in high-level safety alarm to shut down the unit.
4) A thermistor shall be located on the liquid and gas line. 5) Four-way Ceiling-Recessed Cassette:
i. The indoor unit shall be a ceiling cassette for installation into the ceiling cavity, equipped with an air panel grille as scheduled and specified in this section. The indoor unit shall have four-way air distribution and an ivory white, impact resistant, washable decoration panel. The supply air shall be distributed via motorized louvers that can be horizontally and vertically adjusted from 0° to 90° angle.
j. Acoustic Performance: The indoor units' sound pressure shall not exceed 33 dBA at low speed measured at 5 feet from the unit.
k. Construction:
1) The indoor unit shall be completely factory assembled and tested. The unit shall include factory wiring, piping, electronic modulating expansion valve, control circuit board, fan motor thermal protector, flare connections, condensate drain pan, condensate drain pump, self-diagnostics, auto-restart function, 3-minute fused time delay, and test run switch. 2) The 4-way supply airflow shall be field modifiable to 3-way and 2-way airflow to accommodate various installation configurations, including corner installations.
3) Return air shall be through the concentric panel, which shall include a filter. 4) The indoor units shall be equipped with a return air thermistor. 5) The indoor unit shall be separately powered.
l. Unit Cabinet:
1) The cabinet shall be space saving and shall be recessed into the ceiling. 2) Provide fresh air intake kit where used and indicated on the drawings. A branch duct knockout shall exist for branch ducting supply air. 3) The cabinet shall be constructed with sound absorbing foamed polystyrene and polyethylene insulation.
m. Fan:
1) The fan shall be direct-drive type, with statically and dynamically balanced impeller with high and low fan speeds available.
2) The fan motor shall be thermally protected.
n. Filter: The return air shall be filtered by a washable long-life filter with mildew proof resin.
o. Coil:
1) Coils shall be of the direct expansion type, constructed from copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins to form a mechanical bond.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW HEAT PUMPS SECTION 23 8145-8
2) The refrigerant connections shall be flare connections and the condensate shall be coordinated with piping material specified in Section 23 2100. 3) A condensate pump with at least 18 inches lift shall be located below the coil in the condensate pan, with a built-in high-level safety alarm to shut down the unit.
4) A thermistor shall be located on the liquid and gas line.

4. Round 360° Ceiling-Recessed Cassette:
a. Coil:
1) A condensate pump with at least 18 inches lift shall be located below the coil in the condensate pan, with a built-in high-level safety alarm to shut down the unit.
2) A thermistor shall be located on the liquid and gas line.

5. One-way Ceiling-Recessed Cassette:
a. The indoor unit shall be a ceiling cassette indoor unit for installation into the ceiling cavity, equipped with an air panel grille as scheduled. The indoor unit shall have a one-way air distribution type, ivory white, impact resistant, washable decoration panel. The supply air shall be distributed via motorized louvers that can be horizontally and vertically adjusted from 0° to 90° angle. b. Acoustic Performance: The indoor units' sound pressure shall not exceed 33 dBA at low speed measured at 5 feet from the unit.
c. Construction:
1) The indoor unit shall be completely factory assembled and tested. The unit shall include factory wiring, piping, electronic modulating expansion valve, control circuit board, fan motor thermal protector, flare connections, condensate drain pan, condensate drain pump, self-diagnostics, auto-restart function, 3-minute fused time delay, and test run switch. 2) Return air shall be through the concentric panel, which shall include a filter. 3) The indoor units shall be equipped with a return air thermistor. 4) The indoor unit shall be separately powered.
d. Unit Cabinet:
1) The cabinet shall be space saving and shall be located into the ceiling. 2) Provide fresh air intake kit where used and indicated on the drawings. A branch duct knockout shall exist for branch ducting supply air. 3) The cabinet shall be constructed with sound absorbing foamed polystyrene and polyethylene insulation.
e. Fan:
1) The fan shall be direct-drive type, with statically and dynamically balanced impeller with high and low fan speeds available.
2) The fan motor shall be thermally protected.
f. Filter: The return air shall be filtered by means of a washable long-life filter with mildew proof resin.

6. Floor Standing Exposed:
a. The indoor unit shall be a floor standing exposed indoor unit. The unit shall be constructed of galvanized steel with painted finish as scheduled. The indoor unit shall be manufactured for a vertical discharge air with bottom front return air configuration.
b. Acoustic Performance: The indoor units' sound pressure shall not exceed 31 dBA at low speed 5 feet from the unit.
c. Construction:
1) The indoor unit shall be completely factory assembled and tested. The unit shall include factory wiring, piping, electronic modulating expansion valve, control circuit board, fan motor thermal protector, flare connections, condensate drain pan, self-diagnostics, auto-restart function, 3-minute fused time delay, and test run switch. The unit shall have a booster cable for adjustable static pressure capability.
2) The indoor units shall be equipped with a return air thermistor. 3) The indoor unit shall be separately powered.
4) The switch box shall be reached from the side or bottom for ease of service and maintenance.
d. Unit Cabinet:
1) The cabinet shall be located against the wall, with top mounted supply and bottom return.
2) The cabinet shall be constructed with sound absorbing foamed polystyrene and polyethylene insulation.
e. Fan:
1) The fan shall be direct-drive type, with statically and dynamically balanced impeller with high and low fan speeds.
2) The fan motor shall be thermally protected.
f. Filter: The return air shall be filtered by means of a washable long-life filter with mildew proof resin.
g. Coils:
1) Coils shall be of the direct expansion type, constructed from copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins to form a mechanical bond.
2) The refrigerant connections shall be flare connections, and the condensate shall be coordinated with piping material specified in Section 23 2100. 3) A condensate pump with at least 20 inches of lift shall be located below the coil in the condensate pan, with a built-in high-level safety alarm to shut down the unit.
4) A thermistor shall be located on the liquid and gas line.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW HEAT PUMPS SECTION 23 8145-10

7. Vertical Air Handling Unit:
a. The indoor unit shall be a floor standing vertical air handling unit with ducted discharge.
b. Acoustic Performance: Sound pressure shall range from not exceed 41 dBA at low speed measured 3.3 feet from the unit.
c. Construction:
1) Indoor unit shall be completely factory assembled and tested. The unit shall include factory wiring, piping, electronic modulating expansion valve, control circuit board, fan motor thermal protector, flare connections, condensate drain pan, condensate drain pump, self-diagnostics, auto-restart function.
2) The indoor units shall be equipped with a return air thermistor. 3) The indoor unit shall be separately powered.
d. Unit Cabinet:
1) Unit cabinet shall be constructed of galvanized steel with painted finish. 2) Cabinet shall be single wall construction with sound absorbing foamed polystyrene and polyethylene insulation.
3) Cabinet shall be factory insulated for use in unconditioned indoor spaces. e. Fan:
1) Fan shall be direct-drive, forward curved fan, statically and dynamically balanced impeller with high, medium and low fan speeds. 2) Fan shall have static pressure up to 0.5" W.C.
3) Fan motor shall be thermally protected.
f. Filter: The return air shall be filtered by means of a washable long-life filter with mildew proof resin.
g. Coils:
1) Coils shall be of the direct expansion type, constructed from copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins to form a mechanical bond.
2) The refrigerant connections shall be flare connections, and the condensate shall be coordinated with piping material specified in Section 23 2100.

2.3 PIPING
A. Design Pressure: 450 psig.

1. Maximum Design Temperature: 250°F.

B. Type ACR Seamless Copper Tube Linesets; Brazed Joints:

1. 1" and under.

2. Tubing: Type ACR seamless copper tube linesets, ASTM B1003. Sizes indicated are nominal designation.

3. Joints: Brazed with silver solder.

4. Fittings: Wrought copper solder joint, ANSI B16.22.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW HEAT PUMPS SECTION 23 8145-11

6. Limitations:
a. Only sizes 1" and under.
b. For use above ceiling only. Do not use in exposed areas.

C. Type ACR Hard Drawn Seamless Copper Tube; Brazed Joint:

1. 4" and under.

2. Tubing: Type ACR hard drawn seamless copper tube, ASTM B280. Sizes indicated are nominal designation.

3. Joints: Brazed with silver solder.

4. Fittings: Wrought copper solder joint, ANSI B16.22.

D. Type ACR Hard Drawn Seamless Copper Tube; Dual Concentric Crimp Mechanical Press Connection:

1. 1-3/8" and under (Contractor's option).

2. Tubing: Type ACR hard drawn seamless copper tube, ASTM B280. Sizes indicated are nominal designation.

3. Joints: Dual concentric crimp band mechanical press connection.

4. Fittings: Refrigerant Grade Copper in accordance with ASTM B75 or ASTM B743 with embedded HNBR O-ring.

5. Manufacturers:
a. Rapid Locking System (RLS)
b. Conex Banninger
c. Parker Hannifin
d. MaxiPro ACR
e. Nibco ACR Press
E. Type ACR Hard Drawn Seamless Copper Tube; Mechanically Attached, Axially Swaged Compression Connection:

1. 1-3/8" and under (Contractor's option).

2. Tubing: Type ACR hard drawn seamless copper tube, ASTM B280. Sizes indicated are nominal designation.

3. Joints: Mechanically attached connector, axially swaged compression connection.

4. Fittings: Refrigerant Grade Copper in accordance with ASTM B75 or ASTM B743.

Brass body with two stabilization inserts in accordance with ASTM B15/B16M, two steel rings in accordance with ASTM A108-13, anerobic adhesive sealant.

5. Manufacturers:
a. VULKAN Lokring
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW HEAT PUMPS SECTION 23 8145-12 F. Insulation:

1. EPDM (NBR/PVC Blend is not permitted) elastomeric cellular foam; ANSI/ASTM C534; flexible plastic; 0.25 maximum 'K' value at 75°F, 25/50 flame spread/smoke developed rating when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 (UL 723). If thickness required in Part 4 - Execution does not meet 25/50 flame spread/smoke developed rating, use multiple layers of a thickness that does meet 25/50 flame spread/smoke developed.

2.4 CONTROLS GENERAL
A. The unit shall have controls provided with the unit by the manufacturer to perform input functions necessary to operate the system.

B. Computerized PID control shall be used to maintain room temperature within 1°F of setpoint.

C. The unit shall be equipped with a programmable drying cycle that dehumidifies while inhibiting changes in room temperature.

D. The indoor circuit board shall be wired to enable auxiliary heating when at least one of the following occurs:

1. Coil thermistor temperature drops below a factory setpoint in heating mode.

2. Heat pump temperature drops below setpoint (adj.).

3. Based on a user adjustable schedule.

2.5 SIMPLE REMOTE CONTROL - TYPE A
A. The wired remote controller shall be able to control one (1) group (maximum of 16 units) and shall be able to function as follows:

1. The controller shall have a self-diagnosis function that constantly monitors the system for malfunctions.

2. The controller shall be able to immediately display fault location and condition.

3. An LCD digital display shall allow the temperature to be set in 1°F units.

4. The controller shall be equipped with a thermostat sensor in the remote controller, making possible more comfortable room temperature control.

B. The wired remote controller shall have the following features:

1. Operation: Start/Stop, Temperature Setting, Fan Speed.

2. Monitoring: Status, malfunction flashing, malfunction content, filter sign, operation mode, temperature setting, permit/prohibit selection, fan speed, airflow direction.

3. Control Management: Field Setting Mode, Group Setting, Auto Restart.

4. The controller shall also be able to switch an external dry contact via a 12-volt DC relay (field supplied).

2.6 DELUXE REMOTE CONTROL - TYPE B
A. The wired remote controller shall be able to control one (1) group (maximum of 16 indoor units) and shall be able to function as follows:

1. The controller shall have a self-diagnosis function that constantly monitors the system for malfunctions.

2. The controller shall be able to immediately display fault location and condition.

3. An LCD digital display shall allow the temperature to be set in 1°F units.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW HEAT PUMPS SECTION 23 8145-13

4. The controller shall be equipped with a thermostat sensor in the remote controller, making possible more comfortable room temperature control.

B. The wired remote controller shall have the following features:

1. Operation: Start/Stop, Operation Mode, Temperature Setting, 60°F - 90°F, Setpoint Range, Fan Speed, Airflow Direction.

2. Monitoring: Status, malfunction flashing, malfunction content, filter sign, operation mode, temperature setting, permit/prohibit selection, fan speed, airflow direction.

3. Scheduling: ON/OFF Timer.

4. Control Management: Field Setting Mode, Group Setting, Auto Restart.

5. The controller shall also be able to switch an external dry contact via a 12-volt DC relay (field supplied).

2.7 SYSTEM CONTROLLER - TYPE C
A. The controller shall control at least 50 units and shall be able to be used in conjunction with all room controller types. Collective and individual group commands are available with permit/prohibit individual remote controller function. At least five system controllers shall be able to reside on any one communication bus.

2.8 CENTRAL CONTROLLER - TYPE D
A. This controller shall be wall mounted and hard wired, either directly to the control system or via gateway. It shall be manufactured in ABS plastic with an LCD display and shall be the manufacturer's standard color. The controller shall be capable of individually controlling the following functions on at least 128 indoor units:

1. On/off

2. Operating mode

3. Setpoint

4. Fan speed

5. Louver position

6. Timer settings

7. Test run
B. The controller shall also be capable of displaying the following information individually for at least 128 indoor units:

1. On/off

2. Operating mode

3. Setpoint

4. Fan speed

5. Louver position

6. Timer settings

7. Test run

8. Fault diagnosis
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW HEAT PUMPS SECTION 23 8145-14 C. Each central controller unit can be accessed either locally or remotely via standard internet software. The central controller will be able to indicate system alarms via volt free contacts, as well as providing control points for other devices. Additionally, the central controller shall be able to monitor individual usage of heating and cooling demands, report alarm and conditions to nominated email address, and enable remote alteration of systems setpoints to registered users. All required software costs and licensing fees shall be included for the life of the systems.

2.9 MAINTENANCE ACCESS
A. Provide all gateways and connection cabling for performing maintenance functions on system.

B. Provide all software and registration codes as required to allow access into advanced maintenance functions.

2.10 SEQUENCE
A. Install a remote mounted temperature sensor.

B. The thermostat shall stage heating or cooling as required to maintain space setpoint at 72°F (adj.).

C. Thermostat shall automatically change the indoor unit mode based on the space setpoint.

D. If space setpoint continues to drop once indoor unit has been changed to heating mode, the thermostat shall enable the space electric baseboard heat.

E. Control system shall have capability to control electric baseboard heat.

F. Central controller shall enable dedicated heat pump unit based on an adjustable occupancy schedule. Coordinate enable/disable function with AHU manufacturer.

2.11 SYSTEM INTEGRATION
A. Integration: Manufacturer shall provide a BACnet interface with the building automation system in accordance with ASHRAE/ANSI Standard 135. This may be accomplished through a system integration panel or "gateway". Integration panels shall be provided as part of the VRF system.

2.12 EXPANSION COMPENSATION
A. Assembly consisting of two flexible connectors, two copper flexible connectors, two 90° elbows, and a 180° return pipe. Unit shall be in the form of a pipe loop.

B. Connectors shall have corrugated copper hose bodies with copper braided casings.

C. Connectors shall be rated for 150 psi working pressure at 70°F.

D. Sizes 2" and smaller shall have copper sweat ends.

E. Connectors shall be suitable for 1/2" permanent misalignment.

F. Install in every straight run of hard drawn seamless copper tube; 30 feet long or longer.

Expansion compensation is not required for flexible line sets.

1. Metraflex Type MLS
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment.

B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install all piping, fittings, and insulation to meet manufacturer's requirements. Install units level and plumb. Evaporator fan components shall be installed using manufacturer's standard mounting devices securely fastened to building structure. Install and connect refrigerant tubing and fittings.

C. Installing contractor shall attend manufacturer sponsored training to obtain installation certification. Submit training certificates as noted in Part 1.

D. Installer shall supply isolation ball valves for zoned refrigerant isolation. Installer shall supply isolation ball valves with Schrader connection for isolating refrigerant charge and evacuation at each connected indoor unit and heat pump unit. Isolation ball valves, with Schrader connection, are required for instances of indoor unit isolation for troubleshooting, repair, or replacement without affecting the remainder of the system. Isolation ball valves with Schrader connection are also required at heat pump unit connection to isolate unit for troubleshooting, repair, or replacement and as required to provide partial capacity heating/cooling in the instance of a failure of one of the multiple heat pump unit compressors.

E. Insulate all refrigerant pipes between the heat pump and indoor units. This includes the liquid pipe, the suction pipe, the hot gas pipe, and the high/low pressure gas pipe. All fittings, valves, and specialty refrigerant components in the piping between the indoor and heat pump units shall also be insulated. The insulation shall have a continuous vapor barrier and shall pass through hangers and supports unbroken. All exterior insulated piping shall be painted with minimum of one (1) coat of UV resistant paint. Over size hangers and supports to allow the insulation to pass through unbroken. Following are the minimum insulation thicknesses unless noted otherwise in the manufacturer's literature or required by local AHJ:

1. ASHRAE 2016:

2. IECC 2018:
a. Refrigerant Suction (40°F & Below):
1) Up to 1": 1/2"
2) 1" and up: 1"
b. Refrigerant Suction (41°F to 60°F):
1) Up to 1-1/2": 1/2"
2) 1-1/2" and up: 1"
c. Refrigerant Low Pressure Gas (141°F-200°F):
1) Up to 1-1/2": 1-1/2"
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW HEAT PUMPS SECTION 23 8145-16 2) 1-1/2" and up: 2"
d. Refrigerant High Pressure Gas (201°F-250°F):
1) Up to 4": 2-1/2"
e. Refrigerant Liquid:
1) Up to 1-1/2": 1"
2) 1-1/2" and up: 1-1/2"

3. California Tittle 24 - 2016:
a. Refrigerant Suction (40°F & Below):
1) Up to 1": 1"
2) 1" and up: 1-1/2"
b. Refrigerant Suction (41°F to 60°F):
1) Up to 1-1/2": 1/2"
2) 1-1/2" and up: 1"
c. Refrigerant Low Pressure Gas (141°F-200°F):
1) Up to 1-1/2": 1-1/2"
2) 1-1/2" and up: 2"
d. Refrigerant High Pressure Gas (201°F-250°F):
1) Up to 4": 2-1/2"
e. Refrigerant Liquid:
1) Up to 1": 1"
2) 1" and up: 1-1/2"
F. Engage manufacturer or factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

Manufacturer shall provide on-site startup and commissioning assistance through job completion. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

G. Fully charge system with refrigerant based on volume per manufacturer's requirements using actual field dimensions (not original design submittal). Installing Contractor must coordinate final pipe sizes and lengths, and equipment location, with manufacturer to determine exact fill volume.

H. Field Quality Control:

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in field testing.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW HEAT PUMPS SECTION 23 8145-17

2. Perform the following field tests and inspections, and prepare test reports:
a. Positive Pressure Leak Test: After installation, test for leaks by charging the system per manufacturer’s airtight positive test criteria for a minimum of 24 hours. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
b. Negative Pressure Leak Test: After positive pressure leak test, evacuate the system with a vacuum pump per manufacturer’s vacuum drying test criteria. The system shall maintain vacuum without pump operation or gauge movement for a minimum of 1 hour. If the gauge rises, the system may contain moisture or have leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. Manufacturer shall be present to witness the negative pressure test.
c. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.
d. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
e. Provide field test reports to manufacturer to include with manufacturer’s startup report.

I. Coordinate installation of units with architectural and electrical work. Coordinate installation of ceiling recessed units with ceiling grid layout. Additional ceiling grid reinforcement or modification is the responsibility of the Mechanical Contractor and shall be coordinated with the General Contractor.

J. Verify locations of wall-mounted devices (such as thermostats, temperature and humidity sensors, and other exposed sensors) with drawings and room details before installation.

Coordinate mounting heights to be consistent with other wall-mounted devices. Height above finished floor shall not exceed 48".

K. Contractor is responsible for routing all condensate drains from all indoor equipment to a nearby floor drain or standpipe. If ceiling heights or space finish does not accommodate gravity drainage, Contractor is responsible for providing a condensate pump and all electrical work required.

L. Contractor is responsible for installing VRF heat pump control system. Contractor shall coordinate with the Temperature Controls Contractor to determine extent of integration with building automation system (BAS). Equipment that is required to integrate the VRF heat pump system with the BAS is the responsibility of the VRF heat pump installing contractor. Final connections between VRF heat pump system and BAS shall be by the Temperature Controls Contractor.

M. Maintain minimum clearances to all equipment. Maintain manufacturer’s minimum maintenance, and airflow clearances and maintain minimum spaces about electrical equipment, whichever is greater.

1. 120V: 36" deep x 30" wide or the width of the panel whichever is wider.

2. 208V: 42" deep x 30" wide or the width of the panel whichever is wider.

3. 480V: 42" deep x 30" wide or the width of the panel whichever is wider.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW HEAT PUMPS SECTION 23 8145-18

3.2 JOINING OF PIPE
A. Brazed Joints:

1. Make up joints with brazing filler metal conforming to ANSI/AWS A5.8. Cut copper tubing ends perfectly square and remove all burrs inside and outside. Thoroughly clean sockets of fittings and ends of tubing to remove all oxide, dirt and grease just prior to brazing. Apply flux evenly, but sparingly, to all surfaces to be joined. Brazing filler metal with a flux coating may also be used. Heat joints uniformly to proper brazing temperature so braze filler metal flows to all mated surfaces. Wipe excess braze filler metal, leaving a uniform fillet around cup of fitting.

2. Flux shall conform to ANSI/AWS A5.31.

3. Remove composition discs and all seals during brazing if not suitable for a minimum of 840°F (or greater than the melting temperature of the brazing filler metal, whichever is greater).

B. Mechanical Press Connection:

1. Copper press fitting shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions.

2. Examination: Upon delivery to the jobsite, examine copper tubing and fittings for debris, defects, incise marks (manufacturer's engraving on tube), holes, or cracks.

3. Fully insert tubing into the fitting and mark tubing.

4. Prior to making connection, the fitting alignment shall be checked against the mark made on the tube to ensure the tubing is fully engaged in the fitting.

5. Joint shall be pressed with a tool approved by the manufacturer.

6. Installers shall be trained by manufacturer personnel or representative. Provide documentation upon request.

3.3 REFRIGERANT PIPING SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
A. Horizontal Supports: Spacing of hangers shall not exceed the compressive strength of the insulation inserts, and in no case shall exceed the following:

1. Type ACR Hard Drawn Seamless Copper Tube (Liquid Service):
a. Maximum Spacing:
1) 3/4" and under: 5'-0"
2) 1": 6'-0"
3) 1-1/4": 6'-0"
4) 1-1/2" 6'-0"
5) 2": 8'-0"

2. Type ACR Hard Drawn Seamless Copper Tube (Vapor Service):
a. Maximum Spacing:
1) 3/4" & under: 6'-0"
2) 1": 6'-0"
3) 1-1/4": 6'-0"
4) 1-1/2": 6'-0"
5) 2": 8'-0"
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW HEAT PUMPS SECTION 23 8145-19

3. ACR Seamless Copper Tube Linesets:
a. Hangers shall be spaced based on the piping system manufacturer's instructions or, if no system instructions are available, space hangers at 4'-0" maximum centers.

B. Vertical Supports:

1. Support and laterally brace vertical pipes at every floor level in multi-story structures, unless otherwise noted by applicable codes, but never at intervals over 10 feet.

C. Install piping support within 2 feet of equipment connections.

END OF SECTION 23 8145
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW HEAT PUMPS SECTION 23 8145-20 (This Page Intentionally Left Blank)
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 26 0500-1
SECTION 26 0500 - BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Requirements applicable to all Division 26 Sections. Also refer to Division 1 - General Requirements. This section is also applicable to Fire Alarm and Detection Systems Section 28 3100.

B. All materials and installation methods shall conform to the applicable standards, guidelines and codes referenced herein and within each specification section.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC)
B. CEC California Electrical Code
C. CCR California Code of Regulation
D. CBC California Building Code
E. CFC California Fire Code
F. CMC California Mechanical Code
G. CPC California Plumbing Code
H. California Title 24 - Building Energy Efficiency Standards

1.3 SCOPE OF WORK
A. This Specification and the associated drawings govern furnishing, installing, testing and placing into satisfactory operation the Electrical Systems.

B. The Contractor shall furnish and install all new materials as indicated on the drawings, and/or in these specifications, and all items required to make the portion of the Electrical Work a finished and working system.

C. All work will be awarded under a single General Contract. The division of work listed below is for the Contractor's convenience and lists normal breakdown of the work.

D. Description of Systems shall be as follows:

1. Electrical power system to and including luminaires, equipment, motors, devices, etc.

2. Electrical power service
system from the Utility Company to and including service entrance equipment, distribution and metering.

3. Grounding system.

4. Fire alarm system.

5. Wiring system for temperature control system as shown on the drawings.

6. Wiring of equipment furnished by others.

7. Removal work and/or relocation and reuse of existing systems and equipment.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 26 0500-2

8. Furnish and install firestopping systems for penetrations of fire-rated construction associated with this Contractor's work.

E. Work Not Included:

1. Telecommunications cabling will be by others, in raceways and conduits furnished and installed as part of the Electrical work.

2. Temperature control wiring for plumbing and HVAC equipment (unless otherwise indicated) will be by other Contractors.

1.4 WORK SEQUENCE
A. All work that will produce excessive noise or interference with normal building operations, as determined by the Owner, shall be scheduled with the Owner. It may be necessary to schedule such work during unoccupied hours. The Owner reserves the right to determine when restricted construction hours are required.

1.5 DIVISION OF WORK BETWEEN MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL, and CONTROL

CONTRACTORS
A. Division of work is the responsibility of the Prime Contractor. Any scope of work described at any location on the contract document shall be sufficient for including said requirement in the project.

The Prime Contractor shall be solely responsible for determining the appropriate subcontractor for the described scope. In no case shall the project be assessed an additional cost for scope that is described on the contract documents on bid day. The following division of responsibility is a guideline based on typical industry practice.

B. Definitions:

1. "Mechanical Contractors" refers to the Contractors listed in Division 21/22/23 of this Specification.

2. "Technology Contractors" refers to the Contractors furnishing and installing systems listed in Division 27/28 of this Specification.

3. Motor Power Wiring: The single phase or 3 phase wiring extending from the power source (transformer, panelboard, feeder circuits, etc.) through disconnect switches and motor controllers to, and including the connections to the terminals of the motor.

4. Motor Control Wiring: The wiring associated with the remote operation of the magnetic coils of magnetic motor starters or relays, or the wiring that permits direct cycling of motors by means of devices in series with the motor power wiring. In the latter case, the devices are usually single phase, have "Manual-Off-Auto" provisions, and are usually connected into the motor power wiring through a manual motor starter.

5. Control devices such as start-stop push buttons, thermostats, pressure switches, flow switches, relays, etc., generally represent the types of equipment associated with motor control wiring.

6. Motor control wiring is single phase and usually 120 volts. In some instances, the voltage will be the same as the motor power wiring. When the motor power wiring exceeds 120 volts, a control transformer is usually used to give a control voltage of 120 volts.

7. Temperature Control Wiring:

The wiring associated with the operation of a motorized damper, solenoid valve or motorized valve, etc., either modulating or two-position, as opposed to wiring that directly powers or controls a motor used to drive equipment such as fans, pumps, etc. This wiring will be from a 120-volt source and may continue as 120 volt, or be reduced in voltage (24 volt), in which case a control transformer shall be furnished as part of the temperature control wiring.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 26 0500-3

8. Control Motor: An electric device used to operate dampers, valves, etc. It may be two-position or modulating. Conventional characteristics of such a motor are 24 volts, 60 cycles, 1 phase, although other voltages may be encountered.

9. Low Voltage Technology Wiring: The wiring associated with the technology systems, used for analog or digital signals between equipment.

10. Telecommunications/Technology Rough-in: Relates specifically to the backboxes, necessary plaster rings and other miscellaneous hardware required for the installation or mounting of telecommunications/technology information outlets.

C. General:

1. The purpose of these Specifications is to outline the Electrical and Mechanical Contractors' responsibilities related to electrical work required for items such as temperature controls, mechanical equipment, fans, chillers, compressors, etc. The exact wiring requirements for much of the equipment cannot be determined until the systems have been selected and submittals approved. Therefore, the electrical drawings show only known wiring related to such items. All wiring not shown on the electrical drawings, but required for mechanical systems, is the responsibility of the Mechanical Contractor.

2. Where the drawings require the Electrical Contractor to wire between equipment furnished by the Mechanical Contractor, such wiring shall terminate at terminals provided in the equipment. The Mechanical Contractor shall furnish complete wiring diagrams and supervision to the Electrical Contractor and designate the termi nal numbers for correct wiring.

3. Control low (24V) and control line (120V) voltage wiring, conduit, and related switches and relays required for the automatic control and/or interlock of motors and equipment, including final connection, are to be furnished and installed under Divisions 21, 22 and 23. Materials and installation to conform to Class 1 or 2 requirements, California Electrical Code Article 725.

4. The Electrical Contractor shall establish electrical utility elevations prior to fabrication and installation. The Electrical Contractor shall coordinate utility elevations with other trades.

When a conflict arises, priority shall be as follows:
a. Luminaires.
b. Gravity flow piping, including steam and condensate. c. Electrical bus duct.
d. Sheet metal.
e. Cable trays, including access space.
f. Other piping.
g. Conduits and wireway.

D. Mechanical Contractor's Responsibility:

1. Assumes responsibility for internal wiring of all equipment furnished by the Mechanical Contractor.

2. Assumes all responsibility for miscellaneous items furnished by the Mechanical Contractor that require wiring but are not shown on the electrical drawings or specified in the Electrical Specification. If items such as relays, flow switches, or interlocks are required to make the mechanical system function correctly or are required by the manufacturer, they are the responsibility of the Mechanical Contractor.

3. Assumes all responsibilit
y for Temperature Control wiring, if the Temperature Control Contractor is a Subcontractor to the Mechanical Contractor.

4. This Contractor is responsible for coordination of utilities with all other Contractors. If any field coordination conflicts are found, the Contractor shall coordinate with other Contractors to determine a viable layout.

1. Wiring of all devices needed to make the Temperature Control System functional.

2. Verifying any control wiring on the electrical drawings as being by the Electrical Contractor.

All wiring required for the Control System, but not shown on the electrical drawings, is the responsibility of the Temperature Control Contractor or Subcontractor.

3. Coordinating equipment locations (such as PE's, EP's, relays, transformers, etc.) with the Electrical Contractor, where wiring of the equipment is by the Electrical Contractor.

F. Electrical Contractor's Responsibility:

1. Furnishes and installs all combination starters, manual starters and disconnect devices shown on the Electrical Drawings or indicated to be by the Electrical Contractor in the Mechanical Drawings or Specifications.

2. Installs and wires all remote-control devices furnished by the Mechanical Contractor or Temperature Control Contractor when so noted on the Electrical Drawings.

3. Furnishes and installs motor control and temperature control wiring, when noted on the drawings.

4. Furnishes, installs, and connects all relays, etc., for automatic shutdown of certain mechanical equipment (supply fans, exhaust fans, etc.) upon actuation of the Fire Alarm System.

5. This Contractor is responsible for coordination of utilities with all other Contractors. If any field coordination conflicts are found, the Contractor shall coordinate with other Contractors to determ
ine a viable layout.

1.6 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Definitions:

1. Coordination Drawings: A compilation of the pertinent layout and system drawings that show the sizes and locations, including elevations, of system components and required access areas to ensure that no two objects will occupy the same space. a. Mechanical trades shall include, but are not limited to, mechanical equipment, ductwork, fire protection systems, plumbing piping, medical gas systems, hydronic piping, steam and steam condensate piping, and any item that may impact coordination with other disciplines.
b. Electrical trades shall include, but are not limited to, electrical equipment, conduit 1.5" and larger, conduit racks, cable trays, pull boxes, transformers, raceway, busway, lighting, ceiling-mounted devices, and any item that may impact coordination with other disciplines.
c. Technology trades shall include, but are not limited to, technology equipment, racks, conduit 1.5" and larger, conduit racks, cable trays, ladder rack, pull boxes, raceway, ceiling-mounted devices, and any item that may impact coordination with other disciplines.
d. Maintenance clearances and code-required dedicated space shall be included. e. The coordination drawings shall include all underground, underfloor, in-floor, in chase, and vertical trade items.

2. Spaces with open/cloud ceiling architecture shall indicate the overhead utilities and locate equipment as required to maintain clearance above lights. The intent for the install ation is to
maintain a maximum allowable vertical clearance and an organized/clean manner in the horizontal. Notify Architect/Engineer of the maximum clearance which can be maintained.

Failure to comply will result in modifications with no cost to Owner.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 26 0500-5
a. In cloud ceiling architecture, when open cabling/wire and/or cable tray crosses gaps between ceiling clouds and/or walls, cabling is to transition to conduits to span the gaps in order to conceal cabling from below.

3. The contractors shall use the coordination process to identify the proper sequence of installation of all utilities above ceilings and in other congested areas, to ensure an orderly and coordinated end result, and to provide adequate access for service and maintenance.

B. Participation:

1. The contractors and subcontractors responsible for work defined above shall participate in the coordination drawing process.
a. One contractor shall be designated as the Coordinating Contractor for purposes of preparing a complete set of composite electronic CAD coordination drawings that include all applicable trades, and for coordinating the activities related to this process.

The Coordinating Contractor shall utilize personnel familiar with requirements of this project and skilled as draftspersons/CAD operators, competent to prepare the required coordination drawings.

2. Electronic CAD drawings shall be submitted to the Coordinating Contractor for addition of work by other trades. IMEG will provide electronic file copies of ventilation drawings for contractor's use if the contractor signs and returns an "Electronic File Transfer" waiver provided by IMEG. IMEG will not consider blatant reproductions of original file copies an acce
ptable alternative for coordination drawings.

C. Drawing Requirements:

1. The file format and file naming convention shall be coordinated with and agreed to by all contractors participating in the coordination process and the Owner. a. Scale of drawings:
1) General plans: 1/4 Inch = 1 '-0" (minimum).
2) Mechanical, electrical, communication rooms, and including the surrounding areas within 10 feet: 1/2 Inch = 1'-0" (minimum).
3) Shafts and risers: 1/2 Inch = 1'-0" (minimum).
4) Sections of shafts and mechanical and electrical equipment rooms: 1/4 Inch = 1 '-0" (minimum).
5) Sections of congested areas: 1/2 Inch = 1'-0" (minimum).

2. Ductwork layout drawings shall be the baseline system for other components. Ductwork layout drawings shall be modified to accommodate other components as the coordination process progresses.

3. There may be more drawings required for risers, top and bottom levels of mechanical rooms, and shafts.

4. The minimum quantity of drawings will be established at the first coordination meeting and sent to the Architect/Engineer for review. Additional drawings may be required if other areas of congestion are discovered during the coordination process.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 26 0500-6
D. General:

1. Coordination drawing files shall be made available to the Architect/Engineer and Owner's Representative. The Architect/Engineer will only review identified conflicts and give an opinion, but will not perform as a coordinator.

2. A plotted set of coordination drawings shall be available at the project site.

3. Coordination drawings are not shop drawings and shall not be submitted as such.

4. The contract drawings are schematic in nature and do not show every fitting and appurtenance for each utility. Each contractor is expected to have included in the bid sufficient fittings, material, and labor to allow for adjustments in routing of utilities made necessary by the coordination process and to provide a complete and functional system.

5. The contractors will not be allowed additional costs or time extensions due to participation in the coordination process.

6. The contractors will not be allowed additional costs or time extensions for additional fittings, reroutings or changes of duct size, that are essentially equivalent sizes to those shown on the drawings and determined necessary through the coordination process.

7. The Architect/Engineer reserves the right to determine space priority of equipment in the event of spatial conflicts or interference between equipment, piping, conduit, ducts, and equipment provided by the trades.

8. Changes to the contract documents that are necessary for systems install ation and coordination
shall be brought to the attention of the Architect/Engineer.

9. Access panels shall preferably occur only in gypsum board walls or plaster ceilings where indicated on the drawings.
a. Access to mechanical, electrical, technology, and other items located above the ceiling shall be through accessible lay-in ceiling tile areas.
b. Potential layout changes shall be made to avoid additional access panels. c. Additional access panels shall not be allowed without written approval from the Architect/Engineer at the coordination drawing stage.
d. Providing additional access panels shall be considered after other alternatives are reviewed and discarded by the Architect/Engineer and the Owner's Representative. e. When additional access panels are required, they shall be provided without additional cost to the Owner.

10. Complete the coordination drawing process and obtain sign-off of the drawings by all contractors prior to installing any of the components.

11. Conflicts that result after the coordination drawings are signed off shall be the responsibility of the contractor or subcontractor who did not properly identify their work requirements, or installed their work without proper coordination.

12. Updated coordination drawings that reflect as-built conditions may be used as record documents.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 26 0500-7

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Contractor's Responsibility Prior to Submitting Pricing/Bid Data:

1. The Contractor is responsible for constructing complete and operating systems. The Contractor acknowledges and understands that the Contract Documents are a two-dimensional representation of a three-dimensional object, subject to human interpretation. This representation may include imperfect data, interpreted codes, utility guides, three-dimensional conflicts, and required field coordination items. Such deficiencies can be corrected when identified prior to ordering material and starting installation. The Contractor agrees to carefully study and compare the individual Contract Documents and report at once in writing to the Architect/Engineer any deficiencies the Contractor may discover. The Contractor further agrees to require each subcontractor to likewise study the documents and report at once any deficiencies discovered.

2. The Contractor shall resolve all reported deficiencies with the Architect/Engineer prior to awarding any subcontracts, ordering material, or starting any work with the Contractor's own employees. Any work performed prior to receipt of instructions from the Architect/Engineer will be done at the Contractor's risk.

B. Qualifications:

1. Only products of reputable manufacturers as determined by the Architect/Engineer are acceptable.

2. All Contractors and subcontractors shall employ only workmen who are skilled in their trades.

At all times, the number of apprentices at the job site shall be less than or equal to the number of journeyme
n at the job site.

C. Compliance with Codes, Laws, Ordinances:

1. Conform to all requirements of the City of Sacramento Codes, Laws, Ordinances and other regulations having jurisdiction.

2. If there is a discrepancy between the codes and regulations and these specifications, the Architect/Engineer shall determine the method or equipment used.

3. If the Contractor notes, at the time of bidding, that any parts of the drawings or specifications do not comply with the codes or regulations, Contractor shall inform the Architect/Engineer in writing, requesting a clarification. If there is insufficient time for this procedure, Contractor shall submit with the proposal a separate price to make the system comply with the codes and regulations.

4. All changes to the system made after the letting of the contract to comply with codes or the requirements of the Inspector, shall be made by the Contractor without cost to the Owner.

5. If there is a discrepancy between manufacturer's recommendations and these specifications, the manufacturer's recommendations shall govern.

6. If there are no local codes having jurisdiction, the current issue of the National Electrical Code shall be followed.

D. Permits, Fees, Taxes, Inspections:

1. Procure all applicable permits and licenses.

2. Abide by all laws, regulations, ordinances, and other rules of the State or Political Subdivision where the work is done, or as required
by any duly constituted public authority.

3. Pay all charges for permits or licenses.

4. Pay all fees and taxes imposed by State, Municipal, and other regulatory bodies.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 26 0500-8

5. Pay all charges arising out of required inspections by an authorized body.

6. Pay all charges arising out of required contract document reviews associated with the project and as initiated by the Owner or authorized agency/consultant.

7. Where applicable, all fixtures, equipment and materials shall be listed by Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. or a nationally recognized testing organization.

8. Pay all telephone company charges related to the service or change in service.

E. Utility Company Requirements:

1. Furnish the meter socket metering. Verify approved manufacturers and equipment with the Utility Company.

2. The Owner shall apply and pay for any changes for removal of existing electrical service by the utility company. The Contractor shall verify approved manufacturers and equipment with the Utility Company.

F. Examination of Drawings:

1. The drawings for the electrical work are completely diagrammatic, intended to convey the scope of the work and to indicate the general arrangements and locations of equipment, outlets, etc., and the approximate sizes of equipment.

2. Contractor shall determine the exact locations of equipment and rough-ins, and the exact routing of raceways to best fit the layout of the job. Conduit entry points for electrical equipment including, but not limited to, panelboards, switchboards, switchgear and unit substations, shall be determined by the Contractor unless noted in the contract documents.

3. Scaling of the drawings will not be sufficient
or accurate for determining these locations.

4. Where job conditions require reasonable changes in arrangements and locations, such changes shall be made by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.

5. Because of the scale of the drawings, certain basic items, such as junction boxes, pull boxes, conduit fittings, etc., may not be shown, but where required by other sections of the specifications or required for proper installation of the work, such items shall be furnished and installed.

6. If an item is either shown on the drawings or called for in the specifications, it shall be included in this contract.

7. The Contractor shall determine quantities and quality of material and equipment required from the documents. Where discrepancies arise between drawings, schedules and/or specifications, the greater and better-quality number shall govern.

8. Where used in electrical documents the word "furnish" shall mean supply for use, the word "install" shall mean connect up complete and ready for operation, and the word "provide" shall mean to supply for use and connect up complete and ready for operation.

9. Any item listed as furnished shall also be installed unless otherwise noted.

10. Any item listed as installed shall also be furnished unless otherwise noted.

Electronic Media/Files:

1. Construction drawings for this project have been prepared utilizing Revit.

2. Contractors and Subcontractors may request electronic media files of the contract drawings and/or copies of the specifications. Specifications will be provided in PDF format.

3. Upon request for electronic media, the Contractor shall complete and return a signed "Electronic File Transmittal" form provided by IMEG.

4. If the information requested includes floor plans prepared by others, the Contractor will be responsible for obtaining approval from the appropriate Design Professional for use of that part of the document.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 26 0500-9

5. The electronic contract documents can be used for preparation of shop drawings and as-built drawings only. The information may not be used in whole or in part for any other project.

6. The drawings prepared by IMEG for bidding purposes may not be used directly for ductwork layout drawings or coordination drawings.

7. The use of these CAD documents by the Contractor does not relieve them from their responsibility for coordination of work with other trades and verification of space available for the installation.

8. The information is provided to expedite the project and assist the Contractor with no guarantee by IMEG as to the accuracy or correctness of the information provided. IMEG accepts no responsibility or liability for the Contractor's use of these documents.

H. Field Measurements:

1. Verify all pertinent dimensions at the job site before ordering any conduit, conductors, wireways, bus duct, fittings, etc.

1.8 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be required for the following items, and for additional items where required elsewhere in the specifications or on the drawings.

1. Submittals list:

Referenced
Specification Section Submittal Item
Coordination
Drawing
26 05 00 Basic Electrical Requirements
26 05 03 Through Penetration Firestopping
26 05 05 Electrical Demolition for Remodeling
26 05 13 Wire and Cable
26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding
26 05 27 Supporting Devices
26 05 33 Conduit and Boxes +> 1.5"
26 05 53 Electrical Identification
26 05 73 Power System Study
26 08 00 Commissioning of Electrical
26 09 33 Lighting Control System
26 20 00 Service Entrance
26 24 16 Panelboards Yes
26 27 26 Wiring Devices Ceiling mount
26 28 13 Fuses
26 28 16 Disconnect Switches Yes
26 51 19 LED Lighting Yes
28 31 00 Fire Alarm and Detection Systems Yes
B. General Submittal Procedures: In addition to the provisions of Division 1, the following are required:

1. Transmittal: Each transmittal shall include the following:
a. Date
b. Project title and number
c. Contractor's name and address
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 26 0500-10
d. Division of work (e.g., electrical, plumbing, heating, ventilating, etc.) e. Description of items submitted and relevant specification number f. Notations of deviations from the contract documents
g. Other pertinent data

2. Submittal Cover Sheet: Each submittal shall include a cover sheet containing:
a. Date
b. Project title and number
c. Architect/Engineer
d. Contractor and subcontractors' names and addresses
e. Supplier and manufacturer's names and addresses
f. Division of work (e.g., electrical, plumbing, heating, ventilating, etc.) g. Description of item submitted (using project nomenclature) and relevant specification number
h. Notations of deviations from the contract documents
i. Other pertinent data
j. Provide space for Contractor's review stamps

3. Composition:
a. Submittals shall be submitted using specification sections and the project nomenclature for each item.
b. Individual submittal packages shall be prepared for items in each specification section.

All items within a single specification section shall be packaged together where possible. An individual submittal may contain items from multiple specifications sections if the items are intimately linked (e.g., pumps and motors). c. All sets shall contain an index of the items enclosed with a general topic description on the cover.

4. Content: Submittals shall include all fabrication, erection, layout, and setting drawings; manufacturers' standard drawings; schedules; descriptive literature, catalogs and brochures; performance and test data; wiring and control diagrams; dimensions; shipping and operating weights; shipping splits; service
clearances; and all other drawings and descriptive data of materials of construction as may be required to show that the materials, equipment or systems and the location thereof conform to the requirements of the contract documents.

5. Contractor's Approval Stamp:
a. The Contractor shall thoroughly review and approve all shop drawings before submitting them to the Architect/Engineer. The Contractor shall stamp, date and sign each submittal certifying it has been reviewed.
b. Unstamped submittals will be rejected.
c. The Contractor's review shall include, but not be limited to, verification of the following:
1) Only approved manufacturers are used.
2) Addenda items have been incorporated.
3) Catalog numbers and options match those specified.
4) Performance data matches that specified.
5) Electrical characteristics and loads match those specified. 6) Equipment connection locations, sizes, capacities, etc. have been coordinated with other affected trades.
7) Dimensions and service clearances are suitable for the intended location.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 26 0500-11
8) Equipment dimensions are coordinated with support steel, housekeeping pads, openings, etc.
9) Constructability issues are resolved (e.g., weights and dimensions are suitable for getting the item into the building and into place, sinks fit into countertops, etc.).
d. The Contractor shall review, stamp and approve all subcontractors' submittals as described above.
e. The Contractor's approval stamp is required on all submittals. Approval will indicate the Contractor's review of all material and a complete understanding of exactly what is to be furnished. Contractor shall clearly mark all deviations from the contract documents on all submittals. If deviations are not marked by the Contractor, then the item shall be required to meet all drawing and specification requirements.

6. Submittal Identification and Markings:
a. The Contractor shall clearly mark each item with the same nomenclature applied on the drawings or in the specifications.
b. The Contractor shall clearly indicate the size, finish, material, etc. c. Where more than one model is shown on a manufacturer's sheet, the Contractor shall clearly indicate exactly which item and which data is intended. d. All marks and identifications on the submittals shall be unambiguous.

7. Schedule submittals to expedite the project. Coordinate submission of related items.

8. Identify variations from the contract documents and product or system limitations that may be detrimental to the successful performanc
e of the completed work.

9. Reproduction of contract documents alone is not acceptable for submittals.

10. Incomplete submittals will be rejected without review. Partial submittals will only be reviewed with prior approval from the Architect/Engineer.

11. Submittals not required by the contract documents may be returned without review.

12. The Architect/Engineer's responsibility shall be to review one set of shop drawing submittals for each product. If the first submittal is incomplete or does not comply with the drawings and/or specifications, the Contractor shall be responsible to bear the cost for the Architect/Engineer to recheck and handle the additional shop drawing submittals.

13. Submittals shall be reviewed and approved by the Architect/Engineer before releasing any equipment for manufacture or shipment.

14. Contractor's responsibility for errors, omissions or deviation from the contract documents in submittals is not relieved by the Architect/Engineer's approval.

15. Schedule shall allow for adequate time to perform orderly and proper review of submittals, including time for consultants and Owner if required, and resubmittals by Contractor if necessary, and to cause no delay in Work or in activities of Owner or other contractors. a. Allow at least two weeks for Architect’s/Engineer's review and processing of each submittal, excluding mailing.

16. Architect/Enginee
r reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal which, in the Architect/Engineer’s opinion, requires coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. The Architect/Engineer will notify the Contractor, in writing, when they exercise this right.

1. Distribution: Email submittals as attachments to all parties designated by the Architect/Engineer, unless a web-based submittal program is used.

2. Transmittals: Each submittal shall include an individual electronic letter of transmittal.

4. File Names: Electronic submittal file names shall include the relevant specification section number followed by a description of the item submitted, as follows. Where possible, include the transmittal as the first page of the PDF instead of using multiple electronic files. a. Submittal file name: 26 XX XX.description.YYYYMMDD
b. Transmittal file name: 26 XX XX.description.YYYYMMDD

5. File Size: Files shall be transmitted via a pre-approved method. Larger files may require an alternative transfer method, which shall also be pre-approved.

1.9 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, HANDLING and MAINTENANCE A. Exercise care in transporting and handling to avoid damage to materials. Store materials on the site to prevent damage.

B. Protect equipment, components, and openings with airtight covers and exercise care at every stage of storage, handling, and installation of equipment to prevent airborne dust and dirt from entering or fouling equipme
nt to include, but not limited to:

1. Distribution equipment - branch panels, distribution panels, switchboards, motor control centers, etc.

2. Lighting luminaires and lighting control systems.

C. Equipment and components that are visibly damaged or have been subject to environmental conditions prior to building turnover to Owner that could shorten the life of the component (for example, water damage, humidity, dust and debris, excessive hot or cold storage location, etc.) shall be repaired or replaced with new equipment or components without additional cost to the building owner.

D. Keep all materials clean, dry and free from damaging environments.

E. Coordinate the installation of heavy and large equipment with the General Contractor and/or Owner.

If the Electrical Contractor does not have prior documented experience in rigging and lifting similar equipment, he/she shall contract with a qualified lifting and rigging service that has similar documented experience. Follow all equipment lifting and support guidelines for handling and moving.

F. Contractor is responsible for moving equipment into the building and/or site. Contractor shall review site prior to bid for path locations and any required building modifications to allow movement of equipment. Contractor shall coordinate the work with other trades.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 26 0500-13

1.10 NETWORK / INTERNET CONNECTED EQUIPMENT
A. These specifications may require certain equipment or systems to have network, Internet and/or remote access capability ("Network Capability"). Any requirement for Network Capability shall be interpreted only as a functional capability and is not to be construed as authority to connect or enable any Network Capability. Network Capability may only be connected or enabled with the express written consent of the Owner.

B. The following network connected equipment shall be equipped with restricted access protocols:

1. Adjustable trip overcurrent protection devices

2. Electrical controls

3. Lighting control system

4. Fire alarm and automatic detection

1.11 WARRANTY
A. Provide one-year warranty for all fixtures, equipment, materials, and workmanship.

B. The warranty period for all work in this specification Division shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion or successful system performance whichever occurs later. The warranty may also commence if a whole or partial system or any separate piece of equipment or component is put into use for the benefit of any party other than the installing contractor with prior written authorization of the Owner. In this instance, the warranty period shall commence on the date when such whole system, partial system or separate piece of equipment or component is placed in operation and accepted in writing by the Owner.

C. Warranty requirem
ents extend to correction, without cost to the Owner, of all work found to be defective or nonconforming to the contract documents. The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting all damage due to defects or nonconformance with contract documents excluding repairs required as a result of improper maintenance or operation, or of normal wear as determined by the Architect/Engineer.

1.12 INSURANCE
A. This Contractor shall maintain insurance coverage as set forth in Division 1 of these specifications.

1.13 MATERIAL SUBSTITUTION
A. Where several manufacturers' names are given, the manufacturer for which a catalog number is given is the basis for job design and establishes the quality.

B. Equivalent equipment manufactured by the other listed manufacturers may be used. Contractor shall ensure that all items submitted by these other manufacturers meet all requirements of the drawings and specifications and fits in the allocated space. When using other listed manufacturers, the Contractor shall assume responsibility for any and all modifications necessary (including, but not limited to structural supports, electrical connections and rough-in, and regulatory agency approval, etc.) and coordinate such with other contractors. The Architect/Engineer shall make the final determination of whether a product is equivalent.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 26 0500-14
C. Any material, article or equipment of other unnamed manufacturers which will adequately perform the services and duties imposed by the design and is of a quality equal to or better than the material, article or equipment identified by the drawings and specifications may be used if approval is secured in writing from the Architect/Engineer via addendum. The Contractor assumes all costs incurred as a result of using the offered material, article or equipment, on the Contractors part or on the part of other Contractors whose work is affected.

D. Voluntary add or deduct prices for alternate materials may be listed on the bid form. These items will not be used in determining the low bidder. This Contractor assumes all costs incurred as a result of using the offered material or equipment on the Contractors part or on the part of other Contractors whose work is affected.

E. All material substitutions requested after the final addendum must be listed as voluntary changes on the bid form.

1.14 PROJECT COMMISSIONING
A. The Contractor shall work with the Commissioning Agent (CxA) as described in Section 01 9100 and 26 08 00 and provide all services as described in the Commissioning Plan.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL
A. All items of material having a similar function (e.g., safety switches, panelboards, contactors, motor starters, dry type transformers) shall be of the same manufac turer unless specifically stated otherwise
on drawings or elsewhere in specifications.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 JOBSITE SAFETY
A. Neither the professional activities of the Architect/Engineer, nor the presence of the Architect/Engineer or the employees and subconsultants at a construction site, shall relieve the Contractor and any other entity of their obligations, duties and responsibilities including, but not limited to, construction means, methods, sequence, techniques or procedures necessary for performing, superintending or coordinating all portions of the work of construction in accordance with the contract documents and any health or safety precautions required by any regulatory agencies. The Architect/Engineer and personnel have no authority to exercise any control over any construction contractor or other entity or their employees in connection with their work or any health or safety precautions. The Contractor is solely responsible for jobsite safety. The Architect/Engineer and the Architect/Engineer's consultants shall be indemnified and shall be made additional insureds under the Contractor's general liability insurance policy.

3.2 EXCAVATION, FILL, BACKFILL, COMPACTION
A. Underground Obstructions:

1. Known underground piping, conduit, feeders, foundations, and other obstructions in the vicinity of construction are shown on the drawings. Review all Bid Documents for all trades on the project to determine obstructions indicated. Take great care in making installations near underground obstructions.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 26 0500-15

2. If objects not shown on the drawings are encountered, remove, relocate, or perform extra work as directed by the Architect/Engineer.

B. Fill and Backfilling:

1. No rubbish or waste material is permitted for fill or backfill.

2. Provide all necessary sand and/or CA6 for backfilling.

3. Native soil materials may be used as backfill if approved by the Geotechnical Engineer.

4. Dispose of the excess excavated earth as directed.

5. Backfill materials (native soil material, sand, and/or CA6) shall be suitable for required compaction, clean and free of perishable materials, frozen earth, debris, earth with a high void content, and stones greater than 4 inches in diameter. Water is not permitted to rise in unbackfilled trenches.

6. Backfill all trenches and excavations immediately after installing of conduit, or removing forms, unless other protection is directed.

7. Around piers and isolated foundations and structures, backfill and fill shall be placed and consolidated simultaneously on all sides to prevent wedge action and displacement. Spread fill and backfill materials in 6" uniform horizontal layers with each layer compacted separately to required density.

8. For conduits that are not concrete encased, lay all conduits on a compacted bed of sand at least 3" deep. Backfill around conduits with sand, in 6" layers and compact each layer.

9. Conduits that are concrete encased or in a ductbank, conduit spacers, and cradles shall be installed on a bed of compacted CA-6 gravel. Refer to conduit section for backfilling and ductbank requirements.

10. Backfill with native soil material (if approved) or sand up to grade for all conduits under slabs or paved areas. All other conduits shall have sand backfill to 6" above the top of the conduit.

11. Place all backfill above the sand in uniform layers not exceeding 6" deep. Place then carefully and uniformly tamp each layer to eliminate lateral or vertical displacement.

12. Where the fill and backfill will ultimately be under a building, floor or paving, each layer of fill shall be compacted to 95% of the maximum density as determined by AASHTO Designation T-99 or ASTM Designation D-698. Moisture content of soil at time of compaction shall not exceed plus or minus 2% of optimum moisture content as determined by AASHTO T-99 or ASTM D-698 test.

13. After backfilling of trenches, no superficial loads shall be placed on the exposed surface of the backfill until a period of 48 hours has elapsed.

C. Surface Restoration:

1. Where trenches are cut through graded, planted or landscaped areas, the areas shall be restored to the original
condition. Replace all planting and landscaping features removed or damaged to its original condition. At least 6" of topsoil shall be applied where disturbed areas are to be seeded or sodded. All lawn areas shall be sodded unless seeding is called out in the drawings or specifications.

2. Concrete or asphalt type pavement, seal coat, rock, gravel or earth surfaces removed or damaged shall be replaced with comparable materials and restored to original condition.

Broken edges shall be saw cut and repaired as directed by Architect/Engineer.

3.3 ARCHITECT/ENGINEER OBSERVATION OF WORK
A. The contractor shall provide seven (7) calendar days' notice to the Architect/Engineer prior to:

1. Placing fill over underground and underslab utilities.

2. Covering exterior walls, interior partitions and chases.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 26 0500-16

3. Installing hard or suspended ceilings and soffits.

B. The Architect/Engineer will review the installation and provide a written report noting deficiencies requiring correction. The contractor's schedule shall account for these reviews and show them as line items in the approved schedule.

C. Above-Ceiling Final Observation:

1. All work above the ceilings must be complete prior to the Architect/Engineer's review. This includes, but is not limited to:
a. All junction boxes are closed and identified in accordance with Section 26 0553 Electrical Identification.
b. Luminaires, including ceiling-mounted exit and emergency lights, are installed and operational.
c. Luminaire whips are supported above the ceiling.
d. Conduit identification is installed in accordance with Section 26 0553 Electrical Identification.
e. Luminaires are suspended independently of the ceiling system when required by these contract documents.
f. All wall penetrations have been sealed.

2. To prevent the Above-Ceiling Final Observation from occurring too early, the Contractor shall review the status of the work and certify, in writing, that the work is ready for the Above-Ceiling Final Observation.

3. It is understood that if the Architect/Engineer finds the ceilings have been installed prior to this review and prior to seven days elapsing, the Architect/Engineer may not recommend further payments to the contractor until full access has been provided.

3.4 PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A.

The following paragraphs supplement the requirements of Division 1.

B. Final Jobsite Observation:

1. To prevent the Final Jobsite Observation from occurring too early, the Contractor shall review the completion status of the project and certify that the job is ready for the final jobsite observation.

2. Attached to the end of this section is a typical list of items that represent the degree of job completeness expected prior to requesting a review. The Contractor shall sign the attached certification and return it to the Architect/Engineer so that the final observation can be scheduled.

3. It is understood that if the Architect/Engineer finds the job not ready for the final observation and additional trips and observations are required to bring the project to completion, the cost of the additional time and expenses incurred by the Architect/Engineer will be deducted from the Contractor's final payment.

4. Contractor shall notify Architect/Engineer 48 hours prior to installation of ceilings or lay-in ceiling tiles.

C. The following must be submitted before Architect/Engineer recommends final payment:

1. Operation and maintenance manuals with copies of approved shop drawings.

2. Record documents including marked-up drawings and specifications.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 26 0500-17

3. A report documenting the instructions given to the Owner's representatives complete with the number of hours spent in the instruction. The report shall bear the signature of an authorized agent of this Contractor and shall be signed by the Owner's representatives.

4. Provide spare parts, maintenance, and extra materials in quantities specified in individual specification sections. Deliver to and place in location as directed and submit receipt to Architect/Engineer.

5. Inspection and testing report by the fire alarm system manufacturer.

6. Start-up reports on all equipment requiring a factory installation or start-up.

D. Circuit Directories:

1. Provide custom typed circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard. Provide updated custom typed circuit directory for each existing branch circuit panelboard with new or revised circuits per the scope of work. Label shall include equipment name or final approved room name, room number, and load type for each circuit (examples: SUMP SP-1 or ROOM 101 RECEPT). Revise directory to reflect circuit changes required to balance phase loads. Printed copies of the bid document panel schedules are not acceptable as circuit directories.

3.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. General:

1. Provide an electronic copy of the O&M manuals as described below for Architect/Engineer's review and approval. The electronic copy shall be corrected as required to address the Architec
t/Engineer's comments. Once corrected, electronic copies and paper copies shall be distributed as directed by the Architect/Engineer.

2. Approved O&M manuals shall be completed and in the Owner's possession prior to Owner's acceptance and at least 10 days prior to instruction of operating personnel.

B. Electronic Submittal Procedures:

1. Distribution: Email the O&M manual as attachments to all parties designated by the Architect/Engineer.

2. Transmittals: Each submittal shall include an individual electronic letter of transmittal.

4. File Names: Electronic submittal file names shall include the relevant specification section number followed by a description of the item submitted, as follows. Where possible, include the transmittal as the first page of the PDF instead of using multiple electronic files. a. O&M file name: O&M.div26.contractor.YYYYMMDD
b. Transmittal file name: O&Mtransmittal.div26.contractor.YYYYMMDD

5. File Size: Files shall be transmitted via a pre-approved method. Larger files may require an alternative transfer method, which shall also be pre-approved.

6. Provide the Owner with an approved copy of the O&M manual on compac t discs (CD), digital
video discs (DVD), or flash drives with a permanently affixed label, printed with the title "Operation and Maintenance Instructions", title of the project and subject matter of disc/flash drive when multiple disc/flash drives are required.

7. All text shall be searchable.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 26 0500-18

8. Bookmarks shall be used, dividing information first by specification section, then systems, major equipment and finally individual items. All bookmark titles shall include the nomenclature used in the construction documents and shall be an active link to the first page of the section being referenced.

C. Operation and Maintenance Instructions shall include:

2. Table of Contents: Include a table of contents describing specification section, systems, major equipment, and individual items.

4. Copies of all factory inspections and/or equipment startup reports.

5. Copies of warranties.

6. Schematic wiring diagrams of the equipment that have been updated for field conditions. Field wiring shall have label numbers to match drawings.

7. Dimensional drawings of equipment.

8. Detailed parts lists with lists of suppliers.

9. Operating procedures for each system.

10. Maintenance schedule and procedures. Include a chart listing maintenance requirements and frequency.

11. Repair procedures for major components.

12. Replacement parts and service material requirements for each system and the frequency of service required.

13. Instruction books, cards, and manuals furnished with the equipment.

14. Include record drawings of the one-line diagrams for each major system. The graphic for each piece of equipment shown on the one-line diagram shall be an active link to its associated Operation & Maintenance data.

15. Copies of all panel schedules in electronic Microsoft Excel spreadsheet (.xlsx) file. Each panelboard shall be a separate tab in the workbook.

3.6 INSTRUCTING THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE
A. Adequately instruct the Owner's designated representatives in the maintenance, care, and operation of the complete systems installed under this contract.

B. Provide verbal and written instructions to the Owner's representa tives by FACTORY PERSONNEL
in the care, maintenance, and operation of the equipment and systems.

C. The Owner has the option to make a video recording of all instructions. Coordinate schedule of instructions to facilitate this recording.

D. The instructions shall include:

1. Maintenance of equipment.

2. Start-up procedures for all major equipment.

3. Description of emergency system operation.

E. Notify the Architect/Engineer of the time and place for the verbal instructions to be given to the Owner's representative so a representative can be present if desired.

G. Operating Instructions:

1. Contractor is responsible for all instructions to the Owner's representatives for the electrical and specialized systems.

2. If the Contractor does not have staff that can adequately provide the required instructions, the Contractor shall include in the bid an adequate amount to reimburse the Owner for the Architect/Engineer to perform these services.

3.7 RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. The following paragraphs supplement Division 1 requirements.

B. Maintain at the job site a separate and complete set of electrical drawings and specifications with all changes made to the systems clearly and permanently marked in complete detail.

C. Mark drawings and specifications to indicate approved substitutions; Change Orders, and actual equipment and materials used. All Change Orders, RFI responses, Clarifications and other supplemental instructions shall be marked on the documents. Record documents that merely reference the existence of the above items are not acceptable. Should this Contractor fail to complete Record Documents as required by this contract, this Contractor shall reimburse Architect/Engineer for all costs to develop record documents that comply with this requirement. Reimbursement shall be made at the Architect/Engineer's hourly rates in effect at the time of work.

D. Record changes daily and keep the marked
drawings available for the Architect/Engineer's
examination at any normal work time.

E. Upon completing the job, and before final payment is made, give the marked-up drawings to the Architect/Engineer.

F. Record actual routing of conduits exceeding 2 inches.

3.8 PAINTING
A. Paint all equipment that is marred or damaged prior to the Owner's acceptance. Paint and color shall match original equipment paint and shall be obtained from the equipment supplier if available. All equipment shall have a finished coat of paint applied unless specifically allowed to be provided with a prime coat only.

B. Equipment in finished areas that will be painted to match the room decor will be painted by others.

C. Equipment cabinets, casings, covers, metal jackets, etc., located in equipment rooms or concealed spaces, shall be furnished in standard finish, free from scratches, abrasions, chippings, etc.

D. Equipment in occupied spaces, or if standard to the unit, shall have a baked primer with baked enamel finish coat
free from scratches, abrasions, chipping, etc. If color option is specified or is standard to the unit, verify with the Architect the color preference before ordering.

Equipment furnished with a suitable factory finish need not be painted; provided the factory applied finish is not marred or spattered. If so, equipment shall be refinished with the same paint as was factory applied.

F. All electrical conduit and equipment, fittings, hangers, structural supports, etc., in unfinished areas, such as equipment and storage room area, shall be painted two (2) coats of oil paint of colors selected by the Architect.

G. Do NOT paint electric conduits in crawl spaces, tunnels, or spaces above suspended ceilings except that where conduit is in a damp location give exposed threads at joints two coats of sealer after joint is made up.

H. After surfaces have been thoroughly cleaned and are free of oil, dirt or other foreign matter, paint all raceway and equipment with the following:

1. Bare Metal Surfaces - Apply one coat of metal primer suitable for the metal being painted.

Finish with two coats of Alkyd base enamel paint.

2. Plastic Surfaces - Paint plastic surfaces with two coats of semi-gloss acrylic latex paint.

3.9 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Thoroughly clean all equipment and systems prior to the Owner's final acceptance of the project.

B. Clean all foreign paint,
grease, oil, dirt, labels, stickers, etc. from all equipment.

C. Remove all rubbish, debris, etc., accumulated during construction from the premises.

3.10 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordinate the installation of all equipment, controls, devices, etc., with other trades to maintain clear access area for servicing.

B. Install all equipment to maximize access to parts needing service or maintenance. Review the final location, placement, and orientation of equipment with the Owner's representative prior to setting equipment.

C. Installation of equipment or devices without regard to coordination of access requirements and confirmation with the Owner's representative will result in removal and reinstallation of the equipment at the Contractor's expense.

D. Raceway and Cable Routing Restrictions: Raceways and cable are restricted from being routed in the following locations, unless serving the space or permitted by the authority having jurisdiction.

1. Elevator machine rooms and hoistways.

2. Exit enclosures.

3. Other areas restricted by code.

4. Technology, data, server rooms.

5. Fire pump and sprinkler rooms.

6. Normal power in emergency power equipment rooms: Limited to feeders and branch circuits serving the emergency power equipment located in the room.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 26 0500-21

7. Emergency power in normal power equipment rooms: Limited to feeders and branch circuits serving the normal power equipment located in the room.

E. Adhesives and Sealants: All sealers, adhesives, and sealants shall comply with the low emitting material limits of the following standards:

1. CDPH Standard Method V1.1-2010 - Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions VOC from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers Version 1.1.

3.11 SYSTEM STARTING AND ADJUSTING
A. The electrical systems shall be complete and operating. System startup, testing, adjusting, and balancing to obtain satisfactory system performance is the responsibility of the Contractor. This includes all calibration and adjustment of electrical controls, balancing of loads, troubleshooting and verification of software, and final adjustments that may be needed.

B. Complete all manufacturer-recommended startup procedures and checklists to verify proper equipment operation and does not pose a danger to personnel or property.

C. All operating conditions and control sequences shall be tested during the start-up period. Testing all interlocks, safety shut-downs, controls, and alarms.

D. The Contractor, subcontractors, and equipment suppliers shall have skilled technicians to ensure that all systems perform properly. If the Architect/Engineer is requested to visit the job site for trouble shooting, assisting in start-up, obtaining satisfactory equipment operation, resolving installation and/or workmanship problems, equipme
nt substitution issues or unsatisfactory system performance, including call backs during the warranty period, through no fault of the design; the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner on a time and materials basis for services rendered at the Architect/Engineer's standard hourly rates in effect when the services are requested. The Contractor shall pay the Owner for services required that are product, installation or workmanship related. Payment is due within 30 days after services are rendered.

3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. General:

1. Conduct all tests required during and after construction. Submit test results in NETA format, or equivalent form, that shows the test equipment used, calibration date, tester's name, ambient test conditions, humidity, conductor length, and results corrected to 40°C.

2. Supply necessary instruments, meters, etc., for the tests. Supply competent technicians with training in the proper testing techniques.

3. All cables and wires shall be tested for shorts and grounds following installation and connection to devices. Replace shorted or grounded wires and cables.

4. Any wiring device, electrical apparatus or luminaire, if grounded or shorted on any integral "live" part, shall have all defective parts or materials replaced.

5. Test cable insulation of service and panel feeder conductors for proper insulation values. Tests shall include
the cable, all splices, and all terminations. Each conductor shall be tested and shall test free of short circuits and grounds and have an insulation value not less than Electrical Code Standards. Take readings between conductors, and between conductors and ground.

6. If the results obtained in the tests are not satisfactory, make adjustments, replacements, and changes as needed. Then repeat the tests, and make additional tests, as the Architect/Engineer or authority having jurisdiction deems necessary.

1. Test: Perform ground-fault performance testing when system is installed. The test process shall use primary current injection per manufacturer instruction and procedures. Perform test for the following:
a. Service disconnects
b. Solid state molded case circuit breakers and solid-state insulated case circuit breakers equipped with ground fault protection.
c. Fusible switches with ground fault relay protection. d. Outside branch circuits and feeders.
e. Code required.

2. Report: Provide copy of test result report with Operation and Maintenance manuals. Provide report to Authority Having Jurisdiction when requested.

C. Arc Energy Reduction Equipment Performance Testing:

1. Test: Perform arc energy protection performance testing when system is installed. The test process shall use primary current injection or approved method per manufacturer instructions and procedures. Perform test for the following:
a. All arc energy reduction systems installed.

2. Report: Provide copy of test result report with Operation and Maintenance manuals. Provide report to Authority Having Jurisdiction when requested.

D. Other Equipment:

1. Give other equipment furnished and installed by the Contractor all standard tests normally made to assure that the equipment is electrically sound, all connections properly made, phase rotation correct, fuses and thermal elements suitable for protection against overloads, voltage complies with equipment nameplate rating, and full load amperes are within equipment rating.

E. If any test results are not satisfact
ory, make adjustments, replacements and changes as needed and repeat the tests and make additional tests as the Architect/Engineer or authority having jurisdiction deem necessary.

3.13 UTILITY REBATE
A. Submit utility rebate forms, where offered at project location, with rebate items completed. Rebate may include lighting, lighting controls, variable speed drives, heat pumps, package terminal A/C, air conditioners, chillers, water heaters, programmable thermostats, and motors.

B. Contractor must submit notification of any value engineering or product substitution that will affect the utility rebate amount prior to approval.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 26 0500-23

1. Penetrations of fire-rated construction fire sealed in accordance with specifications.

2. Electrical panels have typed circuit identification.

3. Smoke and fire/smoke dampers are wired and have been tested.

4. Operation and Maintenance manuals have been submitted as per Section 26 0500.

5. Bound copies of approved shop drawings have been submitted as per Section 26 0500.

6. Report of instruction of Owner's representative has been submitted as per Section 26 0500.

7. Fire alarm inspection and testing report has been submitted as per Sections 26 05 00 and 28 31 00.

8. Start-up reports from factory representative have been submitted as per Section 26 0500.

Accepted by:

It is understood that if the Architec
t/Engineer finds the job not ready for the final observation and that additional trips and observations are required to bring the project to completion, the costs incurred by the Architect/Engineers for additional time and expenses will be deducted from the Contractor's contract retainage prior to final payment at the completion of the job.

END OF SECTION 26 0500
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 26 0500-24
(This Page Intentionally Left Blank)
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SECTION 26 0503-1
SECTION 26 0503 - THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Through-Penetration Firestopping.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section.

B. Installer: Individuals performing work shall be certified by the manufacturer of the system selected for installation.

1.3 REFERENCES
A. UL 263 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials B. UL 723 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials C. ANSI/UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through Penetration Firestops D. UL 2079 - Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems E. UL Fire Resistance Directory Through Penetration Firestop Systems (XHEZ) F. Intertek / Warnock Hersey - Directory of Listed Products G. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials H. ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops I. 2021 International Building Code
J. NFPA 5000 - Building Construction Safety Code
K. CBC California Building Code

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 26 0500.

B. Submit Firestopping Installers Certification for all installers on the project.

C. Maintain a notebook on the job site at all times that contains copies of approved submittals for all through penetration firestopping to be installed. Notebook shall be made available to the Authority Having Jurisdiction at their request and turned over to the Owner at the end of construction as part of the O&M Manuals.

Submit VOC rating of firestopping material in g/L (less water) with documentation that it meets the limits set forth in BAAQMD Rule 1168.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SECTION 26 0503-2

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store, protect and handle products on site. Accept material on site in factory containers and packing.

Inspect for damage. Protect from deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes. Follow manufacturer's instructions for storage.

B. Install material prior to expiration of product shelf life.

1. Fire-resistance-rated walls including fire partitions, fire barriers, and smoke barriers.

2. Fire-resistance-rated horizontal assemblies including floors, floor/ceiling assemblies, and ceiling membranes of roof/ceiling assemblies.

B. Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with the following ratings determined per UL 1479:

1. F-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with F-ratings indicated, but not less than that equaling or exceeding fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.

2. L-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with L-ratings of not more than 5.0 CFM/sq.ft. at both ambient temperature and 400°F.

D. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.

E. For through-penetration firestop systems in air plenums, provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 50, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.

F. Adhesives and Sealants: All sealers, adhesives, and sealants shall comply with the low emitting material limits of the following standards:

1. CDPH Standard Method V1.1-2010 - Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions VOC from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers Version 1.1.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SECTION 26 0503-3

1. Review foreseeable methods related to firestopping work.

1.8 WARRANTY
A. Provide one year warranty on parts and labor.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

1. 3M; Fire Protection Products Division

2. Hilti, Inc.

B. All firestopping materials shall be free of asbestos, lead, PCB's, and other materials that would require hazardous waste removal.

C. Firestopping shall be flexible to allow for normal penetrating item movement due to expansion and contraction.

Provide firestopping systems capable of supporting floor loads where systems are exposed to possible floor loading or traffic.

E. Provide firestopping systems allowing continuous insulation for all insulated pipes.

F. Provide firestopping systems classified by UL or listed by Intertek / Warnock Hersey for penetrations through all fire rated construction. Firestopping systems shall be selected from the UL or listed by Intertek / Warnock Hersey Fire Resistance Directory Category XHEZ based on substrate construction and penetrating item size and material and shall fall within the range of numbers listed:

1. Combustible Framed Floors and Chase Walls - 1 or 2 Hour Rated:
a. F Rating = Floor/Wall Rating
b. L Rating = Penetrations in Smoke Barriers
Penetrating Item UL System No.

No Penetrating Item FC 0000-0999*
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SECTION 26 0503-4
Penetrating Item UL System No.

Metallic Pipe or Conduit FC 1000-1999
Non-Metallic Pipe or Conduit FC 2000-2999
Electrical Cables FC 3000-3999
Cable Trays FC 4000-4999
Insulated Pipes FC 5000-5999
Bus Duct and Misc. Electrical FC 6000-6999
Duct without Damper and Misc. Mechanical FC 7000-7999
Multiple Penetrations FC 8000-8999
*Alternate method of firestopping is patching opening to match original rated construction.

Penetrating Item UL System No.

G. Any opening in walls or floors not covered by the listed series of numbers shall be coordinated with the firestopping manufacturer.

H. Any openings in floors or walls not described in the UL or listed by Intertek / Warnock Hersey Fire Resistance Directory, or outlined in manufacturer's information shall be sealed in a manner agreed upon by the Firestopping Manufacturer, Owner, and the Authority Having Jurisdiction.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

B. Ensure substrate and penetrating items have been permanently installed prior to installing firestopping systems. Ensure penetrating items have been properly spaced and have proper clearance prior to installing firestopping systems.

C. Surfaces to which sealing materials are to be installed must meet the selected UL or Intertek / Warnock Hersey system substrate criteria.

D. Prime substrates where recommended in writing by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer. Confine primer to area of bond.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SECTION 26 0503-5

C. Install dams as required to properly contain firestopping materials within openings and as required to achieve required fire resistance rating. Remove combustible damming after appropriate curing.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that through-penetration firestop systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deteri oration occurs, remove damaged or
deteriorated through-penetration firestop systems immediately and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements.

3.4 INSPECTION
A. All penetrations shall be inspected by the manufacturer's representative to ensure proper installation.

B. Access to firestop systems shall be maintained for examination by the Authority Having Jurisdiction at their request.

C. Proceed with enclosing through-penetration firestop system with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and firestop installations comply with requirements.

END OF SECTION 26 0503
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SECTION 26 0503-6
(This Page Intentionally Left Blank)
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING SECTION 26 0505-1
SECTION 26 0505 - ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Electrical demolition
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Materials and equipment for patching and extending work shall be as specified in individual Sections.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. THE DRAWINGS ARE INTENDED TO INDICATE THE SCOPE OF WORK REQUIRED AND DO NOT INDICATE EVERY BOX, CONDUIT, OR WIRE THAT MUST BE REMOVED. THE

CONTRACTOR SHALL VISIT THE SITE PRIOR TO SUBMITTING A BID AND VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS.

B. Where walls, ceilings, structures, etc., are indicated as being removed on general or electrical drawings, the Contractor shall be responsible for the removal of all electrical equipment, devices, fixtures, raceways, wiring, systems, etc., from the removed area.

C. Where ceilings, walls, structures, etc., are temporarily removed and replaced by others, this Contractor shall be responsible for the removal, storage, and replacement of equipment, devices, fixtures, raceways, wiring, systems, etc.

D. Where mechanical or technology equipment is indicated as being removed on electrical, mechanical, or technology drawings, the Contractor shall be responsible for disconnecting the equipment and removing all starters, VFD, controllers, electrical equipment, raceways, wiring, etc. associated with the device.

E. Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned equipment or facilities. Extend conduit and wire to facilities and equipment that will remain in operation following demolition.

Extension of conduit and wire to equipme
nt shall be compatible with the surrounding area. Extended conduit and conductors to match existing size and material.

F. Coordinate scope of work with all other Contractors and the Owner at the project site. Schedule removal of equipment and electrical service to avoid conflicts.

G. Bid submittal shall mean the Contractor has visited the project site and has verified existing conditions and scope of work.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING SECTION 26 0505-2

3.2 PREPARATION
A. The Contractor shall obtain approval from the Owner before turning off power to circuits, feeders, panels, etc. Coordinate all outages with Owner.

B. Coordinate utility service outages with Utility Company.

C. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during construction. When work must be performed on energized equipment or circuits, use personnel experienced in such operations. Assume all equipment and systems must remain operational unless specifically noted otherwise on drawings.

D. Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors, structures, and ceilings scheduled for removal.

E. Existing Electrical Service: Maintain existing system in service until new system is complete and ready for service. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Obtain permission from Owner at least 48 hours before partially or completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration.

Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area. Service changeover shall be completed on an overtime basis.

F. Existing Fire Alarm System: Maintain existing system in service until new system is accepted.

Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Obtain permission from Owner at least 48 hours before partially or completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area.Provide a watchman to make required premise
observations during all outages, requirements as dictated by codes and Owner's insurance carrier.

G. Existing Telephone System: Maintain existing system in service until new system is complete and ready for service. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Obtain permission from Owner at least 48 hours before partially or completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration.

Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area. System changeover shall be completed on an overtime basis.

3.3 DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK A. Demolish and extend existing electrical work under provisions of Division 1 of Specifications and this Section.

B. Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction.

C. Remove abandoned wiring and raceway to source of supply. Existing conduit in good condition may be reused in place by including an equipment ground conductor in reused conduit. Reused conduit and boxes shall have supports revised to meet current codes. Relocating conduit shall not be allowed.

D. Remove exposed abandoned raceway, including abandoned raceway above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut raceway flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces. Remove all associated clamps, hangers, supports, etc. associated with raceway removal.

E. Disconnect and remove outlets and devices that are to be demolished. Remove conduit, supports, and conductors back to source. Devices' back box and conduit mounted in walls that are to remai n can be
abandoned in place. Provide appropriate cover plate for all abandoned back boxes. Cover plates shall match existing plates used in the adjacent areas.

F. Disconnect and remove abandoned panelboards and distribution equipment.

H. Disconnect and remove abandoned luminaires. Remove brackets, stems, hangers, and other accessories. Ballasts in light fixtures installed prior to 1980 shall be incinerated in EPA approved incinerator or disposed of in EPA certified containers and deposited in an EPA landfill certified for PCB disposal or recycled by permitted ballast recycler. Punctured or leaking ballasts must be disposed of according to Federal Regulations under the Toxic Substance Control Act. Provide Owner and Architect/Engineer with a Certificate of Destruction to verify proper disposal.

I. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work. Patch openings to match existing surrounding finishes.

J. Maintain access to existing electrical installations that remain active. Modify installation or provide junction boxes and access panel as appropriate.

K. Extend existing installations using materials and methods compatible with existing electrical installations, or as specified. Extended conduit and conductors to match existing size and material.

L. HID and fluorescent lamps, determined by the Toxicity Characteristic Leachate procedure (TCLP), to be hazardous waste shall be disposed of in an EPA-permitted hazardous waste disposal facility or by a permitted lamp recycler.

M. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulat
ions of authorities having jurisdiction.

N. This Contractor is responsible for all costs incurred in repair, relocations, or replacement of any cables, conduits, or other services if damaged without proper investigation.

3.4 EXISTING ENCLOSURES - NEW EQUIPMENT
A. Existing enclosures may be reused to house new equipment including branch panels, industrial controls, and similar systems pending documented verification of the following provided with the applicable new equipment submittals.

1. New equipment or panelboard is listed for the existing enclosure or application.

2. Existing enclosure and new equipment is field evaluated by the manufacturer or nationally recognized testing laboratory for the available fault current, condition, and application.

3. Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) approval.

3.5 CLEANING AND REPAIR
A. Clean and repair existing materials and equipment that remain or are to be reused.

B. Panelboards: Clean exposed surfaces and check tightness of electrical connections. Replace damaged circuit breakers and provide closure plates for vacant positions. Provide typed circuit directory showing revised circuiting arrangement.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING SECTION 26 0505-4
C. ELECTRICAL ITEMS (E.G., LIGHTING FIXTURES, RECEPTACLES, SWITCHES, CONDUIT, WIRE, ETC.) REMOVED AND NOT RELOCATED REMAIN THE PROPERTY OF THE OWNER. CONTRACTOR SHALL PLACE ITEMS RETAINED BY THE OWNER IN A LOCATION COORDINATED WITH THE OWNER. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE DISPOSAL OF MATERIAL THE OWNER DOES NOT WANT.

3.6 INSTALLATION
A. Install relocated materials and equipment under the provisions of Division 1 of Specifications.

END OF SECTION 26 0505
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 WIRE AND CABLE SECTION 26 0513-1
SECTION 26 0513 - WIRE AND CABLE
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Building wire
B. Cabling for remote control, signal, and power limited circuits

1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 26 0553 - Electrical Identification: Refer to electrical identification for color and identification labeling requirements.

1.3 REFERENCES
A. NEMA WC 70 - Power Cables Rated 2,000V or Less for the Distribution of Electrical Energy B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC)
C. CEC California Electrical Code
D. UL 44 - Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables
E. UL 83 - Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables
F. UL 854 - Service-Entrance Cables
G. UL 1581 - Standard for Electrical Wires, Cables, and Flexible Cords H. UL 2196 - Fire Resistive, Fire Resistant and Circuit Integrity Cables

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under the provisions of Section 26 0500.

B. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BUILDING WIRE
A. Feeders and Branch Circuits 8 AWG and larger: Copper, stranded conductor, 600-volt insulation, THHN/THWN or XHHW-2.

B. Feeders and Branch Circuits 8 AWG and larger in Underground Conduit: Copper, stranded conductor, 600-volt insulation, THWN or XHHW-2.

C. Control Circuits: Copper, stranded conductor 600-volt insulation, THHN/THWN.

D. Aluminum conductors are not to be used.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 WIRE AND CABLE SECTION 26 0513-2
E. Each 120 and 277-volt branch circuit shall have a dedicated neutral conductor. Neutral conductors shall be considered current-carrying conductors for wire derating.

2.2 CABLING FOR REMOTE CONTROL, SIGNAL, AND POWER LIMITED CIRCUITS A. Wire for the following specialized systems shall be as designated on the drawings, or elsewhere in these specifications. If not designated on the drawings or specifications, the system manufacturer's recommendations shall be followed.

1. Fire alarm

2. Low voltage switching and lighting control

3. Electronic control
B. Control Cable for Class 1 Remote Control and Signal Circuits: Copper conductor, 600-volt insulation, rated 60°°C, individual conductors twisted together, shielded, and covered with a PVC jacket.

C. Plenum Cable for Class 2 or Class 3 Remote Control and Signal Circuits: Copper conductor, 300- volt insulation, rated 60°°C, individual conductors twisted together, shielded, and covered with a nonmetallic jacket; UL listed for use in air handling ducts, hollow spaces used as ducts, and plenums.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WIRE AND CABLE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
A. Above Accessible Ceilings:

1. Building wire shall be installed in raceway.

B. All Other Locations: Building wire in raceway.

C. Above Grade: All conductors installed above grade shall be type "THHN".

D. Underground or In Slab: All conductors shall be type "THWN".

E. Low Voltage Cable (less than 100 volts): Low voltage cables in ducts, plenums, and other air handling spaces shall be plenum listed.

Low voltage cables in non-accessible areas shall be installed in conduit. Low voltage cable may be installed without conduit in accessible areas using the following types of cable supports. Cable support types/systems shall comply with the warranty requirements of the low voltage cable manufacturer.

1. J-hooks

2. Bridle rings with saddle supports

3.2 CONTRACTOR CHANGES
A. The basis of design is copper conductors installed in raceway based on ambient temperature of 30°C, CEC California Electrical Code edition Table 310.15(B)(16). Service entrance and fire pump feeder conductors are based on copper conductor installed in underground electrical ducts, CEC California Electrical Code Table B310.15(B)(2)(7).

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 WIRE AND CABLE SECTION 26 0513-3
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for derating and sizing conductors and conduits to equal or exceed the ampacity of the basis of design circuits, if he/she chooses to use methods or materials other than the basis of design.

C. Underground electrical duct ampacity rating shall be in accordance with CEC California Electrical Code Table B310.15(B)(2)(7). The calculations and a sketch of the proposed installation shall be submitted prior to any conduit being installed.

D. Conductor length(s) listed on plans and schedules. The drawings are diagrammatic with intent to convey the components of the electrical distribution system. Conductor length(s) when listed on plans and schedules are for engineering calculation purposes. Conductor length(s) shall NOT be used for bidding purposes.

E. Record drawing shall include the calculations and sketches.

3.3 GENERAL WIRING METHODS
A. Use no wire smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits, and no smaller than 14 AWG for control wiring.

B. Use no wire smaller than 18 AWG for low voltage control wiring below 100 volts.

C. Use 10 AWG conductor for 20 ampere, 120-volt branch circuit home runs longer than 75 feet, and for 20 ampere, 277-volt branch circuit home runs longer than 200 feet.

D. Use no wire smaller than 8 AWG for outdoor lighting circuits.

E. The ampac
ity of multiple conductors in one conduit shall be derated per the Electrical Code. In no case shall more than 4 conductors be installed in one conduit to such loads as motors larger than 1/4 HP, panelboards, motor control centers, etc.

F. Where installing parallel feeders, place an equal number of conductors for each phase of a circuit in same raceway or cable.

G. Splice only in junction or outlet boxes.

H. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards.

I. Make conductor lengths for parallel circuits equal.

J. All conductors shall be continuous in conduit from last outlet to their termination.

K. Terminate all spare conductors on terminal blocks, and label the spare conductors.

L. Cables or wires shall not be laid out on the ground before pulling.

M. Cables or wires shall not be dragged over earth or paving.

N. Care shall be taken so as not to subject the cable or wire to high mechanical stresses that would cause damage to the wire and cable.

O. At least six (6)-inch loops or ends shall be left at each outlet for installation connection of luminaires or other devices.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 WIRE AND CABLE SECTION 26 0513-4
P. All wires in outlet boxes not connected to fixtures or other devices shall be rolled up, spliced if continuity of circuit is required, and insulated.

3.4 WIRING INSTALLATION IN RACEWAYS
A. Pull all conductors into a raceway at the same time. Use UL listed wire pulling lubricant for pulling 4 AWG and larger wires. Do not use wire pulling lubricant for isolated (ungrounded) power system wiring.

B. Install wire in raceway after interior of building has been physically protected from the weather and all mechanical work likely to injure conductors has been completed.

C. Pulling shall be continuous without unnecessary stops and starts with wire or cable only partially through raceway.

D. Where reels of cable or wire are used, they shall be set up on jacks close to the point where the wire or cable enters the conduit or duct so that the cable or wire may be unreeled and run into the conduit or duct with a minimum of change in the direction of the bend.

E. Conductors shall not be pulled through conduits until plastering or masonry work is completed and conduits are free from moisture. Care shall be taken so that long pulls of wire or pulls around several bends are not made where the wire may be permanently stretched and the insulation damaged.

Only nylon rope shall be permitted to pull cables into conduit and ducts.

G. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway system before installing conductors.

H. Conductor Supports in Vertical Raceways:

1. Support conductors in vertical raceways in accordance with the Electrical Code Spacing of Conductors Supports.

2. Supports shall be of insulated wedge type (OZ Gedney Type S, or equal) and installed in a tapered insulated bushing fitting or a metal woven mesh with a support ring that fits inside conduit fitting installed in an accessible junction box (Hubbell Kellems support grip or equal).

3.5 CABLE INSTALLATION
A. Provide protection for exposed cables where subject to damage.

B. Use suitable cable fittings and connectors.

C. Run all open cable parallel or perpendicular to walls, ceilings, and exposed structural members.

Follow the routing as illustrated on the drawings as closely as possible. Cable routing on drawings scaled 1/4"=1'-0" or less shall be considered diagrammatical, unless noted otherwise. The correct routing, when shown diagrammatically, shall be chosen by the Contractor based on information in the contract documents; in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions, applicable codes, the NECA's "Standard of Installation", recognized industry standards; and coordinated with other contractors.

D. Open cable
shall be supported by the appropriate size J-hooks or other means if called for on the drawings. Wire and cable from different systems shall not be installed in the same J-hook. J-hooks shall be sized with 20% spare capacity. J-hooks shall provide proper bend radius support for data cable and fiber cables.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 WIRE AND CABLE SECTION 26 0513-5
E. Open cable installed above suspended ceilings shall not rest on the suspended ceiling construction, nor utilize the ceiling support system for wire and cable support.

F. J-hook support spans shall be based on the smaller of the manufacturer's load ratings and code requirements. In no case shall horizontal spans exceed 5 feet and vertical spans exceed 4 feet. All J- hooks shall be installed where completely accessible and not blocked by piping, ductwork, inaccessible ceilings, etc. J-hooks shall be independently rigidly attached to a structural element. J- hooks shall be installed to provide 2" horizontal separation and 6" vertical separation between systems.

G. Open cable shall only be installed where specifically shown on the drawings, or permitted in these specifications.

3.6 WIRING CONNECTIONS AND TERMINATIONS
A. Splice and tap only in accessible junction boxes.

B. Use solderless, tin-plated copper, compression terminals (lugs) applied with circumferential crimp for conductor terminations, 8 AWG and larger.

C. Use solderless, tin-plated, compression terminals (lugs) applied with indenter crimp for copper conductor terminations, 10 AWG and smaller.

D. Use solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper wire splices and taps, 8 AWG and smaller. For 10 AWG and smaller, use insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps.

E. Use compression connectors applied with circumferential crimp for conductor splices and taps, 6
AWG and larger. Tape uninsulated conductors and connectors with electrical tape to 150 percent of the insulation value of conductor.

F. Thoroughly clean wires before installing lugs and connectors.

G. Make splices, taps and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors without perceptible temperature rise.

H. Phase Sequence: All apparatus shall be connected to operate in the phase sequence A-B-C representing the time sequence in which the phase conductors so identified reach positive maximum voltage.

I. As a general rule, applicable to switches, circuit breakers, starters, panelboards, switchgear and the like, the connections to phase conductors are intended thus:

1. Facing the front and operating side of the equipment, the phase identification shall be:
a. Left to Right - A-B-C
b. Top to Bottom - A-B-C
J. Connection revisions as required to achieve correct rotation of motors shall be made at the load terminals of the starters or disconnect switches.

K. Use antioxidant joint compound on all aluminum conductor terminations. Apply antioxidant joint compound per manufacturer's recommendations.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 WIRE AND CABLE SECTION 26 0513-6

3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Division 1.

B. Building Wire and Power Cable Testing: Perform an insulation-resistance test on each conductor with respect to ground and adjacent conductors. Test shall be made by means of a low-resistance ohmmeter, such as a "Megger". The applied potential shall be 500 volts dc for 300 volt rated cable and 1000 volts dc for 600 volt rated cable. The test duration shall be one minute. Insulation resistance must be greater than 100 mega-ohm for 600 volt and 25 mega-ohm for 300 volt rated cables per NETA Acceptance Testing Standard. Verify uniform resistance of parallel conductors.

C. MI cable shall have the insulation resistance of each cable tested with a 500-volt dc megohmeter prior to energizing the cables. Tabulate resistance values and submit to Architect/Engineer for acceptance.

D. Inspect wire and cable for physical damage and proper connection.

E. Torque test conductor connections and terminations to manufacturer's recommended values.

F. Perform continuity test on all power and equipment branch circuit conductors. Verify proper phasing connections.

G. Protection of wire and cable from foreign materials:

1. It is the Contractor's responsibility to provide adequate physical protection to prevent foreign material application or contact with any wire or cable type. Foreign mate rial is defined as any
material that would negatively impact the validity of the manufacturer's performance warranty. This includes, but is not limited to, overspray of paint (accidental or otherwise), drywall compound, or any other surface chemical, liquid, or compound that could come in contact with the cable, cable jacket, or cable termination components.

H. Overspray of paint on any wire or cable will not be accepted. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to replace any component containing overspray, in its entirety, at no additional cost to the project. Cleaning of the cables with harsh chemicals is not allowed.

END OF SECTION 26 0513
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 GROUNDING AND BONDING SECTION 26 0526-1
SECTION 26 0526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Equipment grounding system

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in Electrical Code, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. Comply with UL 467 Grounding and Bonding Equipment.

C. Comply with NFPA 780 and UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system.

D. Comply with Electrical Code; for overhead-line construction and medium-voltage underground construction, comply with IEEE/ANSI C2 National Electrical Safety Code (NESC).

1.3 REFERENCES
A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC)
B. CEC California Electrical Code
C. NFPA 99 - Standard for Healthcare Facilities

1.4 SUMMARY
A. This section includes grounding of electrical systems and equipment. Grounding requirements specified in this Section may be supplemented by special requirements of systems described in other Sections.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
A. For insulated conductors, comply with Division 26 Section 26 0513 "Wire and Cable".

B. Material: Copper.

C. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Insulated. Refer to Section 26 0553 for insulation color.

D. Grounding Electrode Conductors: Stranded cable.

E. Underground Conductors: Bare, tinned, stranded, unless otherwise indicated.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 GROUNDING AND BONDING SECTION 26 0526-2
F. GB; Grounding Bar:

1. Bare, annealed copper bars of rectangular cross section, with insulators. 1/4" x 2", length of technology or applicable room.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONNECTIONS
A. Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: For No. 8 AWG and larger, use pressure-type grounding lugs. No. 10 AWG and smaller grounding conductors may be terminated with winged pressure-type connectors.

B. Noncontact Metal Raceway Terminations: If metallic raceways terminate at metal housings without mechanical and electrical connection to housing, terminate each conduit with a grounding bushing. Connect grounding bushings with a bare grounding conductor to grounding bus or terminal in housing. Bond electrically non-continuous conduits at entrances and exits with grounding bushings and bare grounding conductors, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Underground Connections: Exothermic-welded connections. Use for underground connections, except those at test wells.

D. Connections at back boxes, junction boxes, pull boxes, and equipment terminations: The equipment grounding conductor(s) associated with all circuits in the box shall be connected together and to the box using a suitable grounding screw. The removal of the respective receptacle, luminaire, or other device served by the box shall not interrupt the grounding continuity. The connection to the non-metallic boxes shall be made to any metallic fitting or device requiring grounding.

E. Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and bonding connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A.

F. Moisture Protection: If insulated grounding conductors are connected to ground rods or grounding buses, insulate entire area of connection and seal against moisture penetration of insulation and cable.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Use only copper conductors for both insulated and bare grounding conductors in direct contact with earth, concrete, masonry, crushed stone, and similar materials.

B. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise indicated. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage. Each grounding conductor that passes through a below grade wall must be provided with a waterstop.

C. Grounding electrode conductor (GEC) shall be protected from physical damage by rigid polyvinyl chloride conduit (PVC) in exposed locations.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 GROUNDING AND BONDING SECTION 26 0526-3
D. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install so vibration by equipment mounted on vibration isolation hangers and supports is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations, unless a disconnect-type connection is required; then use a bolted clamp. Bond straps directly to the basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. Install straps only in locations accessible for maintenance.

E. In raceways, use insulated equipment grounding conductors.

F. Underground Grounding Conductors: Use tinned copper conductor, No. 2/0 AWG minimum.

Bury at least 24 inches below grade or bury 12 inches above duct bank when installed as part of the duct bank.

G. Grounding Bus: Install in electrical and telephone equipment rooms, in rooms housing service equipment, below access floors, and elsewhere as indicated, with bolted connections to form a continuous ground path.

3.3 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING SYSTEM
A. Comply with Electrical Code, for types, sizes, and quantities of equipment grounding conductors, unless specific types, larger sizes, or more conductors than required by Electrical Code are indicated.

B. Install equipment grounding conductors in all feeders and circuits. Terminate each end on a grounding lug or bus.

C. Install insulated equipment grounding conductor with circuit conductors for the following items, in addition to those required by Electrical Code:

1. Lighting and receptacle circuits. Terminate each end on a grounding lug or bus.

2. Single-phase and three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.

3. Flexible raceway runs, including FMC and LFMC.

D. Busway Supply Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor from the grounding bus in the switchgear, switchboard, or distribution panel to equipment grounding bar terminal on busway.

E. Computer Outlet Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor in branch-circuit runs from computer-area power panels or power-distribution units.

F. Nonmetallic Raceways: Install an equipment grounding conductor in nonmetallic raceways unless they are designated for telephone or data cables.

3.4 CONCRETE OR WOOD BUILDING GROUNDING SYSTEM
A. Provide a copper common grounding electrode conductor for the attachment of multiple separately derived systems in accordance with Electrical Code. Individual grounding conductor taps from the separately derived systems to the common grounding electrode shall be sized in accordance with Electrical Code. All tap connections shall be made in an accessible location in such a manner that common grounding electrode conductor remains without a splice or joint.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect grounding and bonding system conductors and connections for tightness and proper installation.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 GROUNDING AND BONDING SECTION 26 0526-4

1. Measure ground resistance from system neutral connection at service entrance to convenient ground reference points using suitable ground testing equipment. Resistance shall not exceed 5 ohms.

2. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing:
a. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements.
b. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground- resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, and at ground test wells. Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after the last trace of precipitation, and without the soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance. Perform tests, by the fall-of- potential method according to IEEE 81.
c. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect/Engineer promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.

3.6 GRADING AND PLANTING
A. Restore surface features, including vegetation, at areas disturbed by Work of this Section.

Reestablish original grades, unless otherwise indicated. If sod has been removed, replace it as soon as possible after backfilling is completed. Restore areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other activities to their original condition. Include application of topsoil, fertilizer, lime, seed, sod, sprig, and mulch. Comply with Division 2. Maintain restored surfaces. Restore disturbed paving.

END OF SECTION 26 0526
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 SUPPORTING DEVICES SECTION 26 0527-1
SECTION 26 0527 - SUPPORTING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Conduit and Equipment Supports
B. Concrete Housekeeping Pads

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Support systems shall be adequate for weight of equipment and conduit, including wiring, which they carry.

1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size, shape and location of concrete pads with section on Cast-in-Place Concrete or Concrete Topping.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Allied Support Systems
B. Cooper B-Line
C. Erico, Inc.

D. Hilti
E. Power Fasteners
F. Orbit Industries

2.2 MATERIAL
A. Support Channel: Hot-dip galvanized for wet/damp locations; painted steel for interior/dry locations. All field cut ends shall be touched up with matching finish to inhibit rusting.

B. Hardware: Corrosion resistant.

C. Anchorage and Structural Attachment Components:

1. Strength: Defined in reports by ICBO Evaluation Service or another agency acceptable to Authorities Having Jurisdiction.
a. Structural Safety Factor: Strength in tension and shear of components used shall be at least two times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be subjected.

2. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 SUPPORTING DEVICES SECTION 26 0527-2

3. Welding Lugs: Comply with MSS-SP-69, Type 57.

4. Beam clamps for Steel Beams and Joists: Double sided or concentric open web joist hangars. Single-sided type is not acceptable.

5. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchors: Neoprene units designed for seismically rated rigid equipment mountings and matched to the type and size of anchor bolts and studs used.

6. Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene elements and steel sleeves designed for seismically rated rigid equipment mountings and matched to the type and size of attachment devices used.

7. Concrete Anchors: Fasten to concrete using cast-in or post-installed anchors designed per the requirements of Appendix D of ACI 318-05. Post-installed anchors shall be qualified for use in cracked concrete by ACI-355.2.

8. Masonry Anchors: Fasten to concrete masonry units with expansion anchors or self- tapping masonry screws. For expansion anchors into hollow concrete block, use sleeve- type anchors designed for the specific application. Do not fasten in masonry joints. Do not use powder-actual fasteners, wooden plugs, or plastic inserts.

D. Concrete Housekeeping Pads:

1. Concrete bases for all floor mounted equipment and wall mounted equipment which is surface mounted and extends to within 6" of the finished floor, unless shown otherwise on the drawings, shall be 3-1/2" thick concrete.

2. Bases shall extend 3" on all sides of the equipment (6" larger than factory base).

3. Where the base is less than 12" from a wall, the base shall be carried to the wall to prevent a "dirt-trap".

4. Concrete materials and workmanship required for the Contractor's work shall be provided by the Contractor. Materials and workmanship shall conform to the applicable standards of the Portland Cement Association. Reinforce with 6" x 6", W1.4-W1.4 welded wire fabric. Concrete shall withstand 3,000 pounds compression per square inch at twenty- eight days.

E. Rooftop Support System:

1. Provide pre-fabricated roof supports for all conduit and equipment installed above the roof. Support all conduit and equipment a minimum of 4" above roof.

2. Support system shall be compatible with single ply, bituminous, metal, and spray foam roof systems. The base shall be rounded to prevent damage to the roof, and drainage holes shall prevent ponding of water in the support.

3. All metal components shall be hot dipped galvanized. Mounting hardware shall be stainless steel or hot dipped galvanized. Support shall be UV, corrosion, and freeze/thaw resistant. Support shall include orange paint, reflective safety orange accents, or similar markings for increased visibility.

4. Products:
a. Anvil International HBS-Base Series
b. Cooper B-Line Dura-Blok
c. Erico Caddy Pyramid 50, 150, 300, or 600 (to match load).

F. Truss and Joist Support System: Provided the installation complies with all loading requirements of truss and joist manufacturers, the following practices are acceptable:

1. Loads of 100 lbs. or less may be attached anywhere along the top or bottom chords of trusses or joists with a minimum 3' spacing between loads.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 SUPPORTING DEVICES SECTION 26 0527-3

4. If conditions cannot be met, coordinate installation with truss or joist manufacturer and contact Architect/Engineer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Fasten hanger rods, conduit clamps, and outlet and junction boxes to building structure using expansion anchors in concrete and beam clamps on structural steel.

B. Trapeze support installation: Cut hanger rods back at trapeze supports so they do not extend more than 3/4" below bottom face of lowest fastener and blunt any sharp edges.

C. Use toggle bolts or hollow wall fasteners in hollow masonry, plaster, or gypsum board partitions and walls; expansion anchors or preset inserts in solid masonry walls; self-drilling anchors or expansion anchor on concrete surfaces; sheet metal screws in sheet metal studs; and wood screws in wood construction.

D. Do not fasten supports to ceiling systems, piping, ductwork, mechanical equipment, or conduit, unless otherwise noted.

E. Do not use powder-actuated anchors without specific permission.

F. Do not drill structural steel members.

G. Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel, rigidly welded or bolted to present a neat appearance. Use hexagon head bolts with spring lock washers under all nuts.

H. In wet locations and on all building floors below exterior earth grade install free-standing electrical equipment on concrete pads.

I. Install cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors. Provide horizontal backing/support framing in stud walls for rigid mounting. Provide steel channel supports to stand surface-mounted panelboard or cabinet one inch off wall.

J. Bridge studs top and bottom with channels to support flush-mounted cabinets and panelboards in stud walls.

K. Do not exceed 25 lbs. per hanger and a minimum spacing of 2'-0" on center when attaching to metal roof decking (excludes concrete on metal deck). This 25 lbs. load and 2'-0" spacing include adjacent electrical and mechanical items hanging from deck. If the hanger restrictions cannot be achieved, supplemental framing off steel framing will need to be added.

L. Refer to Section 26 0533 for special conduit supporting requirements.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 SUPPORTING DEVICES SECTION 26 0527-4

3.2 FINISH
A. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and above suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed.

B. Trim all ends of exposed field fabricated steel hangers, slotted channel and threaded rod to within 1" of support or fastener to eliminate potential injury to personnel unless shown otherwise on the drawings. Smooth ends and install elastomeric insulation with two coats of latex paint if exposed steel is within 6'-6" of finish floor and presents potential injury to personnel.

END OF SECTION 26 0527
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 CONDUIT AND BOXES SECTION 26 0533-1
SECTION 26 0533 - CONDUIT AND BOXES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Rigid metallic conduit and fittings (RMC)
B. Intermediate metallic conduit and fittings (IMC)
C. Electrical metallic tubing and fittings (EMT)
D. Flexible metallic conduit and fittings (FMC)
E. Electrical connection
F. Pull and junction boxes
G. Accessories

1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 26 0553 - Electrical Identification: Refer to electrical identification for color and identification labeling requirements.

1.3 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

1. ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc-Coated

2. ANSI C80.3 - Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc-Coated and Fittings

3. ANSI C80.4 - Fittings for Rigid Metal Conduit and Electrical Metallic Tubing

4. ANSI C80.6 - Intermediate Metal Conduit, Zinc Coated

5. ANSI/NEMA OS 1 - Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports

6. ANSI/NEMA OS 2 - Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports B. Federal Specifications (FS):

1. A-A-50553A - Fittings for Conduit, Metal, Rigid, (Thick-Wall and Thin-Wall (EMT) Type

2. A-A-55810 - Specification for Flexible Metal Conduit C. NECA "Standards of Installation"
D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

1. ANSI/NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing and Cable

2. RN 1 - Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit, Rigid Aluminum Conduit, and Intermediate Metal Conduit

3. TC 2 - Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit

4. TC 9 - Fitti
ngs for PVC Plastic Utilities Duct for Underground Installation IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 CONDUIT AND BOXES SECTION 26 0533-2
E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC)
F. CEC California Electrical Code
G. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): Applicable Listings

1. UL 1 - Flexible Metal Conduit

2. UL 6 - Rigid Metal Conduit

3. UL 360 - Liquid Tight Flexible Steel Conduit

4. UL514-B - Conduit Tubing and Cable Fittings

5. UL651-A - Type EB and a PVC Conduit and HDPE Conduit

6. UL651-B - Continuous Length HDPE Conduit

7. UL746A - Standard for Polymeric Materials - Short Term Property Evaluations

8. UL797 - Electrical Metal Tubing

9. UL1242 - Intermediate Metal Conduit
H. Definitions:

1. Fittings: Conduit connection or coupling.

2. Body: Enlarged fittings with opening allowing access to the conductors for pulling purposes only.

3. Mechanical Spaces: Enclosed areas, usually kept separated from the general public, where the primary use is to house service equipment and to route services. These spaces generally have exposed structures, bare concrete and non-architecturally emphasized finishes.

4. Finished Spaces: Enclosed areas where the primary use is to house personnel and the general public. These spaces generally have architecturally emphasized finishes, ceilings and/or floors.

5. Concealed: Not visible by the general public. Often indicates a location either above the ceiling, in the walls, in or beneath the floor slab, in column coverings, or in the ceiling construction.

6. Above Grade: Not directly in contact with the earth. For exampl e, an interior wall located at an
elevation below the finished grade shall be considered above grade but a wall retaining earth shall be considered below grade.

7. Slab: Horizontal pour of concrete used for a floor or sub-floor.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Include fittings and conduits 1.5" and larger in coordination files. Include all in--floor and underfloor conduit in coordination files. Refer to Section 26 0500 for coordination drawing requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RIGID METALLIC CONDUIT (RMC) AND FITTINGS
A. Manufacturers:

1. Allied

2. LTV

3. Steelduct

4. Calbond Calpipe

5. Wheatland Tube Co
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 CONDUIT AND BOXES SECTION 26 0533-3

6. O-Z Gedney

7. or approved equal.

B. Manufacturers of RMC Conduit Fittings:

1. Appleton Electric

2. O-Z/Gedney Co.

3. Electroline

4. Raco

5. Bridgeport

6. Midwest

7. Regal

8. Thomas & Betts

9. Crouse-Hinds

10. Killark

11. Orbit Industries

12. or approved equal.

C. Minimum Size Galvanized Steel: 3/4 inch, unless otherwise noted.

D. Fittings and Conduit Bodies:

1. End Bell Fittings: Malleable iron, hot dip galvanized, threaded flare type with provisions for mounting to form.

2. Expansion Joints: Malleable iron and hot dip galvanized providing a minimum of 4 inches of movement. Fitting shall be watertight with an insulating bushing and a bonding jumper.

3. Expansion Joint for Concrete Encased Conduit: Neoprene sleeve with bronze end coupling, stainless steel bands and tinned copper braid bonding jumper. Fittings shall be watertight and concrete-tight.

4. Conduit End Bushings: Malleable iron type with molded-on high impact phenolic thermosetting insulation. Where required elsewhere in the contract documents, bushing shall be complete with ground conductor saddle and clamp. High impact phenolic threaded type bushings are not acceptable.

5. All other fittings and conduit bodies shall be of malleable iron construction and hot dip galvanized.

E. PVC Externally Coated Conduit: Compliant with UL 6, ANSI C80.1 and NEMA RN 1; rigid galvanized steel conduit with external 40 mil PVC coating and internal 2 mil urethane coating surface.

All fitti
ngs and conduit bodies shall be complete with coating. Threads shall be hot galvanized and coated with a clear coat of urethane. The PVC coated system shall include necessary PVC coated fittings, boxes and covers to form a complete encapsulated system.

1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Calbond Calpipe
b. Robroy
c. T&B Ocal
d. or approved equal.

2.2 INTERMEDIATE METALLIC CONDUIT (IMC) AND FITTINGS
A. Minimum Size Galvanized Steel: 3/4 inch, unless otherwise noted.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 CONDUIT AND BOXES SECTION 26 0533-4
B. Manufacturers:

1. Allied

2. LTV

3. Steelduct

4. Wheatland Tube Co

5. O-Z Gedney

6. or approved equal.

C. Fittings and Conduit Bodies:

1. End Bell Fittings: Malleable iron, hot dip galvanized, threaded flare type with provisions for mounting to form.

2. Expansion Joints: Malleable iron and hot dip galvanized providing a minimum of 4 inches of movement. Fitting shall be watertight with an insulating bushing and a bonding jumper.

5. All other fittings and conduit bodies shall be of malleable iron construction and hot dip galvanized.

2.3 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) AND FITTINGS
A. Minimum Size Electrical Metallic Tubing: 3/4 inch, unless otherwise noted.

B. Manufacturers of EMT Conduit:

1. Allied

2. Calbond Calpipe

3. LTV

4. Steelduct

5. Wheatland Tube Co

6. or approved equal.

C. Fittings and Conduit Bodies:

1. 2" Diameter or Smaller: Compression type of steel designed for their specific application.

2. 1/2" and 3/4" Conduit: Push-on connectors and couplers with locking ring and washer of zinc plated steel, listed
for use in dry locations.

3. Larger than 2": Compression type of steel designed for their specific application.

4. Manufacturers of EMT Conduit Fittings:
a. Appleton Electric
b. O-Z/Gedney Co.
c. Electroline
d. Raco
e. Bridgeport
f. Midwest
g. Regal
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 CONDUIT AND BOXES SECTION 26 0533-5
h. Thomas & Betts
i. Orbit Industries
j. or approved equal.

2.4 FLEXIBLE METALLIC CONDUIT (FMC) AND FITTINGS
A. Minimum Size Galvanized Steel: 3/4 inch, unless otherwise noted. Lighting branch circuit wiring to an individual luminaire may be a manufactured, UL listed 3/8" flexible metal conduit and fittings with #14 AWG THHN conductors and an insulated ground wire. Maximum length of 3/8" FMC shall be six (6) feet.

B. Manufacturers:

1. American Flex

2. Alflex

3. Electri-Flex Co

4. or approved equal.

C. Construction: Flexible steel, approved for conduit ground, zinc coated, threadless type formed from a continuous length of spirally wound, interlocked zinc coated strip steel. Provide a separate equipment grounding conductor when used for equipment where flexibility is required.

D. Fittings and Conduit Bodies:

1. Threadless hinged clamp type, galvanized zinc coated cadmium plated malleable cast iron or screw-in type, die-cast zinc.

2. Fittings and conduit bodies shall include plastic or cast metal inserts supplied by the manufacturer to protect conductors from sharp edges.

3. Manufacturers:
a. O-Z/Gedney Co.
b. Thomas & Betts
c. Appleton Electric
d. Electroline
e. Bridgeport
f. Midwest
g. Regal
h. Orbit Industries
i. or approved equal.

2.5 ECONN; ELECTRICAL CONNECTION
A. Electrical connection to equipment and motors, sized per Electrical Code. Coordinate requirements with contractor furnishing equipment or motor. Refer to specifications and general installation notes for terminations to motors.

2.6 JB; PULL AND JUNCTIO

N BOXES
A. Sheet Metal Boxes: ANSI/NEMA OS 1; galvanized steel.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 CONDUIT AND BOXES SECTION 26 0533-6
B. Sheet metal boxes larger than 12 inches in any dimension that contain terminations or components:

Continuous hinged enclosure with 1/4 turn latch and white back panel for mounting terminal blocks and electrical components.

C. Cast Metal Boxes for Outdoor and Wet Location Installations: NEMA 250; Type 4 and Type 6, flat- flanged, surface-mounted junction box, UL listed as raintight. Galvanized cast iron box and cover with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless steel cover screws.

D. Cast Metal Boxes for Underground Installations: NEMA 250; Type 4, inside flanged, recessed cover box for flush mounting, UL listed as raintight. Galvanized cast iron box and plain cover with neoprene gasket and stainless steel cover screws.

E. Flanged type boxes shall be used where installed flush in wall.

2.7 ACCESSORIES
A. Fire Rated Moldable Pads: UL #9700, moldable sheet putty at required thickness on all five sides of back boxes. Kinetics Noise Control - IsoBacker Pad, SpecSeal - SSP Putty and Pads, 3M #MPP-4S or equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUIT INSTALLATION SCHEDULE AND SIZING
A. In the event the location of conduit installation represents conflicting installation requirements as specified in the following schedule, a clarification shall be obtained from the Architect/Engineer. If this Contractor is unable to obtain a clarification as outlined above, concealed rigid galvanized steel conduit install
ed per these specifications and the Electrical Code shall be required.

B. Installation Schedule: Refer to drawings.

C. Size conduit as shown on the drawings and specifications. Where not indicated in the contract documents, conduit size shall be according to the Electrical Code. Conduit and conductor sizing shall be coordinated to limit conductor fill to less than 40%, maintain conductor ampere capacity as required by the Electrical Code (to include enlarged conductors due to temperature and quantity derating values) and to prevent excessive voltage drop and pulling tension due to long conduit/conductor lengths.

D. Minimum Conduit Size (Unless Noted Otherwise):

1. Above Grade: 3/4 inch. (The use of 1/2 inch would be allowed for installation conduit to individual light switches, individual receptacles and individual fixture whips from junction box.)

2. Below Grade 5' or less from Building Foundation: 3/4 inch.

3. Below Grade More than 5' from Building Foundation: 3/4 inch.

4. Telecommunication Conduit: 1 inch.

5. Controls Conduit: 3/4 inch.

E. Conduit sizes shall change only at the entrance or exit to a junction box, unless specifically noted on the drawings.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 CONDUIT AND BOXES SECTION 26 0533-7

3.2 CONDUIT ARRANGEMENT
A. In general, conduit shall be installed concealed in walls, in finished spaces and where possible or practical, or as noted otherwise. Conduit shall be installed parallel or perpendicular to walls, ceilings, and exposed structural members. In unfinished spaces, mechanical and utility areas, conduit may run either concealed or exposed as conditions dictate and as practical unless noted otherwise on drawings.

Installation shall maintain headroom in exposed vicinities of pedestrian or vehicular traffic.

B. Exposed conduit on exterior walls or above roof will not be allowed without prior written approval of Architect/Engineer. A drawing of the proposed routing and a photo of the location shall be submitted 14 days prior to start of conduit rough-in. Routing shall be shown on coordination drawings.

C. Conduit shall not share the same cell as structural reinforcement in masonry walls.

D. Conduit runs shall be routed as shown on large scale drawings. Conduit routing on drawings scaled 1/4"=1'-0" or less shall be considered diagrammatic, unless noted otherwise. The correct routing, when shown diagrammatically shall be chosen by the Contractor based on information in the contract documents, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable codes, the NECA's "Standard of Installation", in accordance with recognized industry standards, and coordinated with other contrac
tors.

E. Contractor shall adapt Contractor's work to the job conditions and make such changes as required and permitted by the Architect/Engineer, such as moving to clear beams and joists, adjusting at columns, avoiding interference with windows, etc., to permit the proper installation of other mechanical and/or electrical equipment.

F. Contractor shall cooperate with all contractors on the project. Contractor shall obtain details of other contractor's work to ensure fit and avoid conflict. Any expense due to the failure of This Contractor to do so shall be paid for in full by Contractor. The other trades involved as directed by the Architect/Engineer shall perform the repair of work damaged as a result of neglect or error by This Contractor. The resultant costs shall be borne by This Contractor.

3.3 CONDUIT SUPPORT
A. Conduit runs installed above a suspended ceiling shall be properly supported. In no case shall conduit rest on the suspended ceiling construction, nor utilize ceiling support system for conduit support.

1. Support wire used to independently support raceway and wiring systems above suspending ceilings shall be supported on both ends, minimum 12 gauge suspended ceiling support wire, and distinguishable from ceiling support systems by color (field paint), tagging, or equivalent means.

B. Conduit shall not be supported from ductwork, water, sprinkler piping, or other non-structural

members, unless approved by the Architect/Engineer. All supports shall be from structural slabs, walls, structural members, and bar joists, and coordinated with all other applicable contractors, unless noted otherwise.

C. Conduit shall be held in place by the correct size of galvanized one-hole conduit clamps, two-hole conduit straps, patented support devices, clamp back conduit hangers, or by other means if called for on the drawings.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 CONDUIT AND BOXES SECTION 26 0533-8
D. Support individual horizontal raceways with separate, malleable-iron pipe hangers or clamps.

E. Spring-steel conduit clips specifically designed for supporting single conduits or tubing may be used in lieu of malleable-iron hangers for 1" and smaller raceways serving lighting and receptacle branch circuits above accessible ceilings and for securing raceways to slotted channel and angle supports.

F. Group conduits in parallel runs where practical and use conduit racks or trapeze hangers constructed of steel channel, suspended with threaded solid rods or wall mounted from metal channels with conduit straps or clamps. Provide space in each rack or trapeze for 25% additional conduits.

G. Do not exceed 25 lbs. per hanger and a minimum spacing of 2'-0" on center when attaching to metal roof decking (excludes concrete on metal deck). This 25 lbs. load and 2'-0" spacing include adjacent electrical and mechanical items hanging from deck. If the hanger restrictions cannot be achieved, supplemental framing off steel framing will need to be added.

H. Arrange supports in vertical runs so the weight of raceways and enclosed conductors is carried entirely by raceway supports, with no weight load on raceway terminals.

I. Supports for metallic conduit shall be no greater than 10 feet. A smaller interval may be used if necessitated by buildi
ng construction, but in no event shall support spans exceed the Electrical Code requirements. Conduit shall be securely fastened within 3 feet of each outlet box, junction box, device box, cabinet, or fitting.

J. Supports of flexible conduit shall be within 12 inches of each outlet box, junction box, device box, cabinet, or fitting and at intervals not to exceed 4.5 feet.

K. Supports for non-metallic conduit shall be at sufficiently close intervals to eliminate any sag in the conduit. The manufacturer's recommendations shall be followed, but in no event shall support spans exceed the Electrical Code requirements.

L. Where conduit is to be installed in poured concrete floors or walls, provide concrete-tight conduit inserts securely fastened to forms to prevent conduit misplacement.

M. Finish:

1. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and above suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed.

2. Trim all ends of exposed field fabricated steel hangers, slotted channel and threaded rod to within 1" of support or fastener to eliminate potential injury to personnel unless shown otherwise on the drawings. Smooth ends and install elastomeric insulation with two coats of latex paint if exposed steel is within 6'-6" of finish floor and presents potential injury to personnel.

3.4 CONDUIT INSTALLATION
A.

Conduit Connections:

1. Shorter than standard conduit lengths shall be cut square using industry standards. The ends of all conduits cut shall be reamed or otherwise finished to remove all rough edges.

2. Metallic conduit connections in slab on grade installation shall be sealed and one coat of rust inhibitor primer applied after the connection is made.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 CONDUIT AND BOXES SECTION 26 0533-9

3. Where conduits with tapered threads cannot be coupled with standard couplings, then approved split or Erickson couplings shall be used. Running threads will not be permitted.

4. Install expansion/deflection joints where conduit crosses structure expansion/seismic joints.

B. Conduit terminations for all low voltage wiring shall have nylon bushings installed on each end of every conduit run.

C. Conduit Bends:

1. Use a hydraulic one-shot conduit bender or factory elbows for bends in conduit 2" in size or larger. All steel conduit bending shall be done cold; no heating of steel conduit shall be permitted.

2. A run of conduit shall not contain more than the equivalent of four (4) quarter bends (360°), including those bends located immediately at the outlet or body.

3. Telecommunications conduits shall have no more than two (2) 90-degree bends between pull points and contain no continuous sections longer than 100 feet. Insert pull points or pull boxes for conduits exceeding 100 feet in length.
a. A third bend is acceptable if:
1) The total run is not longer than (33) feet.
2) The conduit size is increased to the next trade size.

4. Telecommunications pull boxes shall not be used in lieu of a bend. Align conduits that enter the pull box from opposite ends with each other. Pull box size shall be twelve (12) times the diameter of the largest conduit. Slip sleeves or gutters can be used in place of a pull box.

5. Telecommunica
tions Conduit(s): Maintain appropriate conduit bend radius at all times. For conduits with an internal diameter of less than 2", maintain a bend radius of at least 6 times the internal diameter. For conduits with an internal diameter 2" or greater, maintain a bend radius of at least 10 times the internal diameter.

6. Rigid polyvinyl chloride conduit (PVC) runs longer than 100 feet or runs which have more than two 90° equivalent bends (regardless of length) shall use rigid metal or RTRC factory elbows for bends.

7. Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction (i.e. around beams).

D. Conduit Placement:

1. Conduit shall be mechanically continuous from source of current to all outlets. Conduit shall be electrically continuous from source of current to all outlets, unless a properly sized grounding conductor is routed within the conduit. All metallic conduits shall be bonded per the Electrical Code.

2. Route exposed conduit and conduit above suspended ceilings (accessible or not) parallel/perpendicular to the building structural lines, and as close to building structure as possible. Wherever possible, route horizontal conduit runs above water and steam piping.

3. Route conduit through roof openings provided for piping and ductwork where possible. If not provided or routing through provided openings is not possible, route through roof jack with pitch pocket. Coordinate
roof penetrations with other trades.

4. Conduits, raceway, and boxes shall not be installed in concealed locations in metal deck roofing or less than 1.5" below bottom of roof decking.

5. Avoid moisture traps where possible. Where unavoidable, provide a junction box with drain fitting at conduit low point.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 CONDUIT AND BOXES SECTION 26 0533-10

6. All conduits through walls shall be grouted or sealed into openings. Where conduit penetrates firewalls and floors, seal with a UL listed sealant. ; refer to Section 26 0503 for through penetration firestopping requirements.

7. CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL OPENINGS REQUIRED IN MASONRY OR EXTERIOR WALLS UNDER THIS DIVISION. A QUALIFIED MASON AT

THE EXPENSE OF THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL REPAIR ALL OPENINGS TO MATCH EXISTING CONDITIONS.

8. Seal interior of conduit at exterior entries, air handling units, coolers/freezers, etc., and where the temperature differential can potentially be greater than 20°F, to prevent moisture penetration. Seal shall be placed where conduit enters warm space. Conduit seal fitting shall be a drain/seal, with sealing compound, identified for use with cable and raceway system.

9. Horizontal conduit routing through slabs above grade a. Conduits, if run in concrete structure, shall be in middle one-third of slab thickness, and leave at least 3" min. concrete cover. Conduits shall run parallel to each other and spaced at least 8" apart centerline to centerline. Secure raceways to reinforcing rods to prevent sagging or shifting during concrete placement. Maximum conduit outside diameter 1". b. No conduits are allowed in concrete on metal deck unless expressly approved in writing by the Structural Engineer.
c.

No conduits are allowed to be routed horizontally through slabs above grade.

10. Do not route conduits across each other in slabs on grade.

11. Rigid polyvinyl chloride conduit (PVC) shall be installed when material surface temperatures and ambient temperature are greater than 40°F.

12. Contractor shall provide suitable mechanical protection around all conduits stubbed out from floors, walls or ceilings during construction to prevent bending or damaging of stubs due to carelessness with construction equipment.

13. Contractor shall provide a polypropylene pull cord with 2000 lbs. tensile strength in each empty conduit (indoor and outdoor), except in sleeves and nipples.

14. Telecommunications conduits that protrude through the structural floor shall be installed 1 to 3" above finished floor (AFF).

15. Telecommunications conduits that enter into Telecommunications rooms below the finished ceiling shall terminate a minimum of 4" below ceiling and as close to the wall as possible.

16. Telecommunications conduits that are below grade and enter into a building shall terminate a minimum of 4" above finished floor (AFF) and as close to the wall as possible.

3.5 CONDUIT TERMINATIONS
A. Where conduit bonding is indicated or required in the contract documents, the bushings shall be a grounding type sized for the conduit and ground bonding conductor as manufactured by O-Z/Gedney, Appleton, Thomas & Betts, Burndy, Regal,
Orbit Industries or approved equal.

B. Conduits with termination fittings shall be threaded for one (1) lock nut on the outside and one (1) lock nut and bushing on the inside of each box.

C. Where conduits terminate in boxes with knockouts, they shall be secured to the boxes with lock nuts and provided with approved screw type tinned iron bushings or fittings with plastic inserts.

D. Where conduits terminate in boxes, fittings, or bodies with threaded openings, they shall be tightly screwed against the shoulder portion of the threaded openings.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 CONDUIT AND BOXES SECTION 26 0533-11
E. Conduit terminations to all motors shall be made with flexible metallic conduit (FMC), unless noted otherwise. Final connections to roof exhaust fans, or other exterior motors and motors in damp or wet locations shall be made with liquidtight flexible metallic conduit (LFMC). Motors in hazardous areas, as defined in the Electrical Code, shall be connected using flexible conduit rated for the environment.

Flexible conduit shall not exceed 6' in length. Route equipment ground conductors from circuit ground to motor ground terminal through flexible conduit.

F. Rigid polyvinyl chloride conduit (PVC) shall be terminated using fittings and bodies produced by the manufacturer of the conduit, unless noted otherwise. Prepare conduit as per manufacturer's recommendations before joining. All joints shall be solvent welded by applying full even coat of plastic cement to the entire areas that will be joined. Turn the conduit at least a quarter to one half turn in the fitting and let the joint cure for 1-hour minimum or as per the manufacturer's recommendations.

G. All conduit ends shall be sealed with plastic immediately after installation to prevent the entrance of any foreign matter during construction. The seals shall be removed and the conduits blown clear of all foreign matter prior to any wires or pull cords being installed.

3.6 UNDE

RGROUND CONDUIT INSTALLATION
A. Conduit Connections:

1. Conduit joints in a multiple conduit run shall be staggered at least one foot apart.

B. Conduit Bends (Lateral):

1. Conduits shall have long sweep radius elbows instead of standard elbows wherever special bends are indicated and noted on the drawings, or as required by the manufacturer of the equipment or system being served.

2. Telecommunications conduit bend radius shall be six times the diameter for conduits under 2" and ten times the diameter for conduits over 2". Where long cable runs are involved, sidewall pressures may require larger radius bends. Coordinate with Architect/Engineer prior to conduit installation to determine bend radius.

C. Conduit Elbows (vertical):

1. Minimum metal or RTRC elbow radiuses shall be 30 inches for primary conduits (greater than 600V) and 18 inches for secondary conduits (less than 600V). Increase radius, as required, based on pulling tension calculation requirements.

D. Expansion Fittings at Finished Grade: Provide underground raceways with an expansion fitting after emerging from finished grade and exterior equipment pads. Field locate the expansion fitting above and within 24 inches of finished grade. Raceways extending less than 12 inches above finished grade, transitioning to LFMC within 12 inches of finished grade, and interior concrete building slabs do not require an expansion fitti
ng unless required by code.

E. Conduit Placement:

1. Conduit runs shall be pitched a minimum of 4" per 100 feet to drain toward the terminations.

Duct runs shall be installed deeper than the minimum wherever required to avoid any conflicts with existing or new piping, tunnels, etc.

2. For parallel runs, use suitable separators and chairs installed not greater than 4' on centers. Band conduit together with suitable banding devices. Securely anchor conduit to prevent movement during concrete placement or backfilling.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 CONDUIT AND BOXES SECTION 26 0533-12

3. Where concrete is required, the materials for concreting shall be thoroughly mixed to a minimum f'c = 2500 and immediately placed in the trench around the conduits. No concrete that has been allowed to partially set shall be used.

4. Before the Contractor pulls any cables into the conduit, Contractor shall have a mandrel 1/4" smaller than the conduit inside diameter pulled through each conduit and if any concrete or obstructions are found, the Contractor shall remove them and clear the conduit. Spare conduit shall also be cleared of all obstructions.

5. Conduit terminations in manholes, masonry pull boxes, or masonry walls shall be with malleable iron end bell fittings.

6. All spare conduits not terminated in a covered enclosure shall have its terminations plugged as described above.

7. Ductbanks and conduit shall be installed a minimum of 24" below finished grade, unless otherwise noted on the drawings or elsewhere in these specifications.

8. All non-metallic conduit installed underground outside of a slab shall be rigid.

F. Horizontal Directional Drilling:

1. Entire drill path shall be accurately surveyed, with entry and exit stakes placed and coordinated with other contractors. If using a magnetic guidance system, entire drill path shall be surveyed for any surface geo-magnetic variations or anomalies.

2. Any util
ity locates within 20 feet of the bore path shall have the exact location physically verified by hand digging or vacuum excavation. Restore inspection holes to original condition after verification.

G. Raceway Seal (Exterior to Raceway):

1. All power, telecommunication, electrical conduits and innerducts shall be sealed between the raceway and the building foundation. The raceway penetration shall be sealed liquid-tight, water-tight, non-corrosive.

2. Below Grade Installation Options:
a. Cast-in-place concrete installation.
b. Hydraulic cement, hydraulic group, hydraulic epoxy.
c. Foundation - Underground Sleeves and Seals; refer to Part 2-Products for product information.

3. Above Grade Installation Options:
a. Masonry grout for masonry applications.
b. Caulk Sealant, interior/exterior rated, color per architect. Approved Manufacturers include Sachco, Tremco Vulkem, Sika or approved equal when not specified by architectural scope.

H. Raceway Seal (Interior to Raceway, with Cables or Empty):

1. All power, telecommunication, electrical conduits and innerducts, including those with cables, shall be sealed at the building and vault entry. The seal shall prevent the entry of liquids or gases. Seal must be compatible with conductors and raceway system. Spare or unused raceways shall also be sealed.

2. Installation Schedule, nominal size:
a. 2" or less: Duct Seal Bushing or Duct Sealant
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 CONDUIT AND BOXES SECTION 26 0533-13
b. 2-1/2" through 4": Duct Seal Bushing
c. 5" and 6": Wall Sleeve Duct Seal System

3.7 BOX INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
A. Galvanized steel boxes may be used in:

1. Concealed interior locations above ceilings and in hollow studded partitions.

2. Exposed interior locations in mechanical rooms and in rooms without ceilings; higher than 8' above the highest platform level.

3. Direct contact with concrete except slab on grade.

B. Cast boxes shall be used in:

1. Exterior locations.

2. Wet locations.

3.8 COORDINATION OF BOX LOCATIONS
A. Provide electrical boxes as shown on the drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections, and code compliance.

B. Electrical box locations shown on the Contract Drawings are approximate, unless dimensioned. Verify location of floor boxes and outlets in offices and work areas prior to rough-in.

C. Locate and install boxes to allow access. Avoid interferences with ductwork, piping, structure, equipment, etc. Recessed luminaires shall not be used as access to outlet, pull, and junction boxes.

Where installation is inaccessible, provide access doors. Coordinate locations and sizes of required access doors with the Architect/Engineer and General Contractor.

D. Locate and install to maintain headroom and to present a neat appearance.

E. Coordinate locations with Heating Contractor to avoid baseboard radiation cabinets.

3.9 OUTLET BOX INSTALLATION
A. Do not install boxes back-to-back in walls.

1. Provide a minimum horizontal separation of 6 inches between boxes installed on opposite sides of non-rated stud walls. When the minimum separation cannot be maintained, install sound insulation pads on all five sides of the back box in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

B. Mount at heights shown or noted on the drawings or as generally accepted if not specifically noted.

C. Support boxes independently of conduit.

D. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches, backsplashes, and below baseboard radiation.

E. Position outlets to locate luminaires as shown on reflected ceiling drawings.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 CONDUIT AND BOXES SECTION 26 0533-14
F. Provide recessed outlet boxes in finished areas; secure boxes to interior wall and partition studs, accurately positioned to allow for surface finish thickness. Use stamped steel stud bridges for flush outlets in hollow stud wall, and adjustable steel channel fasteners for flush ceiling outlet boxes.

G. Align wall-mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices.

3.10 PULL AND JUNCTION BOX INSTALLATION
A. Locate pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings or in unfinished areas.

B. Support pull and junction boxes independent of conduit.

C. Do not install boxes back-to-back in walls.

2. Provide a minimum horizontal separation of 24 inches between boxes installed on opposite sides of fire-rated walls. When the minimum separation cannot be maintained, the box is greater than 16 square inches or the total box area (all trades) per 100 square feet is greater than or equal to 100 square inches, install fire-rated moldable pads to all five sides of the back box to maintain the fire rating of the wall. Install moldable pads in accordance with UL listing for the specific product. Sound insulati
on pads are not acceptable for use in fire-rated wall applications unless the product carries the necessary fire rating.

D. Install sound insulation pads on all five sides of the back of all boxes in sound-rated wall assemblies.

Sound-rated wall assemblies are defined as partition types carrying a Sound Transmission Class (STC) rating.

3.11 EXPOSED BOX INSTALLATION
A. Boxes shall be secured to the building structure with proper size screws, bolts, hanger rods, or structural steel elements.

B. On brick, block and concrete walls or ceilings, exposed boxes shall be supported with no less than two (2) Ackerman-Johnson, Paine, Phillips, or approved equal screw anchors or expansion shields and round head machine screws. Cast boxes shall not be drilled.

C. On steel structures, exposed boxes shall be supported to the steel member by drilling and tapping the member and fastening the boxes by means of round head machine screws.

D. Boxes may be supported on steel members by APPROVED beam clamps if conduit is supported by beam clamps.

E. Boxes shall be fastened to wood structures by means of a minimum of two (2) wood screws adequately large and long to properly support. (Quantity depends on size of box.) F.

Wood, plastic, or fiber plugs shall not be used for fastenings.

G. Explosive devices shall not be used unless specifically allowed.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 CONDUIT AND BOXES SECTION 26 0533-15
END OF SECTION 26 0533
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 CONDUIT AND BOXES SECTION 26 0533-16
(This Page Intentionally Left Blank)
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION SECTION 26 0553-1
SECTION 26 0553 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Adhesive Markings and Field Labels
B. Nameplates and Signs
C. Product Colors

1.2 REFERENCES
A. NFPA 70E - National Electrical Safety Code
B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC)
C. CEC California Electrical Code
D. ANSI A13.1 - Standard for Pipe Identification
E. ANSI Z535.4 - Standard for Product Safety Signs and Labels

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical identification products shall be suitable for the environment installed. Identification labels damaged by the environment due to ultraviolet light fading, damp or wet conditions, physical damage, corrosion, or other conditions shall be replaced with labels suitable for the environment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ADHESIVE MARKINGS AND FIELD LABELS
A. Wire/Cable Designation Tape Markers: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive, wraparound, cable/conductor markers with preprinted numbers and letter.

B. Cable Ties: Fungus-inert, self-extinguishing, one-piece, self-locking nylon cable ties, 0.18-inch minimum width, 50-lb minimum tensile strength, and suitable for a temperature range from - 40°F to 185°F (-40°C to 85°C), type 2/2S or type 21/21S based on application. Provide ties in specified colors when used for color coding. Cable ties shall be listed and identified for the application, securement, and support.

C. Text Sizes:

1. The following information shall be used for text heights, fonts, and size, unless otherwise noted.
a. Font: Normal 721 Swiss Bold
b. Adhesive Label
s: 3/16 inch minimum text height
c. Vinyl / Plastic Laminate Labels: 3/4" inch minimum text height IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION SECTION 26 0553-2

2.2 NAMEPLATES AND SIGNS
A. Engraved, Plastic-Laminated Labels, Signs and Instruction Plates: Engraving stock melamine plastic laminate, 1/16-inch minimum thick for signs up to 20 square inches, or 8 inches in length; 1/8 inch thick for larger sizes. Labels shall be punched for mechanical fasteners.

B. Baked-Enamel Signs for interior Use: Preprinted aluminum signs, punched, or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for application. Mounting ¼" grommets in corners.

C. Exterior, Metal-Backed, Butyrate Signs: Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose- acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396 inch galvanized-steel backing: and with colors, legend, and size required for application. Mounting 1/4" grommets in corners.

D. Safety Signs: Comply with 29 CFR, Chapter XVII, Part 1910.145.

E. Fasteners for Plastic-Laminated Signs; Self-tapping stainless steel screws or number 10/32 stainless steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

2.3 PRODUCT COLORS
A. Adhesive Markings and Field Labels:

1. All Labels: Black letters on white face

2. Normal Power and General Labels: Black letters on white face

3. Control Labels: Black letters on white face

4. Fire Alarm: Red letters on white face
B. Nameplates and Signs:

1. NORMAL POWER: Black letters on white face

2. Control Labels: Black letters on white face

3. GROUNDING: White letters on green face.

C. Box Covers:

1. Box covers shall be painted to correspond with system type as follows:
a. Normal Power and General:

Silver
b. Fire Alarm System: Red

2. Box cover colors shall match conduit colors listed above.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Lettering and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations used in electrical identification work with corresponding designations specified or indicated. Install numbers, lettering, and colors as approved in submittals and as required by code.

The installation of colored raceways and labeling may not be aesthetically desirable in finished spaces. The contractor shall coordinate identification requirements in exposed ceilings of finished spaces with the Architect/Engineer prior to installation and ordering of materials.

C. Electrical System Color Chart: This Contractor shall furnish and install framed 8" x 12" charts of the color-coded identification scheme used for the electrical system in all electrical rooms and next to the main fire alarm panel.

D. Install identification devices in accordance with manufacturer's written instruction and requirements of Electrical Code.

E. Sequence of Work: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces that require finish, install identification after completion of finish work. All mounting surfaces shall be cleaned and degreased prior to identification installation.

F. Circuit Identification: Tag or label conductors as follows:

1. Multiple Power or Lighting Circuits in Same Enclosure: Where multiple branch circuits are terminated or spliced in a box or enclosure, label each conductor with source and circuit number.

2. Multiple Control Wiring and Communication/Signal Circuits in Same Enclosure: For control and communications/signal wiring, use wire/cable marking tape at terminations in wiring boxes, troughs, and control cabinets. Use consistent letter/number conductor designations
throughout on wire/cable marking tape.

3. Match identification markings with designations used in panelboards shop drawings, Contract Documents, and similar previously established identification schemes for the facility's electrical installations.

G. Apply Danger, Warning, Caution and instruction signs as follows:

1. Install Danger, Warning, Caution or instruction signs where required by Electrical Code, where indicated, or where reasonably required to assure safe operation and maintenance of electrical systems and of the items to which they connect. Install engraved plastic- laminated instruction signs with approved legend where instructions or explanations are needed for system or equipment operation. Install metal-backed butyrate signs for outdoor items.

2. 'Danger' indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. ANSI standard red background, white letters.

3. 'Warning' indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. ANSI standard orange background, black letters.

4. 'Caution' indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury. ANSI standard yellow background, black letters.

H. Apply circuit/control/item designation labels of engraved plastic laminate for pushbuttons, pilot lights, alarm/signal components, and similar items, except where labeling is specified elsewhere.

I. Install labels parallel to equipment lines at locations as required and at locations for best convenie
nce of viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

J. Install ARC FLASH WARNING signs on all power distribution equipment per Section 26 0573.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION SECTION 26 0553-4
K. Selective Coordination Label: Install caution signs on all switchboards, distribution panels, panelboards, disconnects, and other equipment with selectively coordinated overcurrent protection devices. Sign at a minimum shall contain:

1. CAUTION: OVERCURRENT DEVICES IN THIS ENCLOSURE ARE SELECTIVELY COORDINATED. EQUIVALENT REPLACEMENTS AND TRIP SETTINGS ARE REQUIRED.

L. Underground Electrical Lines: For exterior underground power, control, signal, and communication lines, install continuous underground plastic line marker located directly above line at 6 (150mm) to 8 (205mm) inches below grade. A single plastic line marker is permitted when the width of the common trench does not exceed 16 inches; provide a second plastic line marker to mark each edge of the trench when 16 inches of width is exceeded.

3.2 FEEDER AND BRANCH CIRCUIT DIRECTORIES
A. Product:

1. Nameplates and signs
B. Feeder Directories Branch: Provide each feeder, branch circuit, feeder modification, and branch circuit modification with a typed circuit directory label. Refer to technical equipment specification sections for additional requirements. Include the following with each label:

1. Load Description: Lighting, receptacles, specific equipment, spare, space, or similar description.

2. Location: Room name, number, location.

C. Provide a factory or custom clear plastic sleeve for each branch panel directory and secure to inside panel cover. Three ring binders with individual circuit directories for each applic able
branch panel may be substituted when AHJ approved, all branch panels are within the same room and within sight of the binder, and the binder is supplied with three printed copies of each directory, an electronic editable copy of the directors is saved to USB within the binder, and the binder is permanently secured an adjacent wall with a chain or metal cable with adequate length to reference the binder within the working clearance space of each applicable panel. Provide a wall mounted drop-in office bin to store the binder.

3.3 LIGHTING CONTROL AND RECEPTACLE COVER PLATES
A. Product:

1. Nameplates and signs
B. Identification material to be a clear, 3/8-inch Kroy tape or Brother self-laminating vinyl label with black letters. Embossed Dymo-Tape labels are not acceptable. Permanently affix identification label to cover plates, centered above the receptacle openings.

C. Provide identification on all switch and receptacle cover plates. Identification shall indicate source and circuit number serving the device (e.g. "C1A #24").

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION SECTION 26 0553-5

3.4 CONDUIT AND EXPOSED CABLE LABELING
A. Conduit Identification: Pre-printed, flexible, self-adhesive vinyl labels with legend at 20 foot (6 meter) intervals to identify all conduits run exposed or located above accessible ceilings.

Conduits located above non-accessible ceiling or in floors and walls shall be labeled within 3 feet of becoming accessible, or separated by enclosures, walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors.

Labels for multiple conduits shall be aligned. Refer to color requirements in Part 2 when applicable in addition to the following:

1. Medium Voltage (greater than 1,000 volt): Indicate feeder identification and voltage.

2. 1000 Volt or less Normal/Emergency Power: Indicate feeder identification and voltage.

3. Fire Alarm: Indicate "FIRE ALARM".

4. Grounding: Indicate "GROUND" and equipment and designation.

B. Blank conduit ends or outlet boxes for future extension of system shall have permanent identification marker indicating purpose of conduit or box and where the raceway originated.

3.5 BOX LABELING
A. Identify Junction, Pull and Connection Boxes: Labeling shall be 3/8-inch Kroy tape OR Brother self-laminating vinyl label, letters/numbers color coded same as conduits.

B. All junction, pull, and connection boxes shall be identified as follows:

1. For power and lighting circuits, indicate system voltage and identity of contained circuits ("120V, 1LA1-3,5,7").

2. For other wiring, indicate system type and description of wiring ("FIRE ALARM NAC #1").

3.6 CONDUCT

OR COLOR CODING
A. Products:

1. All wire and cables shall be color coded by the manufacturer.

2. All wires and cables, 6 AWG or larger, used in motor circuits, main feeders, sub-main feeders, and branch circuits shall be coded by the application of plastic tape. The tape shall be 3-M, Plymouth or Permacel in colors specified below. The tape shall be applied at each conductor termination with two 1-inch tape bands at 6-inch centers. Contractor option to use colored cabling in lieu of the tape at each end for conductor 6 AWG to 500 KCM.

B. Where more than one nominal voltage system exists in a building or facility, each ungrounded conductor of a multi-wire branch circuit, where accessible, shall be identified by phase and system.

C. Conductors shall be color coded as follows:

1. 208Y/120 Volt, 4-Wire:
a. A-Phase - Black
b. B-Phase - Red
c. C-Phase - Blue
d. Neutral - White
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION SECTION 26 0553-6

2. Grounding Conductors:
a. Equipment grounding conductors, main/system/supply-side bonding jumpers:

Green.
b. Isolated Equipment Ground Conductors: Green with colored distinctive yellow stripe along the entire length of the conductor. Isolated ground for feeders, use colored tape with alternating bands of green and yellow to provide a minimum of three bands of green and two bands of yellow.

3. Cabling for Remote Control, Signal, and Power Limited Circuits:
a. Fire Alarm: Refer to Fire Alarm and Automatic Detection Section 28 3100 for cable color requirements.
b. Low Voltage Switching: Per manufacturer recommendations and code requirements.
c. Building Automation Systems and Control: Refer to the Temperature Control Contactor notes located on the mechanical cover sheet.
d. Electronic Control: Per manufacturer recommendations and code requirements.

3.7 CONTROL EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A. Products:

1. Nameplates and signs
B. Provide identification on the front of all control equipment such as combination starters, starters, VFDs, contactors, motor control centers, etc.

C. Identification shall be provided for all connections to equipment furnished by this Contractor, other contractors, or the Owner.

D. Labeling shall include:

1. Equipment type and contract documents designation of equipment being served.

2. Location of equipment being served if it is not located within sight.

3. Voltage and phase of circuit(s).

4. Panel and circuit number(s) serving the equipment.

5. Method of automatic control, if included ("AUTO CONTROL BY FMCS").

6. Available fault current;
refer to one-line diagram or panel schedule of panel serving equipment.

7. Date of fault current study, refer to one-line diagram

8. Sample Label:

EXHAUST FAN EF-1 ("LOCATED ON ROOF")
480V, 3-PHASE
FED FROM "1HA1-1"

AUTO CONTROL BY FMCS
22,000 AMPS AVAILABLE FAULT CURRENT
DATE OF STUDY: 1 JAN 2017
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION SECTION 26 0553-7

3.8 EQUIPMENT CONNECTION IDENTIFICATION
A. Products:

1. Nameplates and signs
B. Provide identification for hard wired electrical connections to equipment such as disconnects switches, starters, etc. Plug and cord type connections do not require this specific label.

C. Identification shall be provided for all connections to equipment furnished by this Contractor, other contractors, or the Owner. The following list of equipment is specifically being listed to receive an equipment connection label; this list does not limit the equipment that shall receive a label:

1. Mechanical heating, ventilation, and air conditioning equipment; chillers, boilers, pumps, air handing ventilation units, condensing units, unit heaters, and similar equipment

2. Plumbing equipment

3. Fire protection equipment including fire pumps
D. Labeling shall include:

1. Equipment type and contract documents designation of equipment being served

2. Location of equipment being served if it is not located within sight.

3. Voltage and rating of the equipment.

4. Panel and circuit numbers(s) serving the equipment

5. Available fault current; refer to one-line diagram or panel schedule of panel serving equipment.

6. Date of fault current study; refer to one-line diagram

7. Sample Label:

UNIT HEATER UH-1 ("LOCATED IN STORAGE ROOM 200")
480V: 3-PHASE
FED FROM "1HA1-1"
22,000 AMPS AVAILABLE FAULT CURRENT
DATE OF STUDY: 1 JAN 2017

3.9 POWER DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A. Products:

1. Nameplates and signs
B. Provide identification on the front of all power distribut ion equipment such as panelboards,
switchboards, switchgear, motor control centers, generators, UPS, storage battery disconnects, transfer switches, etc. Labels shall be visible on the exterior of the gear, correspond to the one- line diagram nomenclature, and identify each cubicle of multi-section gear.

1. Interior Equipment: The identification material shall be engraved plastic-laminated labels.

2. Exterior Equipment: The identification material shall be engraved vinyl labels.

3. Labeling shall include:
a. Equipment type and contract documents designation of equipment. b. Voltage of the equipment.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION SECTION 26 0553-8
c. Name of the upstream equipment and location of the upstream equipment if it is not located within sight.
d. Rating and type of the overcurrent protection device serving the equipment if it is not located within sight ("FED BY 400A/3P BREAKER").
e. Sample Label:

DISTRIBUTION PANEL DP-H1
480Y/277V
FED FROM SWITCHBOARD "SB-1" (LOCATED IN MAIN ELEC ROOM)

4. Provide the following on a separate label, installed below the label above:
a. Available fault current; refer to one-line diagram or panel schedules b. Date of fault current study; refer to one-line diagram c. Sample Label:
22,000 AMPS AVAILABLE FAULT CURRENT
DATE OF STUDY: 1 JAN 2017
C. Service Equipment Label: A separate nameplate for the service entrance equipment and include:

1. Nominal system voltage, service wire size, quantity, material, distance

2. Maximum available fault current; refer to one-line diagram for values

3. Clearing time of overcurrent protection devices based on available fault current. Refer to calculations and report from Section 26 0573 for value.

4. Date of fault current study; refer to one-line diagram

5. Date of label

6. Sample Label:
480Y/277V, 6 SETS 4#750KCM CU, 75FT
39,800 AMPS AVAILABLE FAULT CURRENT

0.07 SECOND CLEARING TIME
DATE OF STUDY: 1 JAN 2017
DATE OF LABEL: 4 JUL 2017
D. Arc Energy Reduction Label:

1. Provide a separate engraved plastic laminate label centered at the top of each vertic al
section of the electrical gear indicating the following when applicable. a. Label: "This equipment is designed with a system listed below". b. Applicable Systems:
1) Zone-selective interlocking system for selective coordination and arc energy reduction
2) Differential relaying system for selective coordination and arc energy reduction
3) Arc energy reducing maintenance switch
4) Energy reducing active arc flash mitigation system
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION SECTION 26 0553-9
E. Nominal System Voltage Label:

Sacramento City CouncilFebruary 4, 2025

Sacramento City Council
February 4, 2025